12128-Elv-Specs-001

12128
AQUA RAFFLES JEDDAH - JEDDAH, KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

100% FINAL DESIGN – ADDENDUM NO. 2 - ISSUED FOR TENDER
PART 5 – ELV / AV / IT / SECURITY SPECIFICATIONS
REV. E
17 NOVEMBER 2016
Revision Date By Description Resp. Consult

A 18.08.2015 AR 100% Detailed Design – Issued for PMK
Tender NOTE: THIS DOCUMENT TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION
B 30.11.2015 PMK 100% Final Design PMK WITH THE ELV DRAWING PACKAGE.
C 29.02.2016 PMK 100% Final Design – Addendum No. PMK
01
D 14.06.2016 PMK 100% Final Design – Issued for Tender PMK SCALE: SHEET SIZE: DATE STARTED: CHECKED: STAGE:
E 17.11.2016 PMK 100% Final Design – Addendum No. PMK

2 - Issued for Tender NTS A4 17.11.2016 AR FD
DWG № Rev:
12-128-ELV-SPECS-001 E
12128
DIVISION 01 – COMMUNICATION CABLING SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
REV. E
17 NOVEMBER 2016

NOTE: THIS DOCUMENT TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION
Tender
WITH THE ELV DRAWING PACKAGE.
B 30.11.2015 PMK 100% Final Design PMK
C 29.02.2016 PMK 100% Final Design – Addendum 1 PMK
D 14.06.2016 PMK Consolidated 100% Final Design – PMK SCALE: SHEET SIZE: DATE STARTED: CHECKED: STAGE:
Issued for Tender
DWG № Rev:
12-128 Aqua Raffles Jeddah 100% Final Design – Addendum No. 2 - Issued for Tender
Jeddah, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia 17 November 2016
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL .................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 SUMMARY ...........................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 ACRONYMS.........................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................................5
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION...........................................................................................................................................6
1.5 SCOPE DEMARCATION SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................ 10
1.6 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................................................ 11
1.7 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................................................... 14
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................................................................................ 16
1.9 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS.............................................................................................................................. 20
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ............................................................................................................... 20
1.11 WARRANTY ........................................................................................................................................................ 20
1.12 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................................................. 21
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 23

2.1 MATERIALS......................................................................................................................................................... 23
2.2 HORIZONTAL COPPER DISTRIBUTION SOLUTION ................................................................................................. 24
2.3 FIBER DISTRIBUTION SOLUTION............................................................................................................................ 28
2.4 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND ENCLOSURE ................................................................................................................ 35
2.5 CONSOLIDATION POINTS .................................................................................................................................. 39
2.6 CABLE MANAGEMENT ....................................................................................................................................... 41
2.7 CABLE BASKETS .................................................................................................................................................. 43
2.8 OPTICAL FIBER RUNWAY .................................................................................................................................... 45
2.9 CABLE BUNDLING MATERIALS ............................................................................................................................ 46
2.10 TROUGHS, TROUGH COVERS & DISTRIBUTION RINGS.......................................................................................... 47
2.11 EARTHING AND BONDING MATERIALS ............................................................................................................... 47
2.12 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDU) ..................................................................................................................... 47
2.13 SPARES .............................................................................................................................................................. 48
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 49

3.1 FABRICATION .................................................................................................................................................... 49
3.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL .............................................................................................................................. 49
3.3 EXAMINATION ................................................................................................................................................... 49
3.4 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................................... 49
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................................................................... 54
3.8 TRAINING........................................................................................................................................................... 76
3.9 INSPECTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 77
3.10 TEST EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................................................ 77
3.11 ADJUSTING ........................................................................................................................................................ 78
3.12 CLEANING......................................................................................................................................................... 78
3.13 PROTECTION ..................................................................................................................................................... 78
27 10 00 Communication Cabling System - REV. E Page 1 of 78

SECTION 27 10 00
COMMUNICATION CABLING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Contractor shall perform all work, coordination, systems integration,
engineering design, and testing, and shall provide all products
required in order to ensure a fully operative system and proper
installation of equipment. System operability and proper installation
shall be verified via completion of the acceptance test plan.
B. Contractor shall coordinate all installation activities and details with

the Employer’s Information Technology Provider including final
configurations.
C. Contractor shall provide all system documentation and submittals.
D. Contractor shall provide warranty and maintenance support as

specified.
E. Contractor shall provide all calculations and/or analysis to support

design and engineering decisions as specified in Submittals.
F. Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, and
equipment. Pay required tax, gross receipts, and other taxes.
G. Contractor shall secure and pay for plan check fees, permits, fees,
and licenses necessary for execution of Work as applicable for the
project.
H. Contractor shall give required notices.
I. The Contractor shall perform pre-delivery testing, site testing, and

adjustment of the completed installation. The Contractor shall
provide all personnel, equipment, instrumentation, and supplies
necessary to perform all testing.
J. Contractor shall comply with all codes, ordinances, regulations,

and other legal requirements of public authorities that bear on
performance of Work.
K. Employer reserves the right to procure the required equipment

directly and provide it to the Contractor for installation,
configuration, and testing.

L. Contractor shall verify space, power and cooling requirements

associated with this Section.
M. Related Drawings:
1. “ITE” Series Drawings (Plans).
2. “ITS” Series Drawings (Block Diagrams and Schematic layouts).
3. Electronic Security System Drawings.
N. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Audiovisual Specification Section 27 40 00
2. IT Network Equipment Specification Section 27 20 00
3. Electronic Security System Specification Section 28 00 00
O. Coordination and interface with other trades including but not

limited to:
1. Architectural Drawings and Specifications
2. Interiors Drawings and Specifications
3. MEP Drawings and Specifications
4. Structural Drawings and Specifications
5. Authorities having jurisdiction.
P. Contractor to refer to Appendix A “AV/IT/Security Responsibility

Matrix” and comply with the scope responsibility.
1.2 ACRONYMS
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASTM® American Society for Testing and Materials
AV Audio Visual
BICSI Building Industry Consulting Service International
BSSC Building Seismic Safety Council
CENELEC Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique

(European Committee for Electrotechnical
Standardization)
CSA Canadian Standard Association.

EIA Electronics Industries Association
ELV Extra Low Voltage
EN European norm
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FTR Floor Telecom Room
Gbps Gigabit per Second
IDC Insulation Displacement Connector
IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISP Internet Service Provider
IT Information Technology
ITU International Telecommunication Union
ITU-T ITU—Telecommunication Standardization Sector
LC Lucent Connector
LDV Link Design Value
LVJB Low Voltage Junction box
LSZH Low Smoke Zero Halogen
MDF Main Distribution Frame
Mbps Megabit per second
NEC National Electric Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NESC National Electric Safety Code
NEXT Near End Cross Talk
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
PDU Power Distribution Unit

RU Rack Unit
SC Subscriber Connector
SCS Structured Cabling System
ST Straight Tip
TDMM Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual
TIA Telecommunications Industries Association
TCP Tenant Consolidation Point
TO Telecommunications Outlet
UL Underwriters Laboratory
UPVC Un-Plasticized Poly-Vinyl Chloride
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Local Construction Codes and Regulation
B. Local Electrical Authority (Guide lines)
C. Local Telecommunication Authority (Guide lines)
D. Ministry of communication specification and regulations

(Guidelines)
E. National Electric Code (N.E.C.).
F. National Electric Safety Code (N.E.S.C.).
G. National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.).
H. American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.).
I. Electronics Industries Association (E.I.A).
J. Telecommunications Industries Association (T.I.A.).
K. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI)

Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)
L. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard
M. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard

N. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 569-A Commercial Building Standard for

Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
O. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 606-A Administration Standard for Commercial

Telecommunications Infrastructure
P. ANSI-J-STD-607-A Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and

Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
Q. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) X3T9.5 Requirements

for UTP at 100 Megabit per seconds (Mbps)
R. ISO/IEC 11801 Information Technology – Generic Cabling for

Customer Premises
S. American Society for Testing Materials (A.S.T.M.).
T. Building Seismic Safety Council (B.S.S.C.)
U. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
V. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
W. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Testing Bulletin
X. CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 0-10 - General requirements - Canadian

electrical code, part II
Y. Underwriter's Laboratory, Inc. (UL):
1. UL-5A: Standard for Non-Metallic Raceways and Fittings.
2. UL-5C: Standard for Surface Raceways and Fittings for Use with
Data, Signal, and Control Circuits.
3. UL-50: Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
4. UL-94-V0: Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials.
5. UL1863: Standard for Safety - Communications Circuit

Accessories.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. It is the Design Intent to provide cabling infrastructure system which
shall support a high-speed (1-10Gbps), switched, multi-protocol,
Ethernet based network, providing IP based services compliant with
ANSI/TIA/EIA and ISO standards, and Building Industry Consulting
Service International (BICSI) Telecommunications Design Methods
Manual (TDMM) to the facility.

B. The design requires that the cabling infrastructure be installed as a

“Structured Cabling Solution” using the same manufacturer
throughout the entire SCS installation.
C. This means the cabling system is based on a Physical star topology

and designed with a single manufacturer’s end to end solution.
D. Incoming services infrastructure will be provided from the Local

Internet Service Provider (ISP). All incoming cables shall be
terminated in the Main Telecom Room (MTR). Two MTRs have been
provided for the project to accommodate redundancy and
multiple cable entry from one or more ISPs.
E. Direct connections shall be provided from the main ISP room (MTR)
to each of the following entities as shown on the schematic
drawings:
1. Hotel IT Server Room
2. Residential Apartments (via IDF rooms)
3. Retail Outlets
4. Retail IT Server Room
F. The two MTRs shall be interlinked via Single Mode Fibre Cabling.
G. A dedicated Hotel Operator IT Server Room is provided to

accommodate all IT based services such as Networks for Office
Administration, Guest, Facilities, Security as well as the active
components for GRMS, IPTV, IP-PBX (hybrid) System, Digital Signage,
HSIA and Operator Applications equipment.
H. The Hotel IT Server Room shall be segregated into zones as

described on the design drawings using wire mesh partitions. Each
zone shall be accessed controlled.
I. All core switch racks within the IT Hotel Server Room shall be
connected to the Passive rack in the Admin/Guest section. The
Electronic Security system network rack and Facilities network rack
shall be connected via the Multimode OM4 and CAT6 UTP copper
cables as shown in the schematic.
J. The Hotel IT Sever Room will be connected to both MTRs via Single
Mode Fiber and CAT6 UTP copper cables.
K. The Hotel IT Server Room and Retail IT Server Room shall be

interlinked via Multimode OM4 fiber optics.

L. IDF rooms are provided on all floors to provide the cabling

infrastructure risers as well as cable terminations and equipment for
all services.
M. IDF rooms for the Hotel and Residential towers shall consist of rack
mounted GPON splitters (for guest network) as well as patch panels
and switches on selected floors for the facilities, security and admin
networks where indicated.
N. Wall mounted fiber optic enclosures shall also be provided within

the residential IDF rooms to act as the floor distributor (Mini-ODF) for
the ISP network.
O. The IDFs supporting hotel Meeting rooms, Ballroom and Pre-function

rooms shall be interlinked with Multimode OM4 fiber optic cables as
indicated on the schematic diagram.
P. The Hotel IT backbone shall consist of a combination of Single-

mode OS1 and Multimode OM4 fiber optic cables in a hierarchical
star arrangement and terminated on fibre optic patch panels at
each IDF room as per the IT Structured Cabling System (SCS) single
line diagrams.
Q. Single mode OS1 fiber optic backbone cables shall be provided for
the Residential and Hotel tower IDF rooms and used for the Guest
connectivity [GPON System]. The single mode OS1 fibre optic
cables shall also be provided to supply the direct FTTH services from
the ISP via the IDF rooms.
R. The OM4 Multimode fiber optic backbone cables shall be shared

between the Admin, Guest, Facility and Electronic Security system,
even though these networks shall be physically separate using
dedicated fibre cores.
S. Horizontal cabling shall be ANSI/TIA/EIA Category 6, deployed in a

“home-run” arrangement from each IDF to the
Telecommunications Outlet (TO), floor boxes and consolidation
points.
T. The horizontal cabling for Facilities network and Electronic security

system shall be terminated on the alternate IDF’s as indicated in the
schematic drawings for the Residential and Hotel Towers.
U. Each Serviced apartment shall have connectivity from the Hotel

GPON network as well as from the ISP network terminated within a
dedicated wall mounted enclosure within the apartments. This shall
enable the service apartment tenant to choose between Hotel
services or direct ISP services via passive patching within the wall
enclosure.

V. Each Guestroom shall have connectivity from the Hotel GPON

network, terminated within Low Voltage Junction Boxes (LVJB)
installed in the corridors.
W. The Guestroom Horizontal data and voice outlets shall originate

from the LVJB. Refer to the RCP layouts for LVJB locations.
X. All LVJBs and Serviced Apartment wall enclosures shall be

supported from UPS power outlets, connected from a centralized
UPS.
Y. The Retail IT Server room shall be provided to accommodate the

retail passive cabling, Network racks, IT network switches, servers
and Security servers.
Z. Tenant Consolidation Points (TCPs) shall be provided to each retail

unit for direct connection to the ISP. All TCPs shall have a single
mode fibre optic backbone cabling from the main MTR.
AA. Each Retail Unit (shell and core) shall include a connection back to
nearest Hotel IDF room via CAT6 UTP cables, this will allow the Hotel
Operator to provide Hotel network connections should it be
required in the future.
BB. The Data outlets and Security outlets in retail common area at
ground floor will be originate from the Retail IT server room.
CC. Patching within all equipment rooms shall be provided for 100% of
outlets in the patch panels.
DD. All equipment room patching (patch cords connection to the

switches) shall be in coordination with Operator as they required
during the project.
EE. The equipment patch cords connections at equipment rooms
FF. Contractor shall coordinate with Operator/Client during the testing

& commissioning of the systems.
GG. The entire installation shall be fully certified by the manufacturer. A

guaranteed Channel Performance with Product and Application
Certification shall be provided for the entire cabling system
installation (copper and fiber) for a minimum of twenty-five (25)
years.
HH. Cabling containment within the IT Server Room (all zones), Main
Telecom Room and IDF rooms shall be provided as part of the IT

contract. Containment outside these rooms shall be provided as

part of the Electrical contract.
II. Cable tray Infrastructure shall be provided for the ICT cabling,
Service provider, GSM and Audio Visual. Each of the system
specialized contactor shall coordinate with the Electrical
Contractor for the containment based on their equipment
locations and requirements.
JJ. Main Earthing & Bonding system clean earth shall be provided to
each equipment rooms (Server Rooms, IDFs, etc.) by the electrical
contractor. Connection from clean earth bar to the Structured
Cabling System shall be provided by the IT Contractor.
KK. Training shall be provided from the manufacturer or an authorized

training centre as described further herein.
LL. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the requirement

for and verifying space, power and cooling requirements
associated with this Section and coordinate with the relevant
trades.
MM. The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with the main

Contractor for the sealing of the equipment room floors (IT Server
room, IT room and MTR) with anti-static, dust retarding coating prior
to equipment racks being installed.
NN. The required passive cabling and Active equipment for the GSM
Mobile and Fixed Internet services shall be supplied and installed by
the respective Service provider contractor based on their design.
However, necessary coordination shall be provided by the IT
contactor.
1.5 SCOPE DEMARCATION SUMMARY

A. The following equipment shall be supplied by FRHI and FRHI is
responsible for the Design, configuration, monitoring, support and
warranty of the systems.
B. The physical installation of the supplied equipment shall be carried

out by the contactor.
C. Contactor to liaise with Operator/Client during the testing and

commission of the systems.
1. FRHI Supplied Equipment
a. Server racks 42U 800 x 1200 mm [Admin + Guest] 2 nos
b. Rack PDU’s for the Admin and Guest Server racks.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to contract documents for procedures.
B. Construction Schedule
1. The Contractor shall provide a time scaled Construction

Schedule indicating general project deadlines with specific
dates relating to the installation of the system. At a minimum,
this Construction Schedule shall include the following
milestones per floor:
a. Cabling Components Procurement Date
b. Cabinets Enclosures Procurement and Installation Date
c. Cabling Installation Start Date
d. Cabling Installation Completion Date
e. Testing Start Date
f. Testing Completion Date
g. Potential Slippage Periods
h. Contingent Tasks
i. Concurrent Tasks
j. Completion of Documentation
C. Detailed Network Map
1. The Contractor shall provide a detailed network map to be

utilized as a road map during the implementation of the
Physically Separate Network System. This map shall show all
segments, all interconnects between segments and active
network components.
D. Cable Plant Connectivity
1. The Contractor shall provide a Cable Plant interconnectivity

chart showing all fiber patch panels and individual identifiers
for each fiber associated with the interconnectivity of each
network device.
E. Product Data – [Refer the contract documents for no. of sets,

minimum three(3) sets shall be provided]
1. Complete manufacturer's product literature for all cabling

components and other products to be used in the installation;

samples and the manufacturer's supporting documentation

demonstrating compatibility with other related products
should be included.
2. Provide the proposed Identification, colors and Administration

scheme, to include sample identifiers for all cables, enclosures,
work area outlets, jacks, equipment racks, and pathways.
3. Examples and copies of proposed test procedures, test result

forms, identification scheme and administration records for
Engineer’s action.
4. Fabrication drawings for any custom enclosures or chases
5. By submitting complete product data and samples, The

Contractor represents that they have carefully reviewed and
verified materials, quantities, field measurements, and
construction criteria related herein. It also represents that The
Contractor has checked, coordinated and verified that
information contained within Issued Design Drawings, product
data sheets and samples conform to the requirements of the
work and of these Specifications. The Contractor shall notify in
writing of any irregularity or discrepancies to The Engineer and
provide The Engineer with possible solutions that will rectify any
situations.
6. Submit catalogue data sheets, neatly bound with title page,

space for submittal stamps, and tabbed dividers between
sections. List all proposed equipment with reference to
corresponding Specification paragraph numbers or
equipment title. Indicate all accepted substitutions.
7. Submit a schedule of finishes indicating proposed materials

and color selections for all exposed items subject to The
Engineer selection.
F. Shop Drawings - [Refer the contract documents for no. of sets,

1. Shop drawings must adhere to industry standard drafting

practices.
2. Submit point-to-point wiring diagrams (Including patching &

cross-connect) and typed wire lists identifying every
connection for information. Include locations for all devices.
Identify cables by types, colors, and wire numbers.
3. Submit room enlargements for all equipment rooms showing

equipment rack arrangements and cable trays. Provide

elevations for all devices and panels including front and rear
within equipment rooms.
4. Submit system plans showing all device locations and ceiling

distributed loudspeaker layouts with wattage tap settings, if
appropriate.
5. Submit conduit riser diagrams showing connection of all

devices, required conduit sizes along with types and quantities
of cables to be used and cable identification tags.
6. Submit Earthing and Bonding connection within each

equipment rack / room.
7. Submit rack layouts indicating the proposed arrangement of

mounted equipment including junction boxes and locations of
conduit penetrations.
8. Submit fully dimensioned construction details of all panels,

plates and other custom fabricated items such as Low Voltage
Junction box or modifications. Include complete parts lists and,
as required, schematic diagrams. Include details of back
boxes for roughing in, especially if depth is non-standard.
9. Submit mounting and support details for ceiling mounted

devices.
G. Samples - Submit one (1) Sets of each sample
1. Submit for Consultant’s action. Label samples to indicate

product, characteristics, and locations in the Work. Samples
will be reviewed for color and appearance and workmanship.
Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor. Furnish samples of the
following:
a. All public area plates and panels. – Quantity 1
b. All public area components – Quantity 1
c. Terminated cable samples for each cable types including

vertical, horizontal and patch cords. – Quantity 1
H. Submit Electronic copies of Shop Drawings & Product Data. [Refer

the contract documents for no. of sets, minimum three(3) sets shall
be provided]
1. Transportation media shall be in DVD/Hard Drive format.

2. A Master File List in text format shall be placed on each

electronic set with a short description of files in the submittal.
3. The shop drawings shall be in AutoCAD R2012 or later drawing

(.DWG) format. Drawing Exchange File Format (.DXF) is not
acceptable. All XREFs, fonts, and other drawing parts
necessary shall be bound and included.
4. Word processing files shall be in latest MS Word format. Graphs

and charts shall be in MS Excel format. Any graphic images
necessary for the reproduction of the submittals shall be
included in the files, and shall be included in JPEG (.JPG) file
format.
5. Manufacturers’ data sheets, equipment manuals, and other

documentation provided by the Manufacturers to the
Contractor or documents that are similarly not otherwise
available to the Contractor in electronic format shall be
excluded from this requirement.
1.7 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS

A. Upon completion of the installation, Contractor shall prepare as
built documentation of the entire installation. This documentation
should include: [Refer the contract documents for no. of sets,
1. Hard Copies
2. Electronic Copies
3. Operation Manual
a. Neatly bind each with tabbed dividers between sections

and include a title page with space for submittal stamps.
b. Table of Contents
c. Typed description of each system including key features

and operational concepts.
d. Setup diagrams and typed instructions for use in typical

situations as directed by the Consultant.
e. Small scale plans showing locations and circuit numbers

for all system outlets and receptacles.
f. Single-line block-diagrams showing all major system

components.

g. Two sets of reduced size drawings showing the

components and wiring in each individual rack. One
drawing of each rack shall be mounted in a plastic jacket
to the rear door of the associated rack. The other
complete drawing set shall be included in the manual.
h. Manufacturer's operation manuals for equipment

intended for operation by system users.
i. The compiler shall be property of the employer with all

related documentation.
j. Key schedule cross referencing all keys to their respective

functions.
k. Record spreadsheet of all cabling schedules in pdf and

latest version of Excel (editable format).
4. Maintenance Data Manual - [Refer the contract documents

for no. of sets, minimum three(3) sets shall be provided]

c. Company name, address, telephone number and

contact name for system service or maintenance.
d. Catalog data sheets displaying manufacturer's names,

addresses, and telephone numbers.
e. Product manufacturers' warranties and a typed system

warranty explicitly covering all materials and labor.
f. Test documentation showing results of source quality

control tests, field quality control tests, acceptance
testing, and equalization. Document final settings for all
non-user devices and controls after completion of
acceptance testing and equalization including raw and
equalized house curves. Document the physical position
of settings as well as input and output signal levels
measured in dBmv.
g. Provide a recommended preventative maintenance

schedule with reference to the applicable pages in the
manufacturer’s maintenance manuals. Where
inadequate information is provided by the manufacturer,
provide the information necessary for proper
maintenance.

5. Drawings - [Refer the contract documents for no. of sets,

a. Submit as-installed point-to-point wiring diagrams and

typed wire lists identifying every connection for
information. Indicate locations of all components. Identify
cables by types, colors, and wire numbers.
b. Submit system plans showing all as-installed device

locations and ceiling layouts.
c. Submit conduit riser diagrams showing as-installed

connection of all devices, required conduit sizes along
with types and quantities of cables and cable
identification tags.
d. Submit rack layouts indicating the as-installed

arrangement of mounted equipment including junction
boxes and locations of conduit penetrations.
e. Submit as-installed fully dimensioned construction details

of all panels, plates and other custom fabricated items.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Contractor is solely responsible for quality control of the Work.
B. Project drawings will be available to all parties involved in the work

as the basis for construction and installation. Drawings provided will
be to industry standard scale1:250 for full layout, 1:100 for Part Plans
and 1:50 & 1:20 for Enlargements; however all distances,
clearances, lengths, routes, and equipment placements must be
field verified prior to execution or placement.
C. Contractor Qualifications:
1. In addition to the requirements of the Contract Documents

furnish the following:
a. The contractor must be certified by the manufacturer of

the products to be installed adhere to the engineering,
installation and testing procedures, and utilize the
authorized manufacturer components and distribution
channels in provisioning this Project.
b. All members of the installation team must be certified by

the manufacturer(s) as having completed the necessary
training to complete their part of the installation.

c. Contractor must be a registered & certified partner of the

vendor for the project.
d. The Contractor shall be a firm normally employed in the

Telecommunications industry, with at least seven (7)
years’ experience in the installation, termination, and
certification of Structured Cabling Systems, with a
reference list of ten (10) completed projects of similar size
and scope including contact names and telephone
numbers to confirm successful completion of projects.
e. The Contractor shall be a manufacturer trained, and

certified installer of the selected System prior to tender.
Evidence of such certification shall be included in Tender
Documents.
f. The Contractor shall demonstrate QA/QC procedures

and any industry accepted certifications (ISO, Bureau
Veritas, BSI or equivalent), providing methodologies for
ensuring continuous and consistent quality.
D. Intent of Drawings:
1. Project drawings will be available to all parties involved in the

work as the basis for construction and installation. Drawings
provided will be to industry standard scales; however all
distances, clearances, lengths, routes, and equipment
placements must be field verified prior to execution or
placement.
2. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and conceptual

and do not show all components, materials, and other specific
elements, which may be required for proper installation. It is
the responsibility of the Contractor for coordinating the final
equipment layout and pathway routing with the completed
drawings. If any departure from the Contract Drawings or the
specifications is deemed necessary on these bases or in the
event of conflicts among these bases, details of such
departures or conflicts and the bases shall be submitted in
writing.
E. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up as directed by the Consultant. Utilize

the same materials and installation methods in the mock-up as
intended for the final Work. Schedule the installation so that the
mock-up may be examined, and any necessary adjustments
made, prior to commencing fabrication of the Work. Replace
unsatisfactory items as directed. When accepted, mock-up shall

serve as the standard for materials, workmanship, and appearance

for such Work throughout the project.
F. Maintain a full set of Shop Drawings at the Project site, indicating

actual locations, routing and, in general, the true state of the
installation.
G. Alternates and Substitutions:
1. Refer to Contract Documents for Alternates and Substitutions.
2. Specific part numbers may be identified within these

specifications to relay the level of quality and capabilities
desired and establish a baseline for operation, function and
performance. Only material or equipment that meet or
exceed the level of quality, features and capabilities specified
will be considered for installation. The Employer’s Consultant
reserves the right to govern over and proclaim whether
proposed substitutions are equal to the specifications.
3. The Employer Consultant may approve or disapprove the

request for substitution or alteration. The Contractor shall not
procure any substitute material until the Employer’s
Consultant’s representative has approved the request for
substitution. Any procurement or work performed prior to
approval is at the risk of the Contractor.
4. Additional costs after approval resulting from the use of an

approved substitution shall be borne by the Contractor
without additional expense to the Employer. Such additional
costs shall include necessary modifications and alterations to
structural equipment, raceways and furnishings of all
additional materials required to affect the substitution.
5. Contractor shall submit separate pricing for recommended

spares package, which lists each recommended component
and a description of its function.
H. Subletting:
1. Refer to Contract Documents for procedures.
I. The Contractor shall coordinate with other system vendors, as

identified elsewhere in this document, where appropriate, to
facilitate equipment installation, scheduling, protection of
equipment, and access to the project site in order to provide the
Employer a complete project in a timely manner.
J. Cutting and Patching

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting, and

patching, required to complete the Work including, but not
limited to:
a. Work required making several parts fit together properly.
b. Removal and replacement of defective Work.
c. Removal and replacement of Work not conforming to the

requirements of the Contract Documents.
d. Removal of samples of installed Work as specified for

testing.
e. Routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces to permit

installation of new construction elements.
f. Cutting and patching associated with new construction,

the installation of ill-timed work and corrective work.
2. Provide adequate supervision for all cutting operations and

maintain structural integrity at all penetrations. Carefully
perform all cutting to the existing surfaces encountered during
the course of the Work of this project to the extent necessary
and required to permit the installation of new Work and to
remove existing Work in place.
3. Close all abandoned penetrations, new and old, whether

visible or concealed, in and adjacent to work being
performed as a part of the Work of this Contract when such
penetrations are revealed by demolition procedures specified
herein.
4. Use matching materials and finishes. Obtain Consultant’s prior

approval before installing materials or finishes, which
substantially deviate from existing material, color or texture.
Comply with the other specified requirements.
5. Prior to cutting and patching in rated construction, consult

with relevant engineer.
6. Upon completion of cutting and patching in rated

construction, repair wall, ceiling, or floor assembly as necessary
to maintain the required fire rating.
7. Any penetration through fire rated walls (including those in

sleeves) will be resealed with an Underwriter Laboratories (UL)
approved sealant. Confirm with local Authorities Having
Jurisdiction for requirements.

1.9 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS

A. Verify all project site conditions applicable to the Work of this
Section. Notify the Consultant in writing of any discrepancies,
conflicts, or omissions prior to bid opening. Otherwise, correct these
at no additional cost to the Employer.
B. Continue to monitor the project site. If conditions develop requiring

a need to vary from the contract documents, notify the Consultant
immediately in writing. Otherwise, make recommendations, submit
proposed drawings showing how the Work may be installed, and
on approval, proceed with the necessary changes without
additional cost to the Employer.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store materials in manufacturer’s original packaging
labeled to show name, brand, type, and grade. Store materials in
protected dry location off ground in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. Do not open packaging nor remove
labels until time for installation.
B. Components damaged prior to system acceptance shall be

replaced at no cost to the Employer.
C. Main contractor shall provide a secured storage provision on site to
store the delivered materials by the IT contractor in coordination
with the Operator.
D. The Main contractor shall be responsible for receiving, storing and
placing the delivered items as per the manufacturers’ guidelines.
E. The Main contractor shall provide all necessary material stock
management including storage access, material in-out logs
register.
F. The associated system specialist contractor shall verify the provided
storage is in accordance with manufacturer guidelines before
delivering the materials to the site. The system specialist will ensure
the storage has adequate light, ventilation and is free from water
and dust.
G. The Main contractor shall also provide access and attendance
when required by specialist and installers.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall provide the following warranties from the date
of acceptance from the Client/Operator for the system and
components.

1. Contractor Materials and Labor Warranty: The Contractor shall

provide a minimum one-year warranty for all materials and
labor provided. This warranty shall include defects in hardware
and overall workmanship.
2. The cabling system shall be guaranteed products,

performance and applications for a period of twenty-five (25)
years. During this period, the warranty will cover installed
components such as cables and connectors as well as the
complete cabling system including labor.
3. Manufacturer Component Warranty: All components of the

structured cabling system shall be free from manufacturing
defects in material or workmanship, under normal and proper
usage for a minimum of twenty-five (25) years.
4. Manufacturer System Performance Warranty: The structured

cabling system shall comply for end-to-end performance, as
defined in TIA/EIA Telecommunications Standard minimum of
twenty-five (25) years.
5. Manufacturer Application Assurance Warranty: The structured

cabling system will be free from defects that prevent the
operation of standards based applications/protocols over
Category 6 and fiber. The applications/protocols shall be
those recognized by standards bodies IEEE, ANSI, ATM Forum
and sanctioned specifically for transmission over Category 6 as
defined in TIA/EIA, ISO IEC standards and shall support current
and future applications designed for data transmission over
the Permanent link/ channel, as defined in TIA/EIA
Telecommunications Standard for a period of twenty five (25)
years.
1.12 MAINTENANCE
A. Base: The Contractor shall provide maintenance and support for
the first year. The maintenance services to be provided by the
Contractor shall include preventive, routine, and emergency
maintenance services as defined herein:
1. Twenty-four (24) hour a day, seven (7) day a week telephone

support plus two (2) hour on-site emergency support
B. Optional: The Contractor shall provide option pricing for

maintenance and support for two (2) years following the warranty
period. The option pricing shall be given as a guaranteed
maximum annual cost. This service is to include parts, labor,
upgrades, and all other contractor costs required to keep the

equipment operational. Pricing shall be provided for the following

two levels of support:

support plus eight (8) hour on-site emergency support

C. Preventive and Routine Maintenance: Preventative and routine

maintenance services shall be provided in accordance with the
provisions of the maintenance manual the Contractor issues for
each component. Preventative maintenance services shall include
inspection, test and necessary adjustment. Routine maintenance
services shall include scheduled overhauls as recommended by the
manufacturer. The Contractor shall include an Employer technician
in maintenance activities during the warranty period to provide on
the job training for Employer personnel.
D. Special Equipment: The Contractor shall supply a list of special

tools, test equipment, and outside inventory required for this
project. The Contractor may recommend specific items to
facilitate long-term support of the system.
E. Support Personnel: Technicians performing installation and

maintenance on the proposed system shall be manufacturer
certified.
F. Hardware Support: The Contractor shall supply hardware support

directly or by a subcontractor. Support shall cover all equipment
and systems referenced in this specification.
G. Maintenance Log: The Contractor shall maintain a bound

Maintenance Log Book of all preventative maintenance and
corrective/repair services performed during the warranty period
and any extended support period. The Log shall be in an Employer
approved format. The Log shall be available for inspection by the
Employer at any time during the year that it covers. The
Maintenance Log Book shall be turned over at the completion of
maintenance contract. The Log shall be kept on a component-by-
component (equipment number) basis, with separate sections or
volumes, as appropriate, for each component. The Log shall
itemize the history of preventative maintenance and
corrective/repair activities, stating the character, duration, cause,
cure of all malfunctions and the individual’s name that completed
the repair. The Log shall record all hardware updates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials and products, excepting Owner Furnished Equipment
(OFE), and materials, shall be appropriate for the intended use and
shall meet all applicable UL, EN, BS, ISO and IEC Regulations
B. All system components shall be manufactured by ISO 9001:2000

certified companies and all packaging shall carry clear product
identification (catalogue number, quality control number, etc.)
C. All products shall be new, of the latest version at time of Installation,

and brought to the job site in original manufacturer's packaging.
Electrical components shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories
label. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Only
systems and equipment that meet or exceed the level of quality
and capabilities stated within this document will be considered for
acceptance.
D. Materials shall be listed and approved for the particular application

and permitted by the authority having jurisdiction for the
application.
E. All system components of the entire cabling system (copper and

fiber) will be of the same manufacturer in order to ensure efficient
operation, component compatibility and a single warranty
covering the entire installation. This includes but is not limited to:
1. Horizontal Copper Distribution Solution
2. Horizontal and Backbone Fiber Distribution Solution
3. Enclosures and Racks
4. Consolidation Points
F. All components will provide identification markings that meet the

requirements of standard ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-A.
G. Materials shall be listed and approved for the particular application

application.
H. All components are to be accepted by the Engineer and afford

the most aesthetic value possible while maintaining specified
functionality. Hardware will adhere to the following guidelines:

1. Fit and finish to the existing surrounding structure.
2. Unobtrusiveness
3. Functionality
I. All workstation termination hardware shall match the existing wall

surface color as closely as possible, to include mounting boxes,
faceplates, and outlets.
J. Used equipment or damaged material will be rejected.
K. Contractor shall receive a confirmation from the Client/Operator

prior to materials procurement on site.
L. The UTP/Fiber patch cords length and colors shall be coordinated

with Client /Operator.
2.2 HORIZONTAL COPPER DISTRIBUTION SOLUTION

A. Cat6 U/UTP cable:
1. Exceeds requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 and ISO 11801 2nd

Edition Class E Category 6 channel standards
2. Exceeds requirements of IEC 61156-5 Category 6 component

standards
3. Meets requirements of IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at for PoE

applications
4. Cable diameter: 5.7mm (0.225 in.) nominal
5. High performance, Category 6, low smoke zero halogen

(LSZH), 4-pair, UTP copper cable. Copper conductors are 24
AWG constructions with HDPE insulation. Conductors are
twisted in pairs, separated by an integrated pair divider, and
all four pairs are protected by a LSZH jacket
6. Flame rating: IEC 60332-1
7. Cable weight: 12 kg/305m (28 lbs. /1000 ft.)
8. Installation temperature range: 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F)
9. Operating temperature range: -20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
10. Installation tension: 110 N (25 lbf) maximum
11. Channel characterized to 550 MHz, 300 MHz above the

standard

12. Descending length cable markings enable easy identification

of remaining cable which reduces installation time and cable
scrap
13. Third party tested
B. Module / RJ 45 Jack:
1. Exceed requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Category 6, IEEE

802.3an-2006, and ISO 11801 Class E channel standards
2. Exceed requirements of IEC 61156-5 Category 6 component

standards
3. Meet requirements of IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at for PoE

applications
4. Each jack is 100% tested to ensure NEXT and RL performance

and is individually serialized for traceability
5. Category 6, RJ45, 8-position, 8-wire universal module.
6. RoHS Compliant
7. Contacts plated with 50 microinches of gold for superior

performance
8. Tool less Module
9. Can be re-terminated a minimum of twenty times
10. Off white termination cap provides positive strain relief; helps
control cable bend radius and securely retains wires
11. Terminate 4-pair, 22 - 26 AWG, 100 ohm, solid or stranded

twisted pair cable
12. Universal termination cap is color-coded for T568A and T568B

wiring schemes
13. Accept 6 and 8-position modular plugs without damage
14. Can be clearly identified with optional labels and icons
C. Face Plate:
1. Individual modules snap in and out of provided insert
2. Single or double gang configurations
3. For copper and fiber applications

4. Shutters protect modules when not in use
5. 86 x 86mm single gang faceplate frame and one 1/2 size

sloped shuttered module insert. Depth to rear of modules:
18.0mm
6. RoHS Compliant
D. Copper Patch Panel:
1. Shall consist of 24 port on 1RU, 48 port of 2RU.
2. 24-port or 48 port in 1U with labels
3. Allow labeling scheme and port identification to be visible at

all times
4. Allow front access to installed modules for easy moves, adds

and changes
5. Accept 8-position, 8-wire universal module for UTP, fiber optic,

and audio/video, which snap in and out for easy moves, adds,
and changes
6. Mount to standard EIA 19" racks or 23" racks with optional

extender brackets
7. Flat panels for the server racks.
8. RoHS Compliant
9. If angled patch panels are used in the network racks, the

panels shall be well recessed so that patch cords shall not
touch on the rack front door.
E. Mini High-density patch panel:
1. Mounting: Snaps into custom 1" grid pattern of the enclosure
2. Compliance: RoHS, TIA/EIA 570-C Residential Wiring Standard,

cULus, and UL
3. Front-side removable faceplates: Allows front access to

installed modules for easy moves, adds, and changes
4. Modularity: Accepts all Modules (Copper & Fiber) and

provides the ability to add ports, mix and match media, and
replace modules as needed
5. Snap-in installation: Snaps directly onto custom grid pattern to

simplify installations and allow easy moves, adds, and changes

6. 8 Ports Capacity or more.
F. Patch Cord :
1. Exceed ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Category 6 and ISO 11801 Class E

Edition 2.1 standards for all frequencies from 1 to 250 MHz
2. Meet requirements of IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at for PoE

applications
3. Each patch cord is 100% performance tested and wired T568B
4. Constructed of Category 6, 24 AWG UTP stranded cable and

Modular Plugs; plug contacts plated with 50 microinches of
gold for superior performance
5. Plug meets all applicable ANSI/TIA/EIA-968-A requirements

and exceeds IEC 60603-7 specifications
6. Slender strain relief boot provides easy access in high density

applications
7. Plug uses an integral pair manager to optimize performance

and consistency by reducing untwisting of conductors within
the plug
8. Perform in center of TIA/EIA component range, ensuring

interoperability and excellent performance
9. Labels on patch cords provide identification of performance

level, length, and quality control number
10. Patented tangle-free latch prevents snags and provides easy

release, saving time on frequent moves, adds, and changes
11. Third party tested for Category 6 component compliance
12. RoHS Compliant
13. Cable diameter: 0.235 in. (6.0mm) nominal
14. UL 1863 approved
15. Rated to 2500 mating cycles
16. Station cord shall be 3 mtr length
17. Connecting cords shall be 0.5 mtr within the LVJB.
18. Equipment cord length in the IT Server room and IDF room shall
be defined by FRHI, the contractor shall coordinate with the
Client/Operator prior to order the patch cords.

2.3 FIBER DISTRIBUTION SOLUTION

A. Indoor Single Mode cable:
1. OS1 fibers meet or exceed numerous standards for optical

fiber, including ITU-TG.652 (Categories A, B, C and D), EN
50173, IEC 60793-1, ISO/IEC 24072 and TIA-492CAAA.
2. Used in intra-building backbone, building backbone, and

horizontal installations for low smoke zero halogen (LSZH) and
general-purpose environments
3. Low smoke zero halogen (LSZH) rated jacket meets IEC 60332-
1, IEC 60332-3C, IEC 61034 and IEC 60754-2 for standards
compliant safety
4. Tight buffer structure
5. (2, 12, 24,48) Core SM Fiber Optic
6. Sheath markings provide positive identification and length

verification
7. Buffered fibers and subunits are color-coded for easy

identification
8. RoHS Compliant
9. Cable design and flexible buffer tubes allow for quick

breakout and ease of routing
10. Core Diameter: 8.2μm typical
11. Cladding Diameter: 125μm ± 0.7μm
12. Cladding Non-Circularity: ≤ 1%
13. Core-Cladding Concentricity: ≤ 0.5μm
14. Coating Diameter: 242μm ± 7μm
15. Coating-Cladding Concentricity: ≤ 12μm
16. Attenuation: 1310nm: ≤ 0.39dB/km , 1310 – 1625nm: ≤

0.34dB/km and 1550nm: ≤ 0.25dB/km
17. Numerical Aperture: 0.14 typical
18. Operating Temperature Range: -60° C to +85° C
19. Temperature Dependence (-60° C to +85° C): ≤ 0.05dB/km

20. Temperature-Humidity Cycling (-10° C to +85° C, up to 98%

RH): ≤ 0.05dB/km
21. Water Immersion (23° C ± 2° C): ≤ 0.05dB/km
22. Heat Aging (85° C ± 2° C): ≤ 0.05dB/km
B. Indoor Multimode OM4 Cable:
1. Designed to enable robust and reliable channels for 1 Mb/s

through 100 Gb/s applications that include:
2. LAN Riser cabling and Fiber to the Desk (FTTD) applications
3. Data Center Ethernet backbones and Storage Area Networks
4. High-Speed Computing switch fabrics
5. When using low cost 850 nm Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting

Laser (VCSEL) transceivers, these fibers support a wide variety
of current application including 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 8 Gigabit
Fiber Channel, and 40 Gigabit Infini-Band.
6. Nearly zero differential mode delay (DMD) and 5000 MHz km

of EMB,
7. Support up to 1040 meters for short wave Gigabit Ethernet

(1000BASE-SX) applications.
8. Used in interconnect and horizontal installations for low smoke

zero halogen (LSZH) and general-purpose environments
9. Low smoke zero halogen (LSZH) rated jacket meets IEC 60332-
1, IEC 60332-3C, IEC 61034 and IEC 60754-2 for standards
compliant safety
10. OM4 850nm
11. Tight buffer structure
12. (6,12, 48) Core MM Fiber Optic
13. Sheath markings provide positive identification, quality

traceability, and length verification
14. RoHS Compliant
15. Colored buffers for ease of identification
16. High quality buffering offers ease of stripping while maintaining

optical performance

17. Geometry:
a. Core Diameter: 50.0μm ± 2.5μm
b. Core Non-Circularity: ≤5%
c. Cladding Diameter: 125μm ± 1μm
d. Cladding Non-Circularity: ≤1%
e. Core-Cladding Concentricity: ≤1.0μm
f. Coating Diameter: 245μm ±10μm
g. Coating-Cladding Concentricity: ≤8μm
18. Attenuation:
a. 850nm: 2.3dB/km
b. 1300nm: 0.6dB/km
c. 1300nm thru 1380nm: ≤1.0dB/km
19. Optical Characteristics
a. Point Discontinuity: ≤0.08dB
b. Numerical Aperture: 0.200 ± 0.015
c. Group Index of Refraction – 850nm: 1.483
d. Group Index of Refraction – 1300nm: 1.479
e. Macrobend Attenuation – 100 turns around a 75mm

mandrel: ≤0.5dB/km
20. Mechanical Properties
a. Proof Test: 100 kpsi (0.7 GN/m2)
b. Coating Strip Force: 0.7lbs (3.0 N)
21. Environmental Properties
a. Operating Temperature: -60°C to + 85°C
b. Temperature Dependence – 850nm (-60°C to + 85°C):

≤0.10dB/km
c. Temperature Dependence – 1300nm (-60°C to + 85°C):

≤0.10dB/km

d. Temperature – Humidity Cycling – 850nm (-10°C to + 85°C,

>90% RH): ≤0.10dB/km
e. Temperature – Humidity Cycling – 1300nm (-10°C to + 85°C,

>90% RH): ≤0.10dB/km
22. Transmission Properties
a. 850nm OFL Launch: 3500 MHz-km
b. 850nm EMB Launch: 5000 MHz-km
c. 1300nm OFL launch: 500 MHz-km
C. Pigtails Connector:
1. Single Mode:
a. Pass all TIA/EIA-568-C.3 performance requirements
b. 100% factory inspected end face geometry in

compliance with Telcordia GR-326-CORE, Issue 3
c. Shall be LC type connector
d. Typical insertion loss per connection: 0.25dB
e. UPC polished (55dB minimum return loss)
f. Factory terminated and 100% tested for insertion loss and

return loss
g. Insertion loss and return loss data recorded for every

singlemode patch cord
h. Lifetime traceability of test data to a quality control

number on each patch cord
i. Highest quality flame retardant fiber optic cable with

tight-buffered coating on each optical fiber
2. Multimode OM4 Pigtails:
a. tested to support network transmission speeds up to 10

Gb/s for link lengths up to 550 meters with an 850nm
source per IEEE 802.3
b. Pass all TIA/EIA-568-C.3 performance requirements
c. Meets or exceeds ISO/IEC 11801, TIA/EIA-568-C.3, TIA-604-

3 (FOCIS-3), TIA-604-10 (FOCIS-10)

d. Shall be LC type connector
e. Insertion loss per connection: 0.25dB max
f. Backward compatible for use with all 50/125μm system

requirements
g. Factory terminated and 100% tested for insertion loss
h. Insertion loss data recorded for every multimode patch

cord
i. Lifetime traceability of test data to a Q.C. number on

each patch cord
j. Highest quality flame retardant fiber optic cable with

3. Fiber Enclosure Rack Mounted:
a. Integral mounting flange for installation in 19" wide EIA-

310 racks
b. Holds Fiber adaptors panels
c. Suitable for all pre-terminated, field terminated, or field-

splice applications
d. Suitable for minimum four cassettes or FAPs per rack unit

for maximum patch field density
e. Slide-out, tilt-down drawer provides full front access to all

fibers and cables
f. Integral bend radius control and cable management for

fiber optic patch cords
g. Multiple trunk cable entry locations
h. Include fiber optic cable routing kit (grommets, cable

ties, spools, strain relief bracket, and ID/caution labels) for
various cable management solutions
4. Fiber Adaptors panels and Splice kit.
a. Fiber adapter panels contain TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS

compliant or compatible simplex or duplex LC fiber optic
adapters
b. meet TIA/EIA-568-C.3 requirements

c. Follow the TIA/EIA-568-C.3 suggested color identification

scheme
d. Split sleeve material : Zirconia ceramic
e. Supports UPC connector
f. Splice kit shall be provided as part of adopter panel to

splice and secure the fiber cores.
5. Fiber Patch Cords
a. Equipment cord length in the IT Server room and IDF room

shall be defined by FRHI, the contractor shall coordinate
with the Client/Operator prior to order the patch cords.
b. Single Mode Patch Cords:
1) Pass all TIA/EIA-568-C.3 performance requirements
2) 100% factory inspected end face geometry in

compliance with Telcordia GR-326-CORE, Issue 3
3) Shall be LC type connector
4) Typical insertion loss per connection: 0.25dB
5) UPC polished (55dB minimum return loss)
6) Factory terminated and 100% tested for insertion loss

and return loss
7) Insertion loss and return loss data recorded for every

single mode patch cord
8) Lifetime traceability of test data to a quality control

number on each patch cord
9) Highest quality flame retardant fiber optic cable with

c. Multimode OM4 Fiber Patch cords:
1) Tested to support network transmission speeds up to

10 Gb/s for link lengths up to 300 meters with an
850nm source per IEEE 802.3ae 10 GbE standard.
2) Pass all TIA/EIA-568-C.3 performance requirements
3) Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) per: IEC 60332-1-2,

IEC 60332-3-24, IEC 60754-1, IEC 60754-2, IEC 61034-2

4) Shall be LC type connector
5) Insertion loss per connection: 0.25dB maximum
6) Connector return loss: 26dB min.
7) Backward compatible for use with all 50/125μm

system requirements
8) Factory terminated and 100% tested for insertion loss
9) Insertion loss data recorded for every multimode

patch cord
10) Lifetime traceability of test data to a Q.C. number

on each patch cord
11) Highest quality flame retardant fiber optic cable with

12) Duplex (2-fiber) jacketed zipcord Tight buffered
13) Cable outside diameter (OD): 1.6mm duplex
14) Bend radius: 32mm
15) Bend radius,(long term): 1.6mm: 16mm
16) Connector cable retention: 50N @ 0°C - 19.4N @

90°C
17) Connector durability: 500 cycles
6. Fiber Distribution Enclosure Surface Mounted:
a. The surface mount fibre distribution enclosure shall be a

plastic enclosure that can be attached to a wall or flat
surface with the use of screws. It shall meet the following
criteria:
1) Capable to accepting four Fiber adapters with

capacity up to 48 core splicing. [SC or LC]
2) Include all accessories to allow correct attachment

of cables.
3) Include fiber storage rings to respect the bend radius

of the fiber cores.
4) Offers dust/ debris protection and helps secure

cable to enclosure.

5) Allows splicing with patching enclosures.
6) Include label fields under clear plastic cover

compliant with TIA/EIA 606-A.
7. Passive Optical Network (PON) Splitter Tray:
a. Passive Optical LAN Splitter Trays shall be rack mountable

enclosures that contain optical splitters used in Passive
Optical Networks.
b. These shall be rugged enclosures and offered in a variety

of configurations making them ideal to be mounted in
centralized splitting locations close to the Optical Line
Terminal (OLT) or remote splitting locations nearer the
Optical Network Unit (ONU).
c. Configurations include both single and dual input ports

(for redundancy) that come pre-terminated with SC-APC
connectors or are splice-ready, and have between8 to
32 output ports.
d. The enclosures are based on high quality Planar Light

wave Circuit (PLC) splitters and enable the highest
performance and reliability, including minimal insertion
loss, wide operating wavelength range and excellent
channel-to-channel uniformity.
2.4 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND ENCLOSURE

A. Server Cabinets for the Admin and Guest Server Applications in the
IT Server room shall be supplied by FRHI.
B. Rack mounted power distribution unit of Network and Server racks

for the Admin and Guest system shall be supplied by FRHI.
C. The contractor shall carry out the installations of supplied racks by

FRHI.
D. Network Cabinets:
1. 42 RU 800 x 800 mm in IDF room
2. 45 RU 800 x 1000 mm In the IT Server room
3. Wide Cabinet Modular cable management fingers easily

mount to the front and/or back of all four cabinet posts
4. Optimized thermal performance of network switches requiring

side-to-side airflow

5. 69% cabinet perforated door
6. Adjustable rear equipment rails with infinite positioning
7. Electrically bonded cabinet with a single ground connection

to guard against EMI and ESD
8. Equipment rails have printed rack space numbering that can

be oriented numbers up or down
9. Durable coating Cabinets are powder coated in a durable

polyester paint available in black (RAL9005), or white
(RAL9003)
10. Easy maintenance powder coat finish
11. Integral vertical cable management:
a. 150mm, 254mm, 300mm and 406.4mm wide vertical

management cages, with individual 1-rack unit fingers,
including spools and bend limiting clips. The cages will be
covered by double hinged aluminum doors. Clip-on
panels are not acceptable.
b. Integral bend radius control to eliminate strain on cables.
c. In the case where racks are assembled side by side, they

shall be separated by minimum 200mm wide cable
management cages.
12. RoHS Compliant
13. Inset frame posts creating large and accessible vertical

pathways for routing cables
14. Designed with the use of CFD (Computational Fluid Dynamics)

analysis and thermal lab testing to optimize the thermal
performance of network switches requiring side-to-side airflow
15. Innovative, fully integrated, electrically bonded cabinet with a

single ground connection to guard against EMI and ESD, and
provide a safe current path to ground
16. Doors include keyed swing handles
17. If the caster is required the same shall be installed using

leveling feet adjustment mechanism without tilting the cabinet
18. Welded and assembled steel frame construction
19. Side panels include keyed quarter-turn latches

20. Dual hinge door for maximum accessibility between adjacent

cabinets
21. Cabinet supplied with high density cable management fingers
22. Cable entry holes are equipped with plastic sealing plugs
23. UL Listed Static Load of 1,364 kg (3,000 lbs)
24. UL Listed Rolling Load of 1,136 kg (2,500 lbs)
25. Cabinet ships assembled, one per pallet
26. Dynamic/Shock Pallet (1,250 & 2,000 lbs) ratings
27. Accept Side to Side Airflow passive management system
E. Server Cabinets:
1. 45 RU 600 x 1000 mm Wide Cabinet With Full Perforated Front

Door, Split Perforated Rear Door, and optional Solid Side
Panels
2. 69% cabinet perforated door
3. Modular cable management finger sections manage cables
4. Electrically bonded cabinet with a single ground connection

to guard against EMI and ESD
5. Durable black polyester epoxy powder coat finish
6. RoHS Compliant
7. Welded and assembled steel frame construction
8. Easy maintenance powder coat finish
9. Adjustable front and rear equipment rails with infinite

positioning
10. Doors include keyed swing handles
11. Side panels include keyed quarter-turn latches
12. Large cable entry/cable access
13. Cabinet supplied with standard density cable management

fingers
14. Cable entry holes are equipped with plastic sealing plugs
15. UL Listed Static Load of 1,364 kg (3,000 lbs)

16. UL Listed Rolling Load of 1,136 kg (2,500 lbs)
17. Cabinet ships assembled, one per pallet
18. Dynamic/Shock Pallet (1,250 & 2,000 lbs) ratings
F. Open Frames [Main Telecom Room]
1. Rack space identification allows quick and easy location of

rack mount items
2. 3" Rack is UL listed for 1,000 lbs. load rating
3. Double-sided #12-24 EIA universal mounting hole spacing 24

#12-24 mounting screws included
4. The 7 foot vertical cable manager shall consist of a metal

backbone with cable management fingers that align with EIA
rack spacing.
5. The fingers shall be molded out of plastic and provide integral

bend radius control throughout the entire length.
6. Individual fingers shall be able to be removed without the aid

of a tool.
7. The backbone shall have pass through holes with rolled edges
that provide bend radius control.
8. The vertical manager shall accept a metal, hinged door that

can open to the right or left.
9. The vertical manager shall accept plastic slack management

spools that can be repositioned as required.
10. The vertical panel shall be able to manage all the cable on
the rack without the aid of horizontal cable managers.
G. Wall mounted enclosure [Residential Serviced Apartment]:
1. Hold 12 RU of active and passive network equipment plus two

additional RU for powers trips and small electronic devices
(modems, routers, etc.)
2. Shall provide the 18U rack for the super Penthouse in

residential building.
3. Structurally engineered to swing freely even under maximum

load capacity

4. Thermal management design (vents, perforated doors, and

fan) optimizes air flow for improved heat dissipation; ideal for
high heat load PoE enabled switch applications
5. Working load rating of 250 lbs.
6. Adjustable rails mount at 1" increments to accommodate

various depths of network equipment including PoE switches
7. Individual rack spaces are identified for ease of equipment

mounting
8. Cable bend radius posts provide bend radius control and

slack to patch cords; mount to equipment rails of any size rack
or cabinet, #12-24 tapped; retainer fingers prevent cords from
slipping off
9. RoHS Compliant
10. Steel - Powder coated black
H. Have a top trough with built-in waterfall providing bend radius

control and efficient patch cable routing.
I. The bottom flange shall turn inwards, allowing it to fit on a floor tile.
J. Provide blank panels for all unoccupied spaces within enclosure(s)

to maintain correct air flow.
K. Provide complete with cable organizers, Grounding (Earthing) kit

and environmental monitoring unit.
L. All cabinets shall be provided with 2no. Power Distribution Units

each with adequate rating and number of outlets to support the
full number of active devices to be housed within the cabinet.
2.5 CONSOLIDATION POINTS

A. Tenant Consolidation Point:
1. A consolidation point is a termination connection point

between open cabling and horizontal cabling to allow for
reconfiguration of the open retail cabling. A consolidation
point is not a splice, it is considered to be a piece of
connecting hardware. Installation practices are as follows:
2. No more than one consolidation point may be used in a single

horizontal cable run.

3. Each horizontal distribution cable exiting the consolidation

point shall have all pairs terminated in all eight positions of the
modular outlets in the work area.
4. Cross-connections or active equipment shall not be permitted

at a consolidation point.
5. The consolidation point enclosure should have the following

characteristics:
6. Available in versions to support 19" panels, 110-style blocks and

66-style blocks.
7. Incorporate a two-piece modular design allowing the

connecting hardware to be mounted and cabled prior to
mounting the complete enclosure.
8. Allow hinging of cover on either left or right to a full 180°.
9. Facilitate cable access via four side access covers and/or four
1/2" conduit knockouts located on top and bottom.
10. Provide security using a captive locking fastener, which

requires a binding post wrench to prevent unauthorized
access.
11. Feature large rear cutout for rear cable access.
12. Be constructed of 1.612mm steel with textured powder paint

finish available in black, gray or light ivory.
a. Have an optional smoked plexiglass window to view

connections.
b. Be certified by Underwriters Laboratories to United States

Standards and Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
C22.2 standards.
B. Low Voltage Junction Box [Hotel Tower : Guest Rooms]
a. Enclosure shall be Surface mounted and shall offer cable

knockouts to allow cables to easily enter and exit
enclosure.
b. Power cable entry knockouts to bring power into the

enclosure for the devices, and shear forms to help route
and secure cables into place.
c. Assembly door shall provide a perforated section for the

ventilation with door swing feature. Inside of enclosure

shall provide panel with a grid pattern to assist in

guidance and installation of module components.
d. Depth and size of enclosure shall be adequate to allow

the cable termination, cabling management and the
space for minimum two GPON units.
e. Compliance: RoHS, TIA/EIA 570-C Residential Wiring

Standard, cULus, and UL.
f. Open mounting pattern: Allows placement of hubs across

the entire base of the enclosure using a 1" grid pattern for
unlimited mounting options, greater flexibility, and
maximum use of available space.
g. Grounding stud: Properly grounds the enclosure to the

surrounding structure to protect network equipment and
maximize uptime
h. Power knockouts: Provides up to two single gang

receptacles to bring power to the box facilitating the
ability to connect active devices in the enclosure
i. Shear forms: Routes and secures cables in place helping

to provide easier access and view of the installed hubs
2.6 CABLE MANAGEMENT

A. Horizontal
1. All cable management channels, troughs, and panels will be

of the same color, fit, finish, and manufacturer as the
Equipment Racks/Cabinets.
2. Horizontal management panels inside cabinets shall meet the

following criteria:
a. 19" format, metal structure.
b. 1 or 2 Rack units.
c. 4 cutouts.
d. 5 plastic rings of minimum depth 90mm. Rings shall be

durable, flexible, and shall protect the bend radius of
patch cords.
3. Horizontal management panels inside open racks shall meet

the following criteria:

a. 19" format, aluminum base, black.
b. 1 or 2 Rack Units.
c. Minimum 170mm depth.
d. 6-port finger spacing.
e. Double hinged aluminum cover, black.
f. The 1RU shall accept 50 patch cords; the 2RU shall

accept 135 patch cords.
g. Shall be a combination of Angled & Flat panels to suit the

patch panels and equipment as necessary (i.e. angled
patch panels shall use angled cable management.
4. Rack mounted horizontal cable management devices will be

appropriate for the intended purpose and provide
containment in conjunction with or in addition to
concealment of interconnect or equipment cordage within
an enclosure or rack.
B. Vertical
1. All cable management channels, troughs, and panels will be

of the same color, fit, finish, and manufacturer as the
Equipment Racks/Cabinets.
2. Vertical cable management cage with door in open racks

shall meet the following criteria:
a. Hinged doors allowing easy access during moves, ads &

changes.
b. Shall be either 254mm wide cage creates a 165.1mm

gap between racks or 152.4mm wide cage creates
63.5mm gap between racks for front-to-back routing of
equipment cables and patch cords.
c. Shall be supplied with min. 4 spools & 12 bend limiting

clips to respect bend radius of cables.
d. Aluminum cover, black.
e. The vertical cable management cages with doors shall

be made of rust-free aluminum.
f. Shall be black powder coat finish to minimize fingerprints

and resist scratching.

g. Be available in 150mm, 254mm, 300mm and 406.4mm

wide cable management cage sizes.
3. Vertical cable management within Enclosures shall be rigid

throughout its length, and provide for ease of access after
installation to facilitate the addition, removal or
reconfiguration of cabling contained therein. For trough
designs, it shall be a longitudinal bifurcated (i.e. two parts)
channel of metallic construction with containment
accomplished by means of attached fascia panels, evenly
spaced “G” shaped ring-runs, pivoting horizontal bars, evenly
spaced hook and latch bands or a combination thereof.
4. Vertical cable/wire management supporting wall mounted

termination/connecting blocks shall be modular and integral
to the block mountings. They shall be of metallic and/or high-
strength composite materials designed to maintain industry
recommended bend radius of associated cabling.
2.7 CABLE BASKETS

A. Wire Mesh Cable Baskets
1. Wire mesh cable tray shall be manufactured from round steel

wire that is a minimum of 5mm in diameter. Wires shall be
welded at intersections to form a 50.8mm x 101.6mm grid
pattern. The tray shall be U-shaped with equal height sidewalls.
2. Individual tray sections will be 3048mm or 1524mm long and

101.6mm, 152.4mm, 203.2mm, 304.8mm, 406.4mm, 457.2mm,
508mm or 609.6mm wide. Sidewalls will be 50.8mm, 101.6mm
or 152.4mm high in conformance with the design drawings.
3. Tray ends will be formed downward at 90° to allow easy drop-

in installation with approved supports.
4. Wire mesh cable tray will be zinc electroplated after

fabrication.
5. Wire mesh cable tray will be UL Classified for grounding

purposes.
B. Wire Mesh Cable Tray Supports
1. Supports will be sized at minimum to match the width of the

wire mesh cable tray that is supported. The support may be
wider than wire mesh cable tray.

2. Support design will allow the support to be placed under a

wire mesh cable tray at any point mid-span or directly under a
pathway splice or intersection.
3. When placed directly under a splice or intersection, the

support will allow drop-in attachment of cable tray. Splice
hardware will simultaneously splice cable trays and secure
wire mesh cable trays to the support.
4. Supports will be manufactured from steel extrusion and/or

sheet steel.
5. Wire Mesh Cable Tray Supports will be zinc electroplated after

fabrication.
C. Wire Mesh Cable Tray Splices and Fasteners:
1. Provide a method of simultaneously splicing, bonding and

securing intersecting wire mesh cable tray sections to supports
when supports are placed directly under a wire mesh cable
tray pathway at a splice point, intersection point, or at the
beginning or end of a change in elevation.
2. Provide a method of splicing and bonding wire mesh cable

tray sections together at a splice point or an intersection point
that is not located directly over a support.
3. Provide a method for bonding and securing wire mesh cable

tray to supports when supports are placed mid-span (in
between a splice or intersection point) along a wire mesh
cable tray pathway.
4. Provide a method for attaching wire mesh cable tray directly

to the top of racks and cabinets.
5. Provide a method for attaching wire mesh cable tray supports

to raised floor pedestals.
6. Provide a method for attaching a bonding conductor to the

wire mesh cable tray.
D. Wire Mesh Cable Tray Accessories:
1. Provide a divider to separate cable tray into multiple

pathways. The divider should be the same height as the
sidewalls of the cable tray.
2. Provide a cover for wire mesh cable tray. The cover should be
sized to match the width of the cable tray.

3. Provide a solid bottom for wire mesh cable tray. The bottom
should be sized to match the width of the cable tray.
4. Provide a bend radius to connect the sidewalls of adjoining

wire mesh cable tray wherever a splice or an intersection in
the cable tray pathway results in a 4" or wider gap between
the sidewalls. The bend radius should be the same height as
the sidewalls of the wire mesh cable tray.
5. Provide a radius drop to form cable over a smooth curve

wherever cable exits or enters the side, bottom or end of wire
mesh cable tray.
6. Wire mesh cable tray accessories will be manufactured from

steel extrusion and/or sheet steel.
7. Wire mesh cable tray accessories will be pre-galvanized

before fabrication.
E. Wire Mesh Cable Tray Installation Tools:
1. Provide specialized cutting and forming tools required for field

fabrication of wire mesh cable tray pathways.
2. Provide specialized tools required for pulling cable around

turns, bends or intersections in wire mesh cable tray pathway.
F. Wire Mesh Cable Tray Support – Installation Hardware:
1. Provide installation hardware to attach wire mesh cable tray

supports to building structure.
2.8 OPTICAL FIBER RUNWAY

A. The optical fiber cable channel specified herein is intended for
routing, separating, and protecting optical fiber and high-speed
data cabling within the Main Telecom Room and Data Centre.
B. The system shall be UL Listed and utilize material, which exhibits

flame resistant characteristics, tested in accordance with UL94V-0.
The channel and hinged cover shall be available in 2m lengths.
C. It shall be a two-piece design with a base and hinged cover that

incorporates integral high friction design to retain and inhibit cover
movement.
D. Shall be approximately 100mm wide by 100mm deep with an

approximate wall thickness of 3mm.

E. The base and cover shall be manufactured of rigid PVC compound

and be available in three colors: yellow, orange and black.
F. Couplers shall be used at each connection. Each connection of

fitting-to-fitting, channel-to-fitting, and channel-to-channel shall
require a coupler.
G. Couplers shall be supplied pre-assembled not requiring any bolts to

fasten. This coupler shall be removable when needed.
H. A full complement of fittings shall be available including, but not

limited to 45 degree and 90 degree flat, vertical inside and outside
elbows, tee and cross fittings, reducers, end caps and all other
components necessary to make the system workable. Snap-on or
split covers shall be available for all directional fittings.
I. The fittings shall be capable of maintaining a 50mm minimum

cable bend radius, be manufactured from ABS, and available in
the same colors as the base and cover.
J. All fitting base and covers shall be supplied as separate

components.
K. A full complement of mounting brackets shall be available

including but not limited to new and existing threaded rod bracket
kits, ladder rack bracket kits, wall bracket kits and all other
components necessary to make the system workable. The
mounting brackets shall be manufactured from commercial grade
cold rolled steel with zinc chromate, e-coating or painted black
powder coat finish. The channel is attached to the brackets by
securing the bracket slide clamps to the rail on the bottom of the
channel base. This eliminates the need for through bolting.
2.9 CABLE BUNDLING MATERIALS

A. Provide hook and loop tape, 13mm Wide and of a length equal to
130% of the circumference of the cable bundle.
B. Cable ties shall be of durable construction, UPVC a minimum of

6mm wide, and of a length equal to 130% of the circumference of
the cable bundle. Cable ties are to be provided as per the
recommendations of the cabling manufacturer.
C. When used in areas considered environmental air space, all

bundling materials shall be appropriately listed.
D. Cable bundles shall not to be over tightened such that deformation

occurs to the original geometry of the cables. Such practice will be
rejected and damaged cables shall be replaced at installers cost.

2.10 TROUGHS, TROUGH COVERS & DISTRIBUTION RINGS

A. Troughs shall be integral to all wall mounted
connecting/termination blocks and connected to the base of all
vertical distribution fields.
B. Distribution Rings shall be integral to all wall mounted

connecting/termination blocks and shall be of the same type and
manufacture of the terminal blocks.
C. Rings shall be constructed of a non-metallic, high-strength, fire-

resistant extruded material.
D. Trough Covers shall be provided for covering the patch cord field.
2.11 EARTHING AND BONDING MATERIALS

A. Equipment Bonding Conductors shall be a minimum of a stranded,
4mm (#6 AWG), conductor, with a green insulating jacket.
B. The Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing) system

per ANSI-607 and guidelines is provided by the Contractor. The IT
Contractor is responsible for Grounding (Earthing) and bonding all
IT related equipment and racks to the Grounding (Earthing) system.
C. Conductors shall be twisted to form pairs. Cable having more that

25 pairs shall be assembled in units, each individually identified by
color coded unit binders.
2.12 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PDU)

A. The Power distribution units for the Guest and Admin equipment
[Network + Server racks] shall be supplied by FRHI in IT Server room.
B. Provide a minimum of 2 PDU with minimum 12 outlets for each

cabinet.
C. Have 230V/50Hz input and output voltages, with a maximum total

current draw of 16A and 32A. The unit shall have an IEC-320 C20
input with 3m cord, twelve (12) IEC 320 C13 and six (6) IEC 320 C19
outputs.
D. The maximum load capacity shall not exceed 3,680 VA and 7360
VA.
E. Color: Black.
F. It shall be designed to operate in an ambient environment of -10° C

to 50° C, with 0-95% relative humidity.

G. The PDUs shall be EN 60950 approved.
2.13 SPARES
A. Provide the below spare items as a minimum:
1. 5% spare of each faceplate type
2. 5% spare of Cat6 RJ45 connectors
3. 5% spare of each patch cord type/length
4. 5% spare of PDU strips
B. In addition, the Contractor shall submit separate pricing for

recommended spares package, which lists each recommended
component and a description of its function.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
A. Complete all custom fabrication work at the shop.
B. Verify the depth of each rack prior to assembly to ensure that

mounted equipment will fit completely inside with the rear door
closed. Install all rack-mounted equipment and test the systems
before delivery of equipment racks to the project site.
3.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. All products shall be from an ISO 9001 registered Manufacturer and
shall be UL listed.
B. All products which comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA Category 6 and/or ISO

performance requirements shall be tested by a Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory such as ETL, and bear
documentation indicating the following information:
1. Date of manufacture
2. Standard Compliance
3. NEC/CEC Listing
C. All cabling shall be tested at the factory, and provided with

manufacturer test results certifying compliance with appropriate
ANSI/TIA/EIA performance ratings.
D. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the label
and listing of Underwriters Laboratory and or CE. Application and
installation of all equipment and materials shall be in accordance
with such labeling and listing.
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas to receive the Work and the conditions under
which the Work would be performed. Identify conditions
detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do
not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install components in accordance with contract drawings,
manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittal data.

B. System installation and construction methods shall conform to the

requirements of the applicable International Standards.
C. The Contractor shall install all system components including

Employer Furnished Equipment, and appurtenances in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions, and adjustments required to
deliver a complete and operable system.
D. Earthing and Bonding shall be installed as necessary to preclude

ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely affecting system
operation.
E. The contractor shall adhere to the installation schedule of the

general contractor and should attend all construction meetings
scheduled by the general contractor.
F. Mount all equipment to be installed over public areas in a manner

adequate to support the equipment loads with a minimum safety
factor of five. Do not use formed eyebolts or lag screws for support
of suspended equipment.
G. Firmly and permanently, attach electrical boxes, enclosures, and

permanent equipment to the building. Rigidly mounted equipment
and devices shall be plumb and square.
H. Choose colors and finishes of all exposed and custom fabricated

items and labels to blend in with the surroundings as approved by
the Consultant and the architect.
I. Labeling
1. Label product in a logical, unique, legible, and permanent

manner corresponding to the Contract Drawings using
wording, format, style, color, and arrangement of text
accepted by the Operator.
J. Wiring Practices:
1. Group and bundle all wiring by power level or signal type.
2. Where specific instructions are not given, perform all wiring in

strict adherence to standard industry practices as described in
the referenced Telecommunications Distribution Methods
Manual (TDMM), and ANSI/TIA/EIA standards.
3. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damaging the cables and

equipment. Use grommets around cut outs and knock outs
where conduit or chase nipples are not installed.

4. Where wiring of different classifications share a common

enclosure or junction box, provide metallic isolation barriers to
completely electrically separate wiring groups.
5. The employment of proper field coordination between

tradespersons, and proper installation techniques to include
Grounding (Earthing) and bonding, adequate EMC
(Electromagnetic Compatibility) is attainable by complying
with the following guidelines:
a. These guidelines apply to properly earth bonded,

ventilated trough tray, containing communications
circuits in parallel with power circuits for a distance of
≥15m:
Condition <2kVA 2-5kVA >5kVA
Unshielded power lines or electrical

equipment in proximity to open or 130mm 300mm 600mm
non-metal pathways
Unshielded power lines or electrical
equipment in proximity to grounded 65mm 155mm 300mm
metal conduit pathway
Power lines enclosed in a grounded
metal conduit (or equivalent
50mm 155mm 300mm
shielding (in proximity to grounded
metal conduit pathway)
Transformers and Electric Motors 1M 1M 1M
Fluorescent lighting 300mm 300mm 300mm
b. Communications circuits, contained within properly

bonded, ventilated trough tray shall not be placed in the
same cable tray as power circuits.
6. All cables shall originate and terminate at active or passive

devices; cables shall not be spliced. Where several devices
are in close proximity, utilize approved housing to housing
connectors and adapters.
7. All cables terminated in a connection plate mounted in an

enclosure shall be dressed to allow removal from the enclosure
and sufficient cable length for service or re-termination. Plate
shall set on floor or freely swing clear.

8. All cables installed in vertical tray, or chases shall be supported

by means of appropriately sized, vertical cable supports every
third floor. The use of nylon cable ties is not permitted.
9. Cable Installation in Conduit and Duct Banks
a. Pull mandrel one size smaller than the conduit, through

entire length of all underground conduits.
b. Cable pulling lubrication shall be utilized when pulling

cable.
c. The manufacturer's pulling tension maximum range shall

not be exceeded.
d. Consult cable manufacturer to determine appropriate

pulling grip and method of attachment.
e. The bend radius for all cables shall conform to

manufacturer’s specifications.
10. Do not splice cables of any signal category under any

circumstances without prior approval of the Engineer.
K. Equipment Racks, Cabinets, Distribution Frames, TCP and LVJB.
1. Prior to placement of all racks, verify the presence and

location of all required power, circuit breakers, and building
Grounding (Earthing) electrode system access and floor space
in accordance with project specific drawings.
2. Locate each rack or enclosure to facilitate the removal of any

access floor tile immediately adjacent to the rear and side if
applicable
3. Within spaces that have access flooring installed, attach all

racks to the structural floor using the following method:
a. Place the rack and drill through the access floor panel at
the four anchor points beneath the rack.
b. Fasten to the structural floor using a minimum of 10mm

threaded rod and appropriate anchors and hardware.
Threaded rod should protrude no more than 50mm
above the base of the rack.
c. For sites without access flooring, enclosures will be

fastened directly to the structural floor at four points
provided by the manufacturer, using appropriate

methods and materials, to provide a secure, steadfast

installation.
4. Fasten racks together at a minimum of three evenly spaced

points along the adjoining side using manufacturer provided,
or approved, bolts and associated nuts with lock-washers.
5. Between each rack and / or enclosure, install a 4mm2 (#6

AWG) green jacketed bonding conductor fitted with
appropriately sized, one-hole copper lugs at each end, bond
by exposing the base metal, fastening through the rack frame
and making fast the connection.
6. Provide horizontal stabilization to all equipment racks and

bays, using materials and methods, which are listed as
appropriate for the intended use. At a minimum, horizontal
stabilizing will be placed on the first and last racks in a bay, as
well as every second rack. Maximum spacing between
horizontal bracing shall be 1200mm.
7. Place a machine generated, self-adhesive white background

label with black 25mm block letters bearing the identifier
indicated on associated project drawings on the front and
rear of each rack, enclosure, TCP and LVJB.
8. LVJB :
a. Shall coordinate with the MEP services above the false

ceiling and ensure that the adequate access is available
for the maintenance.
b. The GPON switches and mounting brackets shall be

supplied by FRHI.
c. Contractor shall carry out the GPON switches installation

as per the Operator instructions.
d. During the testing and commissioning of the GPON

system the contactor shall provide the access,
attendance and required coordination by Operator.
L. Earthing and Bonding
1. The Grounding (Earthing) system shall be verified by a

registered, certified Electrical Engineer. Upon verification, the
Electrical Engineer shall provide a written statement to be
submitted to the Consultant that the ground system /
infrastructure complies with the BICSI TDMM installation

Practices criteria, J-STD-607. In the event of conflicting codes,

specifications, or guidelines, the more stringent shall apply.
M. Wireless Systems:
1. The data outlets are provided for the Wi-Fi System, the
contactor shall coordinate with Wi-Fi System integrator
(Operator preferred vendor) to locate the data outlet at
appropriate location.
2. W-Fi System will be designed, supplied, configured by FRHI,

contractor to coordinate with Operator during the
construction.
3. Liaise with Wi-Fi System integrator (Operator preferred vendor)

prior to closing of ceiling to ensure all cables and outlets have
been installed. Contractor shall ensure that all outlets are
accessible, if access points will be replaced in future.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Maintain a competent supervisor and supporting technical
personnel, acceptable to the Employer during the entire
installation. Change of supervisor during the project shall not be
acceptable without prior written acceptance from the Employer.
B. Before connecting any equipment to electrical power outlets,

measure and record the A.C. voltages between hot, neutral, and
ground and verify correct outlet polarity. Verify test and document
correct and safe function of isolated ground power systems.
C. Determine the best sequence of energizing systems to minimize the

risk of damage.
D. After successfully energizing the systems, make preliminary

adjustments and document the settings of all controls, parameters
of corrective networks, voltages at key interconnection points,
gains and losses as applicable. Replicate the unity gain tests
performed at the shop and document the absence of any
waveform distortion, interference signals, or oscillations.
E. The Contractor shall develop and execute an onsite acceptance-

testing program.
F. The plan shall address all requirements identified in this Specification

and test all Contractor supplied cabling and hardware
components. The plan shall follow accepted industry testing
practices and have a method of independent verification
described.

G. Any specified item that does not satisfy the requirements of this
Specification shall be replaced, upgraded, or added by the
Contractor as necessary to correct the noted deficiencies. After
correction of a noted deficiency, re-testing shall be performed to
verify the effectiveness of the corrective action.
H. Field Inspection of Connections: Perform 100% visual inspection at

bolted and welded connections in the Work. Examine the size,
quality and placement of each connection to verify installation in
accordance with Contract Documents and executed Shop
Drawings.
I. Manufacturer’s Field Service: At the start of the installation,

periodically as the Work progresses, and after completion, furnish
the services of the manufacturer’s technical representative at the
job Site as necessary to advise on every phase of the Work. As a
minimum, furnish full-time attendance during the first three work
days, at least once every week thereafter, and furnish technical
assistance to the Installer as may be required.
3.6 BALANCED TWISTED PAIR TESTING
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, field-test instruments and

equipment required for the complete testing, identification and
administration of the work called for in the Contract Documents.
B. In order to conform to the overall project event schedule, the

cabling contractor shall survey the work areas and coordinate
cabling testing with other applicable trades.
C. This Section includes the minimum requirements for the test

certification, identification and administration of horizontal
balanced twisted pair cabling.
D. This Section includes minimum requirements for:
1. Copper cabling test instruments
2. Copper cabling testing
3. Test results documentation
E. Testing shall be performed on each cabling link. (100% testing)
F. All testing procedures and field-test instruments shall comply with

applicable requirements of:
1. ANSI/TIA-1152, Requirements for Field Test Instruments and

Measurements for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling

2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for

Customer Premises.
3. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard
4. ANSI/TIA 568 C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications

Cabling and Components Standards.
5. ANSI/TIA-606-B, Administration Standard for Commercial

Telecommunications Infrastructure, including the requirements
specified by the customer, unless the customer specifies their
own labeling requirements.
G. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an

appropriate training program and have obtained a certificate as
proof thereof shall execute the tests. These certificates may have
been issued by any of the following organizations or an equivalent
organization:
1. Manufacturer of the connectors or cable.
2. Manufacturer of the test equipment used for the field

certification.
3. Training organizations BICSI and ACP (Association of Cabling

Professionals™)
H. Unless otherwise specified by the Owner or the Owners

representative, each cabling link shall be in tested for:
1. Wire Map
2. Length
3. Propagation Delay
4. Delay Skew
5. DC Loop Resistance - recorded for information only
6. DC Resistance Unbalance - recorded for information only
7. Insertion Loss
8. NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk)
9. PS NEXT (Power Sum Near-End Crosstalk)
10. ACR-N (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Near-End) - recorded for

information only

11. PS ACR-N (Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Near-End)

- recorded for information only
12. ACR-F (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)
13. PS ACR-F (Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)
14. Return Loss
15. TCL (Transverse Conversion Loss) - recorded for information

only
16. ELTCTL (Equal Level Transverse Conversion Transfer Loss) -

recorded for information only
17. PS ANEXT (Power Sum Alien Near-End Crosstalk)
18. Average PS ANEXT (Average Power Sum Alien Near-End

Crosstalk)
19. PS AACR-F (Power Sum Alien Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio

Far-End)
20. Average PS AACR-F (Average Power Sum Alien Attenuation to

Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)
I. All installed cabling Permanent Links shall be field-tested and pass

the test requirements and analysis. Any Permanent Link that fails
these requirements shall be diagnosed and corrected. Any
corrective action that must take place shall be documented and
followed with a new test to prove that the corrected Permanent
Link meets performance requirements. The final and passing result
of the tests for all Permanent Links shall be provided in the test
results documentation.
J. Acceptance of the test results shall be given in writing after the

project is fully completed and tested in accordance with Contract
Documents and to the satisfaction of the Owner.
K. Balanced Twisted Pair Test Equipment
1. Balanced Twisted-Pair Cable Testers
a. The field-test instrument shall be within the calibration

period recommended by the manufacturer, typically 12
months.
b. Certification tester
2. Accuracy

a. Level IIIe accuracy in accordance with ANSI/TIA-1152
b. Independent verification of accuracy
3. Permanent Link Adapters
a. RJ45 plug must meet the requirements for NEXT, FEXT and
Return Loss in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Annex C
b. Twisted pair Category 5e, 6, 6A, 7 or 7A cords are not

permitted as their performance degrades with use and
can cause false Return Loss failures
4. Results Storage
a. Must be capable of storing > 10,000 results
5. Measurement capabilities
a. Wire Map
b. Length
c. Propagation Delay
d. Delay Skew
e. DC Loop Resistance
f. DC Resistance Unbalance
g. Insertion Loss
h. NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk)
i. PS NEXT (Power Sum Near-End Crosstalk)
j. ACR-N (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Near-End)
k. PS ACR-N (Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio

Near-End)
l. ACR-F (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)
m. PS ACR-F (Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-

End)
n. Return Loss
o. TCL (Transverse Conversion Loss)
p. ELTCTL (Equal Level Transverse Conversion Transfer Loss)

q. Time Domain Reflectometer
r. Time Domain Xtalk Analyzer
s. PS ANEXT (Power Sum Alien Near-End Crosstalk)
t. Average PS ANEXT (Average Power Sum Alien Near-End

Crosstalk)
u. PS AACR-F (Power Sum Alien Attenuation to Crosstalk

Ratio Far-End)
v. Average PS AACR-F (Average Power Sum Alien

Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)
6. PC Software
a. Windows® based.
b. Must show when 3 dB and 4 dB rules are applied
c. Re-certification capability, where results must have their

Cable IDs suffixed with (RC).
d. Built in PDF export - no additional third party software

permitted.
e. Built-in statistical analysis.
7. Acceptable manufacturer: Fluke Networks
L. Labels
1. Shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion

requirements of UL 969.
M. Balanced Twisted Pair Cable Testing Procedures
1. Field-test instruments shall have the latest software and

firmware installed.
2. Permanent Link test results including the individual frequency

measurements from the tester shall be recorded in the test
instrument upon completion of each test for subsequent
uploading to a PC in which the administrative documentation
(reports) may be generated.
3. Permanent Link testing shall be performed on each cabling

segment (connector to connector). Sampling is not
acceptable.

4. Alien Crosstalk testing shall be performed using a sampling

plan. An acceptance quality level (AQL) of 0,4 %, normal
inspection, general inspection level I as defined in ISO 2859-1
for populations of up to 500,000 links shall be used. The
following table represents this sampling level.
Sample size
Installation size
(No. of links to
(No. of total
test)
links)
3 – 33 100%
34 – 3,200 33
3,201 – 35,000 126
35,001 – 150,000 201
150,001 – 500,000 315
Disturbed (Victim) links chosen for Alien Crosstalk testing shall

be an equal combination of short, medium and long links.
5. Permanent Link adapters made from twisted pair Category 5e,

6, 6A, 7 or 7A cords are not permitted as their performance
degrades with use and can cause false Return Loss failures.
6. The installer shall build a reference link. All components shall

be anchored so it is not possible to disturb them. The
technician is to conduct a Category 6A Permanent Link test
each day to ensure no degradation of the tester or its
Permanent Link adapters.
7. Wire Map Measurement - The wire map test is intended to

verify pin-to-pin termination at each end and check for
installation connectivity errors. For each of the 8 conductors in
the cabling, the wire map indicates:
a. Continuity to the remote end
b. Shorts between any two or more conductors
c. Reversed pairs
d. Split pairs
e. Transposed pairs
f. Distance to open on shield
g. Any other miss-wiring
8. The correct connectivity of telecommunications

outlets/connectors is defined in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2. Two color

schemes are permitted. The user shall define which scheme is

to be used. The field tester shall document which color
scheme was used.
9. Length Measurement
a. The length of each balanced twisted pair shall be

recorded.
b. Since physical length is determined from electrical length,

the physical length of the link calculated using the pair
with the shortest electrical delay shall be reported and
used for making the pass or fail determination.
c. The pass or fail criteria is based on the maximum length

allowed for the Permanent Link as specified in ANSI/TIA-
568-C.2 plus the nominal velocity of propagation (NVP)
uncertainty of 10%. For a Permanent Link, the length
measurement can be 325 ft. (99 m) before a fail is
reported.
10. Propagation Delay measurement
a. Is the time it takes for a signal to reach the end of the link
b. The measurement shall be made at 10 MHz per ANSI/TIA-

1152.
c. The propagation delay of each balanced twisted pair

shall be recorded.
d. Is not to exceed 498 ns per ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Section

6.3.18.
11. Delay Skew measurement
a. Is the difference in propagation delay @ 10 MHz between

the shortest delay and the delays of the other wire pairs.
b. The delay skew of each balanced twisted pair shall be

recorded.
c. Is not to exceed 44 ns per ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Section 6.3.19.
12. DC Resistance
a. Often reported as Resistance, is the loop resistance of

both conductors in the pair.
b. Is not specified in ANSI/TIA-1152, but shall be recorded for

all four pairs.

13. DC Resistance Unbalance
a. Often reported as Resistance Unbalance, is the

difference in resistance of the two wires within the pair.
b. Is not specified in ANSI/TIA-1152 for a Permanent Link, but

shall be recorded for all four pairs.
14. Insertion Loss
a. Is the loss of signal strength over the cabling (in dB).
b. The frequency resolution shall be:
1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz
4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz
c. Worst case shall be reported for all four pairs in one

direction only.
d. Reported margins found to be within the accuracy of the

field tester shall be marked with an asterisk (*).
e. Is not to exceed the Category 6A Permanent Link limits

found in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2.
15. NEXT (Near-End Crosstalk)
a. Is the difference in amplitude (in dB) between a

transmitted signal and the crosstalk received on other
wire pairs at the same end of the cabling
1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz
4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz
c. Shall be measured in both directions. (12 pair to pair

possible combinations)
d. Both worst case and worst margins shall be reported.


f. Reported margins found to be within the accuracy of the

g. The Time Domain Xtalk data shall be stored for any

marginal or failing NEXT results.
16. PS NEXT (Power Sum Near-End Crosstalk)
a. Is the difference (in dB) between the test signal and the
crosstalk from the other pairs received at the same end of
the cabling
1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz
4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz
c. Shall be measured in both directions. (8 pair possible

combinations)


g. The Time Domain Xtalk data shall be stored for any

marginal or failing PS NEXT results.
17. ACR-N (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Near-End)
a. Is a calculation of NEXT minus Insertion Loss of the

disturbed pair in dB.
1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz

4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz
c. Shall be calculated in both directions.
d. Is not specified in ANSI/TIA-1152, but shall be recorded for

all 12 possible combinations.
18. PS ACR-N (Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Near-End)
a. Is a calculation of PS NEXT minus Insertion Loss of the

1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz
4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz
c. Shall be calculated in both directions.
d. Is not specified in ANSI/TIA-1152, but shall be recorded for

all 8 possible combinations.
19. ACR-F (Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)
a. Is a calculation of FEXT minus Insertion Loss of the

1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz
4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz
c. Shall be measured in both directions. (24 pair to pair

possible combinations)

found in ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Section 6.3.11.


20. PS ACR-F (Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio Far-End)
a. Is a calculation of PS FEXT minus Insertion Loss of the

1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz
4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz

combinations)


21. Return Loss
a. Is the difference (in dB) between the power of a

transmitted signal and the power of the signals reflected
back.
1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz
4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz

combinations)
e. Shall be ignored at all frequencies where the Insertion

Loss is less than 3 dB for that pair.
f. Is not to exceed the Category 6A Permanent Link limits


g. Reported margins found to be within the accuracy of the

h. The Time Domain Reflectometer data shall be stored for

any marginal or failing Return Loss results.
22. ELTCTL (Equal Level Transverse Conversion Transfer Loss)
a. Is the ratio (in dB) between a differential mode signal

inject at the near-end and the common-mode signal
measured at the far end on the same wire pair minus the
Insertion Loss of that pair.
1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz
4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz
c. Shall be measured in both directions.
d. Is not specified in ANSI/TIA-1152 for a Permanent Link, but

shall be recorded for all 8 possible combinations.
23. PS ANEXT (Power Sum Alien Near-End Crosstalk)
a. Takes into account the combined alien crosstalk

(statistical) on a receive pair from all external near-end
disturbers operating simultaneously.
1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz
4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz
c. The disturbed (victim) link shall have links to the left and
right of it and if present, links above and below it.
d. Disturber cables shall include all links within the same

bundle as the disturbed (victim) link and adjacent links
e. Should be measured in both directions if the link is patch

panel to patch panel. If the link is patch panel to

telecommunications outlet, then it shall be measured

from the patch panel end only.

24. Average PS ANEXT (Power Sum Alien Near-End Crosstalk)
a. Is calculated by averaging the individual PSANEXT loss

values, in dB, for all four pairs in the disturbed (victim) link.
1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz
4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz
c. Is not to exceed the Category 6A Permanent Link limits

25. PS AACR-F (Power Sum Alien Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio

Far-End)
a. AFEXT loss is the coupling of crosstalk at the far-end from

external link pairs into a disturbed (victim) pair of the 4-
pair link under test. PS AACR-F is the calculated power
sum from all external pairs into the disturbed (victim) pair.
1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz
4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz




26. Average PS AACR-F (Power Sum Alien Attenuation to Crosstalk

Ratio Far-End)
a. Is calculated by averaging the individual PS AACR-F

values, in dB, for all four pairs in the disturbed (victim) link.
1) 1 - 31.25 MHz: 150 kHz
2) 31.25 - 100 MHz: 250 kHz
3) 100 - 250 MHz: 500 kHz
4) 250 - 500 MHz: 1000 kHz



N. Test results saved within the field-test instrument shall be transferred

into a Windows™-based database utility that allows for the
maintenance, inspection and archiving of the test records. These
test records shall be uploaded to the PC unaltered, i.e., "as saved in
the field-test instrument". The file format, CSV (comma separated
value), does not provide adequate protection of these records and
shall not be used.
3.7 FIBER TESTING
A. Provide all labor, materials, and tools, field-test instruments and

equipment required for the complete testing, identification and
administration of the work called for in the Contract Documents.
B. In order to conform to the overall project event schedule, the

cabling contractor shall survey the work areas and coordinate
cabling testing with other applicable trades.

C. This Section includes the minimum requirements for the test

certification, identification and administration of backbone and
horizontal optical fiber cabling.
D. This Section includes minimum requirements for:
1. Fiber optic test instruments
2. Fiber optic testing
3. Test results documentation
E. Testing shall be carried out in accordance with this document. This

includes testing the attenuation and polarity of the installed cable
plant with an optical loss test set (OLTS) and the installed condition
of the cabling system and its components with an optical time
domain reflectometer (OTDR). The condition of the fiber end faces
shall also be verified.
F. Testing shall be performed on each cabling link (connector to

connector).
G. Testing shall be performed on each cabling channel (equipment to

equipment) that is identified by the owner.
H. Testing shall not include any active devices or passive devices

within the link or channel other than cable, connectors, and splices,
i.e. link attenuation does not include such devices as optical
bypass switches, couplers, repeaters, or optical amplifiers.
I. All tests shall be documented including OLTS dual wavelength

attenuation measurements for multimode and single-mode links
and channels and OTDR traces and event tables for multimode
and single-mode links and channels.
J. Optionally documentation shall also include optical length

measurements and pictures of the connector end face.
K. All testing procedures and field-test instruments shall comply with

applicable requirements of:
1. ANSI Z136.2, ANS For Safe Use Of Optical Fiber Communication

Systems Utilizing Laser Diode And LED Sources
2. ANSI/EIA/TIA 455 50B, Light Launch Conditions For Long-Length

Graded-Index Optical Fiber Spectral Attenuation
Measurements
3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-59A, Measurement of Fiber Point

Discontinuities Using an OTDR.

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA 455 60A, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Length

Using an OTDR.
5. ANSI/TIA/EIA 455 61A, Measurement of Fiber or Cable

Attenuation Using an OTDR.
6. ANSI/TIA/EIA 526 7, Optical Power Loss Measurements of

Installed Singlemode Fiber Cable Plant.
7. ANSI/TIA 526 14 B, Optical Power Loss Measurements of

Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant; IEC 61280-4-1 edition 2,
Fibre-Optic Communications Subsystem Test Procedure- Part 4-
1: Installed cable plant- Multimode attenuation measurement.
8. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for

Customer Premises.
9. ANSI/TIA 568 C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components

Standard.
10. ANSI/TIA-606-B, Administration Standard for Commercial

Telecommunications Infrastructure, including the requirements
specified by the customer, unless the customer specifies their
own labeling requirements.
L. Trained technicians who have successfully attended an

appropriate training program, which includes testing with an OLTS
and an OTDR and have obtained a certificate as proof thereof
shall execute the tests. These certificates may have been issued by
any of the following organizations or an equivalent organization:
1. Manufacturer of the fiber optic cable and/or the fiber optic

connectors.
2. Manufacturer of the test equipment used for the field

certification.
3. Training organizations i.e. BICSI and ACP (Association of

Cabling Professionals™)
M. Unless otherwise specified by the Owner or the Owners

representative, each cabling link shall be in compliance with the
following test limits:
1. Optical loss testing - Multimode and Single-mode links
2. The link attenuation shall be calculated by the following

formulas as specified in ANSI/TIA-568-C.0.

a. Link Attenuation (dB) = Cable Attn (dB) + Connector_Attn

(dB) + Splice_Attn (dB)
b. Cable_Attn (dB) = Attenuation_Coefficient (dB/km) *

Length (Km)
c. Connector_Attn (dB) = number_of_connector_pairs *

connector_loss (dB)
d. Maximum allowable connector_loss = 0.75 dB
e. Splice_Attn (dB) = number_of_splices * splice_loss (dB)
f. Maximum allowable splice_loss = 0.3 dB
g. The values for the Attenuation_Coefficient (dB/km) are

listed in the table below:
Type of Optical Fiber Wavelength Attenuation Wavelength Attenuation
(nm) coefficient (nm) coefficient
(dB/km) (dB/km)
Multimode 62.5/125 µm 850 3.5 1300 1.5
Multimode 50/125 µm 850 3.5 1300 1.5
Single-mode (Inside plant) 1310 1.0 1550 1.0
Single-mode (Outside plant) 1310 0.5 1550 0.5
3. OTDR testing
a. Reflective events (connections) shall not exceed 0.75 dB.
b. Non-reflective events (splices) shall not exceed 0.3 dB.
4. Magnified end face inspection
a. Fiber connections shall be visually inspected for end face

quality.
b. Scratched, pitted or dirty connectors shall be diagnosed

and corrected.
N. All installed cabling links and channels shall be field-tested and pass
the test requirements and analysis. Any link or channel that fails
these requirements shall be diagnosed and corrected. Any
corrective action that must take place shall be documented and
followed with a new test to prove that the corrected link or channel
meets performance requirements. The final and passing result of
the tests for all links and channels shall be provided in the test results
documentation in accordance with Part 3.

O. Acceptance of the test results shall be given in writing after the

project is fully completed and tested in accordance with Contract
Documents and to the satisfaction of the Owner.
Note: High Bandwidth applications such as 1000BASE-SX, 10GBASE-

SR, and FC1200 impose stringent channel loss limits. Where
practical, certification should consider loss length limits that meet
maximum channel (transmitter to receiver) loss.
Performance specification for MM fiber at 850 nm

Bandwidt
FibreChannel 1200-
Fiber Type 1000BASE-SX 10GBASE-SR
MX-SN-I
Length Length Length
µm (MHz• Km) Loss (dB) Loss (dB) Loss (dB)
(m) (m) (m)
OM1 62.5 200 275 2.38 33 2.5 33 2.4
OM2 50 500 550 3.56 82 2.3 82 2.2
OM3 50 2000 N/A N/A 300 2.6 300 2.6
OM4 50 47000 N/A N/A 400 2.9 N/A N/A
P. Fiber Test Equipment
1. The field-test instrument shall be within the calibration period

recommended by the manufacturer.
2. Optical loss test set (OLTS)
a. Multimode optical fiber light source
1) Provide dual LED light sources with central

wavelengths of 850 nm ( 30 nm) and 1300 nm ( 20
nm)
2) Output power of -20 dBm minimum.
3) The light source shall meet the Encircled Flux launch

requirements of ANSI/TIA 526-14-B.
b. Single-mode optical fiber light source
1) Provide dual laser light sources with central

wavelengths of 1310 nm ( 20 nm) and 1550 nm ( 20
nm).
2) Output power of -10 dBm minimum.
c. Power Meter
1) Provide 850 nm, 1300/1310 nm, and 1550 nm

wavelength test capability.

2) Power measurement uncertainty of 0.25 dB.
3) Store reference power measurement.
4) Save at least 100 results in internal memory.
5) PC interface (serial or USB).
d. Optional length measurement
1) It is preferable to use an OLTS that is capable of

measuring the optical length of the fiber using time-
of-flight techniques.
3. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR)
a. Shall have a bright, color transmissive LCD display with

backlight.
b. Shall have rechargeable Li-Ion battery for 8 hours of

normal operation.
c. Weight with battery and module of not more than 4.5 lb

and volume of not more 200 in³.
d. Internal non-volatile memory and removable memory

device with at least 16 MB capacity for results storage.
e. Serial and USB ports to transfer data to a PC.
f. Multimode OTDR
1) Wavelengths of 850 nm ( 20 nm) and 1300 nm ( 20

nm).
2) Event dead zones of 3.7 m maximum at 850 nm and

1300 nm.
3) Attenuation dead zones of 10 m maximum at 850

nm and 13 m maximum at 1300 nm.
4) Distance range not less than 2000 m.
5) Dynamic range at least 10 dB at 850 nm and 1300

nm
g. Single-mode OTDR
1) Wavelengths of 1310 nm (20 nm) and 1550 nm (20

nm).

2) Event dead zones of 3.5 m maximum at 1310 nm

and 1550 nm.
3) Attenuation dead zones of 10 m maximum at 1310

nm and 12 m maximum at 1550 nm.
4) Distance range not less than 10000 m.
5) Dynamic range at least 10 dB at 1310 nm and 1550

nm
h. Optional requirements
1) Video camera systems are preferred.
2) Camera probe tips that permit inspection through

adapters are preferred.
3) It is preferable to use test equipment capable of

saving and reporting the end face image.
i. Integrated OLTS, OTDR and fiber microscope
1) Test equipment that combines into one instrument

an OLTS, an OTDR and a fiber microscope may be
used.
j. Acceptable manufacturers: Fluke Networks
Q. Labels shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and

adhesion requirements of UL 969.
R. Fiber Testing Procedures:
1. All tests performed on optical fiber cabling that use a laser or

LED in a test set shall be carried out with safety precautions in
accordance with ANSI Z136.2.
2. Field-test instruments shall have the latest software and

firmware installed.
3. Link and channel test results from the OLTS and OTDR shall be
recorded in the test instrument upon completion of each test
for subsequent uploading to a PC in which the administrative
documentation (reports) may be generated.
4. Fiber end faces shall be inspected at 200X or 400X

magnification. 200X magnification is suitable for inspecting
multimode and single-mode fibers. 400X magnification may
be used for detailed examination of single-mode fibers.

Scratched, pitted or dirty connectors shall be diagnosed and

corrected.
5. It is preferable that the end face images be recorded in the

memory of the test instrument for subsequent uploading to a
PC and reporting.
6. Testing shall be performed on each cabling segment

(connector to connector).
7. Testing shall be performed on each cabling channel

(equipment to equipment) that is planned for use per the
owner's instructions.
8. Testing of the cabling shall be performed using high-quality

test cords of the same fiber type as the cabling under test.
The test cords for OLTS testing shall be between 1 m and 5 m in
length. The test cords for OTDR testing shall be approximately
100 m for the launch cable and at least 25 m for the receive
cable.
9. Optical loss testing
a. Horizontal/Backbone link
1) Multimode links shall be tested at 850 nm and 1300

nm in accordance with ANSI/TIA-526-14-B, one-cord
reference method.
2) Single-mode backbone links shall be tested at 1310

nm and 1550 nm in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-
526-7, Method A.1, One Reference Jumper
equivalent method.
3) Link attenuation does not include any active

devices or passive devices other than cable,
connectors, and splices, i.e. link attenuation does
not include such devices as optical bypass switches,
couplers, repeaters, or optical amplifiers.
10. OTDR Testing
a. Fiber links shall be tested at the appropriate operating

wavelengths for anomalies and to ensure uniformity of
cable attenuation and connector insertion loss.
1) Multimode: 850 nm and 1300 nm
2) Singlemode: 1310 nm and 1550 nm

b. Each fiber link and channel shall be tested in both

directions.
c. A launch cable shall be installed between the OTDR and

the first link connection.
d. A receive cable shall be installed after the last link

connection.
11. Length Measurement
a. The length of each fiber shall be recorded.
b. It is preferable that the optical length be measured using

an OLTS or OTDR.
12. Polarity Testing
a. Paired duplex fibers in multi-fiber cables shall be tested to

verify polarity in accordance with Clause E.5.3 of ANSI/TIA
568 C.0. The polarity of the paired duplex fibers shall be
verified using an OLTS.
S. Test results saved within the field-test instrument shall be transferred

into a Windows™-based database utility that allows for the
maintenance, inspection and archiving of the test records. These
test records shall be uploaded to the PC unaltered, i.e., "as saved in
the field-test instrument". The file format, CSV (comma separated
value), does not provide adequate protection of these records and
shall not be used.
3.8 TRAINING
A. The manufacturers authorized and factory trained personnel must
provide 5 Days of training sessions. Duration of each training session
shall be at-least four hours long. Contractor to video record each
session and provide six soft copies of the recording as part of the
Close-Out Submittals.
B. The training must include at a minimum:
1. Preventive maintenance service techniques and schedules.
2. Overall system concepts, capabilities and functions.
3. Explanation of all control functions.
4. Methods and means of troubleshooting and replacement of

all distribution and drop wiring and devices.

C. Manuals, drawings and technical documentation must be used in

training and shall be left with the Employer, or its designated
representative at the completion of training for Employer use in the
future.
D. The use of proprietary equipment does not justify failure to provide

technical documentation, such as programming information,
electronic schematic drawings and technical description, as part
of training and documentation. It shall be the responsibility of the
contractor to ensure this documentation can be obtained prior to
acceptance, as listed in this document.
3.9 INSPECTION
A. Provide a statement of completion certifying that the system is
installed and is ready for acceptance testing and equalization to
The Engineer.
B. Schedule a time for The Engineer to perform system acceptance

testing and equalization with at least 14 days advance notice.
C. Furnish a technician who is familiar with the system to assist The

Engineer during the acceptance testing and equalization for the
duration of time it takes to complete the adjustments (regular time
or overtime as required). A minimum of 24 hours, as required to
complete the adjustments.
D. Each cable shall be inspected for proper termination.
E. Record final settings on all equipment and submit with contract

closeout documents.
F. Upon completion of initial tests and adjustments, submit written

report of tests to the Employer along with all documents, diagrams,
and record drawings required herein.
G. If the system does not meet criteria or if additional trips to the job
Site for testing or equalization are required, The Contractor shall
reimburse the Employer for all expenses and professional time
encountered by The Engineer.
3.10 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish all test equipment necessary for the complete testing and
commissioning of the system, to be available for the entire test
period through final system testing and Taking-Over.

3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Upon completion of the Work repair surfaces that have been
permanently stained, marked, or otherwise damaged. Replace
Work which is damaged or cannot be adequately cleaned as
directed.
B. The Contractor shall not apply power to the system until after:
1. System and components have been installed and inspected in

accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. A visual inspection of the system components has been

conducted to ensure that defective equipment items have
not been installed and that there are no loose connections.
3. System wiring has been tested and verified as correctly

connected as indicated.
4. All system grounding and transient protection systems have

been verified as properly installed and connected, as
indicated.
5. The Employer Information Technology Staff and The Engineer

have accepted the installation.
C. Satisfaction of the above requirements shall not relieve The

Contractor of responsibility for incorrect installations, defective
equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of The
Contractor’s deficient work/defective equipment.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Remove all unnecessary tools and equipment, unused materials,
packing materials, and debris from each area where Work has
been completed unless designated for storage.
B. Clean all areas around system equipment and be sure that the
inside of each equipment rack is free of wire stripping and other
debris.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work during the construction period so that it will be
without any indication of use or damage at the time of
acceptance.
END OF SECTION

12-128 Aqua Raffles Jeddah
Jeddah, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
APPENDIX -A (AV/IT/Security Responsibility Matrix)

Description: Aqua Raffles- AV/IT/Security Responsibility Matrix Legend
Date: 20-Nov-2016 X - Primary Responsibility
Revision: 2 0 - Assistance/ Involvement Required
General Note: The Client/Operator provided / installed items are related to active components only. All required cabling are under Main / ELV contractor's scope.
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
Structured Cabling System
X
(IDF room Horizontal + Inter-Rack Cabling at Server room )
Procurement (RFQ) X
1 Physical Installation X Patch panels and cabling by ELV contractor.
Testing & Commissioning X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Server Room Racks - Hotel Brand X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Receive, Store and Place X
2 Physical Installation X Includes electrical grounding.
Testing & Commissioning 0 X
Training X
Handover 0 X
Server Room Racks - Other X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Physical Installation X Includes electrical grounding.
3
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Access Control X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Physical Installation X
4 System Configuration X 0
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Firewall (Admin + Guests) X
Procurement (RFQ) X
5 Firewall for Facilities and CCTV Network is by ELV Contractor.
System Configuration X
Training X
Handover X
Intrusion Protection (Admin + Guests) X
Procurement (RFQ) X
6 Physical Installation X Firewall for Facilities and CCTV Network is by ELV Contractor.
Training X
Handover X
ISA Server X
Procurement (RFQ) X
7
Training X
Handover X
Deployment Server X
Procurement (RFQ) X
8
Training X
Handover X
Administration Network: Router & Switches, NMS, Network Security

by FRHI X
[Systems: IP Phones, POS and other administration systems]
Procurement (RFQ) X Includes Mounting and Patching of switches.Provide Access, Complete Inventory,
9
Receive, Store and Place X Witness Equipment Basic functionality.
Physical Installation X 0
Training X
Handover 0 X
1 PMK International
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
Guest Network: Router, Switches, NMS, Network Security and
GPON by FRHI
X
[Systems: Wi-Fi, HSIA, All IP systems (GRMS, Minibar, Wi-Fi, HITV
and Phones) within the Guest room are connected to GPON]
Procurement (RFQ) X
Includes Mounting and Patching of switches.Provide Access, Complete Inventory,
10 Receive, Store and Place X
Witness Equipment Basic functionality.
Training X
Handover 0 X
Wireless System (Wi-Fi) X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Physical Installation X Client / Operator shall deploy the preferred listed contractor to install the wireless
11 Coordination/ Containment/ MEP Provisions X 0
system equipment.
Training X
Handover X
Facilities Network -
X
[Systems: Digital Signage, AV, BMS and IPTV]
Procurement (RFQ) X
12 The IPTV's in the podium building shall be part of the Facilities network.
System Configuration X 0
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Security Network -
X
[Systems: Access Control System, CCTV and Monitoring Station]
Procurement (RFQ) X
13
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Retail Network -
X
[Systems: Retails system, Cameras]
Procurement (RFQ) X
14
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Servers X
Procurement (RFQ) X
15
Training X
Handover X
Desktops X
Procurement (RFQ) X
16
Training X
Handover X
Laptops X
Procurement (RFQ) X
17
Training X
Handover X
Printer X
Procurement (RFQ) X
18
Training X
Handover X
2 PMK International
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
MultiFunction - (Copiers\Print\Fax) X
Procurement (RFQ) X
19
Training X
Handover X
Point of Sale X
Procurement (RFQ) X
20
Training X
Handover X
Tablet Check In and Check Out X
Procurement (RFQ) X
21
Training X
Handover X
Passport Scanning X
Procurement (RFQ) X
22
Training X
Handover X
IP-PABX (Telephone System) X
Procurement (RFQ) X
23
Training X
Handover 0 X
Distribution Antenna Systems (DAS) X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Physical Installation 0 X
Coordination/ Containment/ MEP Provisions X Client to engage Service Provider. Main Contractor to provide containment as per the
24
System Configuration X design of the Service Provider. Main Contractor to allow access for Service Provider.
Training X
Handover X
Back of House Communications X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Physical Installation X 0 Client to engage Specialist (Motorola or others - competitive tender) based on D&B
Coordination/ Containment/ MEP Provisions X Basis. Scope to be PS Item in the MW Contract to be executed by Client. Main
25
System Configuration X 0 Contractor to provide containment as per the design of the Specialist. Main Contractor
Testing & Commissioning X to allow access for Specialist.
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Hotel Interactive TV System Headend and Satellite dishes X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Physical Installation 0 X Cabling from the satellite dishes to the Headend in the MDF room shall be included as
26
System Configuration 0 X part of the ELV contractor's scope.
Training X
Handover 0 X
Guest Room TV & Sound Bar X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Physical Installation 0 X Installation by the Client Appointed FF&E Contractor. ELV contractor to provide all AV/IT
27
System Configuration and Integration 0 X cables required for the Guestroom TV and Sound bar and carryout system connectivity.
Training X
Handover 0 X
Media Panel X
Procurement (RFQ) X
28
System Configuration and Integration 0 X cables required for the Media panel and carryout system connectivity.
Training X
Handover 0 X
3 PMK International
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
Digital Signage X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Door Locking System X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
CCTV System X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
GRMS X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Selected approved vendor to provide the GRMS system according to the design
documents.
Training X 0
Handover X 0
4 PMK International
12128
DIVISION 02 – IT NETWORK EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION
REV. E
17 NOVEMBER 2016

1

DWG № Rev:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 SUMMARY ...........................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 ACRONYMS.........................................................................................................................................................3
1.3 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................................7
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION...........................................................................................................................................8
1.5 SCOPE DEMARCATION SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................ 13
1.6 SUBMITTALS ........................................................................................................................................................ 14
1.7 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS ..................................................................................................................................... 17
1.9 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS.............................................................................................................................. 22
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ............................................................................................................... 22
1.11 WARRANTY ........................................................................................................................................................ 23
1.12 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................................................. 23
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................ 26

2.1 MATERIALS......................................................................................................................................................... 26
2.2 NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................... 27
2.3 CORE SWITCHES ................................................................................................................................................ 29
2.4 SERVER SWITCHES .............................................................................................................................................. 31
2.5 EDGE/ACCESS SWITCHES .................................................................................................................................. 33
2.6 EDGE/CORE SWITCH FOR RETAIL [COMMON AREA] .............................................................................................. 38
2.7 INTERNET ACCESS GATEWAY ............................................................................................................................. 40
2.8 FIREWALL AND INTRUSION PREVENTION SYSTEM ................................................................................................ 40
2.9 DMZ SWITCHES .................................................................................................................................................. 41
2.10 GPON SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................... 41
2.11 IP-PBX [HYBRID] TELEPHONE SYSTEM................................................................................................................... 41
2.12 INTERNET BILLING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................ 79
2.13 WIRELESS INTERNET AND NETWORK CONNECTIVITY ........................................................................................... 79
2.14 SPARES .............................................................................................................................................................. 79
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................... 80

3.1 FABRICATION .................................................................................................................................................... 80
3.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL .............................................................................................................................. 80
3.3 EXAMINATION ................................................................................................................................................... 80
3.4 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................................... 80
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................................................................................... 83
3.6 TRAINING........................................................................................................................................................... 84
3.7 INSPECTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 84
3.8 TEST EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................................................ 85
3.9 ADJUSTING ........................................................................................................................................................ 85
3.10 CLEANING......................................................................................................................................................... 86
3.11 PROTECTION ..................................................................................................................................................... 86
27 20 00 IT Network Equipment - Rev. E Page 1 of 86

SECTION 27 20 00
IT NETWORK EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
engineering design, and testing, and shall provide all products
required in order to ensure a fully operative system and proper
installation of equipment. System operability and proper installation
shall be verified via completion of the acceptance test plan.
B. Contractor shall coordinate all installation activities and details with

the Employer’s Internet Service Provider including final
configurations.

specified.

G. Contractor shall secure and pay for plan check fees, permits, fees,
and licenses necessary for execution of Work as applicable for the
project.
I. The Contractor shall perform pre-delivery testing, site testing, and


K. Contractor to provide alternate price for installation, configuration,

and testing of equipment provided by the Employer.

L. Employer reserves the right to procure the required equipment

M. The Contractor shall verify space, power and cooling requirements

associated with this Section.
N. Related Drawings:
1. “ITE” Series Drawings
2. “ITS” Series Drawings
3. Electronic Security System Layouts
O. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Audiovisual Specification Section 27 40 00
2. Communication Cabling Specification Section 27 10 00
3. Electronic Security System Specification Section 28 00 00
P. Coordination and interface with other trades including but not

limited to:
1. Architectural Drawings and Specifications
2. Interiors Drawings and Specifications
3. Mechanical Electrical Plumbing Drawings and Specifications
4. Structural Drawings and Specifications
5. Authorities having jurisdiction.
Q. Contractor to refer to Appendix A “AV/IT/Security Responsibility

1.2 ACRONYMS
AAA Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting
ACL Access Control List
ADSL Asymmetric digital subscriber line
AES Advanced Encryption Standard
ARP Address Resolution Protocol

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units
CDR Call Detail Record

Standardization)
CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing
DES Data Encryption Standard
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
EAP Extensible Authentication Protocol
ECMP Equal-cost multi-path routing
EN European norm
FTR Floor Telecom Room
Gbps Gigabit Per Second
HSRP Hot Standby Router Protocol
IDS Intrusion Detection System
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol
IPTV Internet Protocol Television
IPS Intrusion Prevention System
ISDN Integrated Services for Digital Network

ISP Internet Service Provider
LAN Local Area Network
LVJB Low Voltage Junction Box
MAC Media Access Control
Mbps Megabit Per Second
MIB Management Information Base
MIMO Multiple-Input and Multiple-Output
MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching
Mpps Million Packer per Second
MWI Message-waiting indicator
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
PAgP Port Aggregation Protocol
PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Association
PEAP Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol
PGM Pragmatic General Multicast
PIM Protocol Independent Multicast
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
QoS Quality of Service
RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service
RF Radio Frequency
RFC Request for Comments

RIP Routing Information Protocol
RISC Reduced instruction set computing
RMON Remote Network Monitoring
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RU Rack Unit
SCS Structured Cabling System
SFP Small Form factor Pluggable
SIP Session Initiation Protocol
SMDI Simplified Message Desk Interface
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SSH Secure Shell
SSM Source Specific Multicast
TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System
TCP/IP Transfer control Protocol / Internet Protocol
TTLS Tunneled Transport Layer Security
UDP User Datagram Protocol
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
VPN Virtual Private Network
VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
WAN Wide Area Network
WAP Wireless Access Point
WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access

XML Extensible Markup Language
1.3 REFERENCES
D. Ministry of communication specification and regulations

(Guidelines)
E. National Electric Code (N.E.C.).
F. National Electric Safety Code (N.E.S.C.).
G. National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.).
H. American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.).
I. Electronics Industries Association (E.I.A).
J. Telecommunications Industries Association (T.I.A.).
K. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI)

L. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard
M. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard
N. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 569-A Commercial Building Standard for

Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
O. ANSI/TIA/EIA- 606-A Administration Standard for Commercial

Telecommunications Infrastructure
P. ANSI-J-STD-607-A Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and

Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications
Q. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) X3T9.5 Requirements

for UTP at 100 Megabit per seconds (Mbps)
R. ISO/IEC 11801 Information Technology – Generic Cabling for

Customer Premises
S. American Society for Testing Materials (A.S.T.M.).
T. Building Seismic Safety Council (B.S.S.C.)

U. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
V. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
W. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Testing Bulletin
X. CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 0-10 - General requirements - Canadian

electrical code, part II
Y. Underwriter's Laboratory, Inc. (UL):
1. UL-5A: Standard for Non-Metallic Raceways and Fittings.
2. UL-5C: Standard for Surface Raceways and Fittings for Use with
Data, Signal, and Control Circuits.
3. UL-50: Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
4. UL-94-V0: Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials.
5. UL1863: Standard for Safety - Communications Circuit

Accessories.

A. The Project shall consist of 5 nos. of physical independent networks
as detailed below.
B. IT Networks – The project shall be provided with Physically separate

networks as described below to support the following applications:
1. Admin Network [Design, supply, configuration, monitoring and

support by FRHI] :
a. IP Telephony Network
b. Operator systems
c. POS
2. Guest Network (GPON) [Design, supply, configuration,

monitoring and support by FRHI] :
a. IPTV
b. Analog Telephone
c. All IP systems within the Guest rooms. [GRMS and Mini bar]
d. Wi-Fi Networks
e. HSIA

f. GPON
3. Facilities Network:
a. Digital Signage
b. Audio Visual Systems
c. BMS (Building Management System)
4. Electronic Security System Network:
a. CCTV
b. Access control panels
c. Monitoring systems
5. Retail Network:
a. Retail admin workstations
b. Security Cameras within retail common areas
c. Retail Phones
C. A dedicated Hotel Operator IT Server Room is provided to

accommodate all IT based services such as Networks for Office
Administration, Guest, Facilities, Security as well as the active
components for GRMS, IPTV, IP-PBX (hybrid) System, Digital Signage,
HSIA and Operator Applications equipment.
D. The Hotel IT Server Room shall be segregated into zones as

described on the design drawings using wire mesh partitions. Each
zone shall be accessed controlled.
E. The Guest (GPON) and Admin networks switches, servers, security

appliance, Wi-Fi controllers, HSIA and Operator applications will be
located in the Admin/Guest Section at Hotel IT Server room.
F. The Server racks and PDUs for the Admin and Guest application
servers shall be supplied by FRHI for installation by the contractor.
G. The PDUs for the Admin & Guest network racks shall be provided by
FRHI for installation by the contractor.
H. The Facilities core switches, network security appliances, GRMS

server, IP-PBX Hybrid Telephone System, Building Management
System servers, Digital Signage Servers, IPTV Servers and Head end
shall be installed in the Contractor section of the Hotel IT Server
room.

I. The Security equipment including the Switches, Security Network

appliance, recording storage and relevant equipment for security
system will be installed in the Security section of the Hotel IT Server
room
J. All Physically separate networks shall be interlinked via firewall

communication between respective networks.
K. The Contractor shall provide logical VLAN separation between

different systems within the same network such as AV VLAN, Digtial
Signage, BMS VLAN etc.
L. The Hotel IT server room together with the security monitoring room
shall be powered from the central UPS. The contactor shall
calculate the load based on the equipment calculations before
installation of equipment.
M. The contractor shall coordinate with electrical contractor to ensure

that the UPS units are feed by emergency power as indicted in the
technical room enlargement plans.
N. Power for Telecommunication systems and all security systems in

the Hotel IT Server room shall be connected to an UPS that should
maintain the minimum 15 minutes backup.
O. Provide dedicated rack mounted UPS units for all IDF rooms to
support the installed equipment for a minimum of 15 minutes with
full load unless otherwise specified or agreed. Refer the rack
elevations and room enlargements for further information.
P. The Contractor shall supply the active switches based on the data
outlets in the Facilities and security networks + 10% spare ports.
Q. All Switch ports shall be PoE for the Electronic Security system.
R. The Retail networks active equipment will be located in the Retail IT

Server room at ground floor.
S. The Single converged network shall be considered for the Retail, all
data outlets within the retail area such as workstations, CCTV,
Access control panel, retail desks, phones etc. in the common retail
area shall be connected to retail network switch in Retail IT server
room.
T. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the requirements

associated with this Section and coordinate with the relevant
trades.

U. The Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate with the main

contractor for the sealing of the equipment room floors with anti-
static, dust retarding coating prior to equipment racks being
installed.
V. IP Network:
1. It is the Design Intent to provide multiple intra-building

infrastructures which shall support fully redundant, high-speed,
standards-based, switched 10/100/1000 Mbps, multi-protocol,
Ethernet network, providing IP services based on ANSI/TIA/EIA
and ISO standards, and Building Industry Consulting Service
International (BICSI) Telecommunications Design Methods
Manual (TDMM).
2. All network end-points and outlets shall support 10/100/1000

Mbps operation and provide PoE where required.
3. The system LAN configurations shall be a two-tier hierarchical

star. All services for the development will originate at the Core
Switches located in the Hotel IT Server room. Core Switches will
be interconnected to the optical fiber backbone by means of
rack-mounted Fiber Distribution Enclosures (FDE). The
backbone will deliver data to and terminate at the Edge
Switches located in the IDF rooms.
4. Wi-Fi locations shown on drawings are provisional. The exact

location of Wireless access points shall be defined based on
the heat map design to be provided by FRHI.
5. The network design shall follow the topology diagram shown in

the schematic drawings.
6. Contractor shall coordinate with Operator and get an

approval before procure the materials.
7. The required passive cabling and Active equipment for the

GSM Mobile and Fixed Internet services will be supplied and
installed by the particular Service provider contractor based
on their design. However, necessary coordination shall be
provided by the IT contactor.
W. IP-PBX [HYBRID] Telephone System:
1. IP Telephony system including all licenses shall be provided to

cover all areas of the development as specified herein.

2. Provision of fully functional voice mail system for the hotel

guest and administrative extensions, interfacing with property
management system.
3. Voicemail licenses for the Network shall be provided for a

minimum of 1000 users or as directed by the operator.
4. Voice communication shall support paging services to group

of phones and communication on smart phones.
5. The Telephone system shall support the following but not

limited to:
a. A PBX to handle all analog and IP phones.
b. All necessary switch equipment to accommodate a 10%

future growth in requirements.
c. Integration with voice mail system.
d. Integration with call accounting billing system.
e. Integration and interface with a property management

system.
f. Integrated answer supervision capability.
g. Provision of fully functional voice mail system for the hotel

guest and administrative extensions.
h. Provision of fully functional call accounting system for the

hotel guest and administrative extensions.
X. Approved Manufactures for Data Networking and IP-PBX [Hybrid]

Systems.
1. Data Networking for Electronic Security System and Facilities

Networks:
a. Cisco
b. HP [Optional]
2. IP-PBX [Hybrid] Telephone system:
a. Alcatel
b. Avaya
3. Approved IP Phones:
a. Avaya

1) Administration: Avaya 1140e or Equivalent [approx.

100 nos.]
2) Kitchen and Storerooms: Avaya 1110 or Equivalent

[approx. 180 nos.]
b. Approved manufacturers for all Analog Telephones (for

guestrooms, lift lobbies, meeting rooms etc.) [Supplied by
FRHI]:
1) Teledex or Equivalent
1.5 SCOPE DEMARCATION SUMMARY

A. The following equipment shall be supplied by FRHI and FRHI is
responsible for the Design, configuration, training, project
management, monitoring, support and warranty of the systems.
B. Physical installations of the Wi-Fi system equipment including the

Access Points shall be carried out by the Operator’s preferred
vendor. The IT contractor shall provide the necessary coordination
during the construction.
C. The physical installation of the supplied equipment shall be carried

out by the contactor.
1. FRHI / Client Supplied Equipment
a. Network equipment for Hotel Administration and Guest

HSIA Networks
b. Network Management
c. Wired - Cisco, Router and Switches
d. Wi- Fi Network controllers and Access Points [Physical

installation by the Operator preferred vendor]
e. Network Security
f. HSIA System and Management
g. GPON System with accessories
h. Internet Access Gateway
i. Firewall and Intrusion Prevention System
j. DMZ Switch
k. Analog Telephones

1.6 SUBMITTALS

a. Equipment Procurement Date
b. Equipment Installation Start Date
c. Equipment Installation Completion Date
d. Equipment Testing Start Date
e. Equipment Testing Completion Date
f. Potential Slippage Periods
g. Contingent Tasks
h. Concurrent Tasks
i. Completion of Documentation
1. The Contractor shall provide a detailed network maps to be

utilized as a road map during the implementation of the
Physically Separate Network System. These shall show all
segments, all interconnects between segments and all active
network devices. The network maps shall not include the
individual nodes interconnected to each concentrator but
shall have the modules, interfaces, protocols, addresses and
other identifying features for each concentrator and other
active device.
D. Cable Plant Connectivity
1. The Contractor shall provide a Cable Plant interconnectivity

chart showing all fiber patch panels and individual identifiers
for each fiber associated with the interconnectivity of each
network device.
E. Product Data - [Refer the contract documents for no. of sets,


1. By submitting complete product data and samples, the

construction criteria related herein. It also represents that the
information contained within project drawings, product data
sheets and samples conform to the requirements of the work
and of these specifications. The Contractor shall notify in
writing of any irregularity or discrepancies to the Consultant
and provide the Consultant with possible solutions that will
rectify any situations.

corresponding specification paragraph numbers or equipment
title. Indicate all accepted substitutions.

and color selections for all exposed items such as IP
Telephones subject to Consultant selection.
F. Shop Drawings - [Refer the contract documents for no. of sets,


practices.
2. Submit point-to-point wiring diagrams and typed wire lists

identifying every connection for information. Include
electronic devices such as switches, transformers, and terminal
blocks. Indicate locations of all components. Identify cables
by types, colors, and wire numbers. Include termination details
including conductor color codes and cable dressing details for
each type of connector used in the system.
3. Submit network block diagram and network logical block

diagram.
4. Submit Interface block diagram of the network with all building

systems.
5. Submit Power and cooling requirements for each equipment

rack / room.


7. Submit equipment rack layouts indicating the proposed

arrangement of mounted network equipment including cable
management and patching in relationship to the Structured
Cabling System.
8. Submit mounting and support details for ceiling and wall

mounted devices.
G. Samples -

will be reviewed for color, appearance, and workmanship.
Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive
responsibility of the Contractor. Furnish samples of the
following:
a. IP Telephone set
b. Wi-FI Access point (By FRHI)
H. Submit Electronic Copies of Shop drawings & Product Data. [Refer

the contract documents for no. of sets, minimum three(3) sets shall
be provided]
2. A Master File List in text format shall be placed on each CD

ROM with a short description of files in the submittal.

acceptable. All XREFs, fonts, and other drawing parts
necessary shall be bound and included.

necessary for the reproduction of the submittals shall be
included in the files, and shall be included in JPEG (.JPG) file
format.



should include: [Refer the contract documents for no. of sets,
1. Hard Copies
2. Electronic Copies
3. Source Code
4. Operation Manual


and operational concepts

e. Single-line block-diagrams showing all major system

components.
f. Two sets of reduced size drawings showing the

g. Manufacturer's operation manuals for equipment

h. A properly licensed working copy of the latest version of

any and all software required to operate or configure the
systems specified herein shall be a part of the system
supplied. This includes, but is not limited to, all software,
firmware and hardware required for configuration,
adjustment, diagnosis and repair.
i. All software shall be fully documented, and that

documentation included.
j. Software shall be included in its “installable” state on

industry standard CD/DVD-ROM, or other appropriate
format. Back-up of the working software may be

provided as an additional inclusion. Disk images are

unacceptable.
k. Any and all user definable software configurations and/or

programming shall become the sole property of the
employer. This includes all source code, source code
copyrights, and related documentation.
l. The compiler shall be property of the employer with all

m. Key schedule cross referencing all keys to their respective

functions.
n. Record spreadsheet of all Switch vertical and horizontal

connection schedules in pdf and latest version of Excel
(editable format).
5. Maintenance Data Manual

b. Table of Contents.

d. Listing of all equipment and materials with names of

manufacturers and model numbers or part numbers.
e. Catalog data sheets displaying manufacturer's names,

f. Product manufacturers' warranties and a typed system

g. Manufacturers' service manuals for all major equipment

items.
h. Test documentation showing results of source quality

testing, and equalization.
i. Provide a recommended preventative maintenance

inadequate information is provided by the manufacturer,
provide the information necessary for proper
maintenance.

6. Drawings

information. Include locations for all devices. Identify
cables by types, colors, and wire numbers.
b. Submit as-installed network block diagram and network

logical block diagram.
c. Submit as-installed Interface block diagram of the

network with all building systems.
d. Submit as-installed Power and cooling allocations for

each equipment rack / room.
e. Submit as-installed Earthing and Bonding connection

within each equipment rack / room.
f. Submit as-installed equipment rack layouts indicating the

arrangement of mounted network equipment including
cable management and patching in relationship to the
as-installed Structured Cabling System.
g. Submit electronic copies of any custom programming

including source codes.

B. Project drawings will be available to all parties involved in the work

be to industry standard scale; however all distances, clearances,
lengths, routes, and equipment placements shall be field verified
prior to execution or placement.

a. The contractor shall be certified by the manufacturer of

installation, programming and testing procedures, and
utilize the authorized manufacturer components and
distribution channels in provisioning this Project.

b. All members of the installation team shall be certified by

c. Contractor shall be a registered & certified partner of the

Contractor for the project.

Commercial Networks Installation, with at least seven (7)
year’s experience in the installation, programming,
testing, commissioning and certification of the Systems,
with a reference list of ten (10) completed projects of
similar size and scope including contact names and
telephone numbers to confirm successful completion of
projects.
e. The Contractor shall demonstrate QA/QC procedures

D. Equipment and materials supplied shall be a standard product of

manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture and
installation of information backbone technologies and shall be the
manufacturer's latest standard design. Items of the same
classification shall be identical. This requirement includes cable,
equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components.
Electrically powered equipment shall be UL approved. Electronic
equipment shall meet the requirements of EN55011.
E. All hardware, software, firmware, and/or operating system

requirements given are the minimum requirements.
F. Intent of Drawings:

placement.

and do not show all components, materials, and other specific
elements, which may be required for proper installation. It is
the responsibility of the Contractor for coordinating the final
equipment layout and pathway routing with the completed
drawings. If any departure from the Contract Drawings or the

specifications is deemed necessary on these bases or in the

event of conflicts among these bases, details of such
departures or conflicts and the bases shall be submitted in
writing.
G. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up as directed by the Consultant. Utilize

the same materials and installation methods in the mock-up as
intended for the final Work. Schedule the installation so that the
mock-up may be examined, and any necessary adjustments
serve as the standard for materials, workmanship, and appearance
for such Work throughout the project.
H. Maintain a full set of Shop Drawings at the Project site, indicating

installation.
I. Alternates and Substitutions:

exceed the level of quality, features and capabilities specified
will be considered for installation. The Employer’s Consultant
reserves the right to govern over and proclaim whether
proposed substitutions are equal to the specifications.




J. Subletting:
K. The Contractor shall coordinate with other system Contractor s, as


conflicts, or omissions prior to bid opening. Otherwise, correct these
at no additional cost to the Employer.
B. Continue to monitor the project site. If conditions develop requiring

a need to vary from the contract documents, notify the Consultant
immediately in writing. Otherwise, make recommendations, submit
proposed drawings showing how the Work may be installed, and
on approval, proceed with the necessary changes without

A. Protect equipment from damage during delivery, handling, storage
and installation.
B. Deliver and store materials in manufacturer’s original packaging

labeled to show name, brand, type, and grade. Store materials in
protected dry location off ground in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions. Do not open packaging nor remove
labels until time for installation.
C. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be

D. Main contractor shall provide a secured storage provision on site to
store the delivered materials by the IT contractor in coordination
with the Operator.
E. The Main contractor shall be responsible for receiving, storing and
F. The Main contractor shall provide all necessary material stock
management including storage access, material in-out logs
register.
G. The associated system specialist contractor shall verify the provided
storage is in accordance with manufacturer guidelines before

delivering the materials to the site. The system specialist will ensure
and dust.
H. The Main contractor shall also provide access and attendance
when required by specialist and installers.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide system warranties for a period specified in the Contract
Documents against faulty materials and defects in workmanship. In
addition, honor any manufacturer warranties that exceed this
period of time.
B. The Contractor shall provide the manufacturer’s warranty for all

equipment installed at no additional charge for a period of not less
one (1) year from a date of acceptance certificate. Provide
optional three (3) year warranty from a date of acceptance
certificate. The warranty shall allow for replacement or repair at the
discretion of the Employer and shall include all upgrades for
firmware and/or operating systems.
C. During the system warranty period, answer all service calls and
requests for information within 24 hours. Repair or replace faulty
materials and correct faulty workmanship within 24 hours of all
service calls.
D. Register warranty in the Employer's name for any product with a

manufacturer's warranty stipulated in the Contract Documents.
E. Keys: Submit in triplicate all keys required for access to and

operation of the systems.
F. Software License
1. Required software licenses shall be identified and supplied by
the Contractor. Licenses shall be "Site Licenses" which shall
cover all equipment installed now or in the future.
2. All software licenses and warranties shall be registered in the
name of the Employer. Required software licenses shall be
identified and supplied by the Contractor. Licenses shall be
"Site Licenses" which shall cover all equipment installed now or
in the future.
1.12 MAINTENANCE
A. Base: The Contractor shall provide maintenance and support of all
hardware and software associated with this system for the first year.
The maintenance services to be provided by the Contractor shall

include preventive, routine, support and emergency maintenance

services as defined herein:


maintenance and support for two (2) years following the warranty
period. The option pricing shall be given as a guaranteed
maximum annual cost. This service is to include parts, labor,
licenses, software upgrades, and all other contractor costs required
to keep the equipment operational. Pricing shall be provided for
the following two levels of support/response time:



each component. Preventative maintenance services shall include
inspection, test, necessary adjustment, lubrication, parts cleaning,
and software upgrades. Routine maintenance services shall include
scheduled overhauls as recommended by the equipment and
software manufacturer. The Contractor shall include an Employer
technician in maintenance activities during the warranty period to
provide on the job training for Employer personnel.
D. Emergency Failure: A system failure is considered an emergency if

any the key components are inoperative to the extent the system
cannot function in a normal manner. Emergency services shall
include inspections and necessary tests to determine the causes of
equipment or software malfunction or failure. The emergency
services shall include: the furnishing and installation of components,
parts or software changes required to replace malfunctioning
system elements. The Contractor shall specify a maximum amount
of time to get the system up and operational in the event of an
emergency failure. This time period shall be subject to Employer
approval.
E. Special Equipment: The Contractor shall supply a list of special


F. Support Personnel: Technicians performing installation and

certified on all hardware/software applications. These technicians
shall have the appropriate experience to perform such work, as
determined by the Project Engineer. Maintenance technicians
shall be provisioned to attend a one (1) week manufacturer
training class each year. Pre-assigned backup technicians shall be
available to replace onsite technicians who are on vacation, in
training or who are out sick.
G. Hardware Support: The Contractor shall supply hardware support

H. Response Escalation Plan: The Contractor shall submit a

recommended response escalation plan that defines the level of
severity of problem and the associated response time. The use of
this response plan and its details will be negotiated with the
Employer. Repairs are to be made as expeditiously as possible. If
parts are immediately unavailable, the fastest means of shipment
shall be used, including overnight-expedited shipping.
I. Maintenance Log: The Contractor shall maintain a bound

and any extended support period. The Log shall be in an Employer
approved format. The Log shall be available for inspection by the
Employer at any time during the year that it covers. The
Maintenance Log Book shall be turned over at the completion of
maintenance contract. The Log shall be kept on a component-by-
component (equipment number) basis, with separate sections or
volumes, as appropriate, for each component. The Log shall
itemize the history of preventative maintenance and
corrective/repair activities, stating the character, duration, cause,
cure of all malfunctions and the individual’s name that completed
the repair. The Log shall record all hardware updates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials and products, excepting Owner Furnished Equipment
(OFE), and materials, shall be appropriate for the intended use and
shall meet all applicable UL, EN, BS, ISO and IEC Regulations.
B. All system components shall be manufactured by ISO 9001:2000

certified companies and all packaging shall carry clear product
identification (catalogue number, quality control number, etc.)
C. All products shall be new, of the latest version at time of Installation,

and brought to the job site in original manufacturer's packaging.
Electrical components shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories
label. This listing requirement applies to the entire assembly. Only
systems and equipment that meet or exceed the level of quality
and capabilities stated within this document will be considered for
acceptance.
D. The contractor is to provide a written statement from all

manufacturers that all installed hardware and software are the
latest models at the time of handover.
E. All components will provide identification markings that meet the

requirements of standard ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-A.
F. Materials shall be listed and approved for the particular application

application.
G. All components are to be accepted by the Engineer and afford

2. Unobtrusiveness
3. Functionality
H. Used equipment or damaged material will be rejected.
I. General Equipment
1. Each active device shall be accessible from a network

console or auxiliary RS-232 port. A configuration specialist shall
be able to enter supervisory mode and change default

configurations as appropriate for required operation of special

system components.
2. All network equipment shall be compliant to physical and

operational parameters. The equipment shall be capable of
responding to SNMP, SNMP2 and/or RMON network
management program calls from the Network Management
System.
3. Network equipment shall provide multimedia and multicast

support through use of Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM),
and Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP).
4. All network equipment shall be Virtual Local Area Network

(VLAN) compatible based on both port and MAC addresses.
VLAN assignments shall be configurable from a centralized
administrative console.
5. Network equipment shall not require re-configuration of end-

station network interface cards or network interface card
drivers to accommodate intra-VLAN and inter-VLAN traffic.
6. Centralized VLAN creation, assignment, and administration

capabilities.
7. Network equipment shall support port mirroring. This shall be

done by sending frames directly from a specified port to
another switch port or from an external network analyzer.
8. Network equipment shall support a central access control

server for password administration used by all Networking
equipment.
9. All active LAN devices shall include all software as required for
interconnectivity. All active devices shall have fully functional
network management options installed.
10. All Networking equipment shall support a separate instance of

Spanning Tree for each VLAN or IEEE 802.1s Protocol “Multiple
Spanning Tree Groups”.
2.2 NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. The objective is to manage the Facilities and Electronic Security
System network entirely separate from Operator networks using
Network Management System, specifically for:
1. Lifecycle management of the entire network Infrastructure.
2. Single solution for wired.

3. Simple and cost effective solution for provisioning, monitoring

and troubleshooting.
4. Assurance (Voice, Video) management.
5. Integration with Security Services.
6. Compliance Management.
B. The System hierarchical architecture shall consist of a foundation

operating system and a Network Management base System built
on the Contractor ’s platform parameters.
C. The network management systems shall include network bandwidth

management with the following minimum features:
1. Centralized configuration from a single network location.
2. Flexible, prioritized, bidirectional rules to specify maximum data

rates.
3. Rules for IP addresses, protocols, ports (for TCP/IP) and network

interfaces.
4. Transparency for end users.
5. No software installation shall be required on client workstations.
6. Provides detailed and comprehensive statistics for each rule.
7. Quotas and penalties to discourage misuse.
D. In addition, the system shall have the following capabilities:
1. Shall have network node management programs laid on top

of this foundation. These nodes shall be made compatible to
support all nodes on the network.
2. Shall provide “Point and Click” functionality from a Windows

environment. The system shall operate under a UNIX (or
accepted equivalent) operating system capable of residing
on a RISC-based workstation platform.
3. Shall have the capacity to track node health through all

SNMP, SNMP2 and RMON compliant devices, interconnected
either locally or remotely and shall be capable of generating
SNMP to those devices, as applicable.
4. Must have direct data links to integral SNMP-compliant WAN

interfaces as applicable and shall have control of all network
address features.

5. Will provide a graphical representation of Layer-2 networks

both physically and logically.
6. Shall provide utilities to upgrade network component

operating systems store and restore network component
configurations, and capture System Log messages from
network components.
7. Shall provide SMS and Email alerts triggered from predefined

network events
2.3 CORE SWITCHES

A. The Core Switches shall be provided for the Electronic Security
System Network and Facilities Network.
B. Performance & Scalability
1. Core switch shall be able to provide 928Gbps of switching

performance.
2. Core switch shall be able to support 10/100/1000Mbps PoE &

non-PoE, 1GE SFP.
3. Core switch shall be modular and have a minimum 7 slots.
C. Fully redundant Core Switches shall be provided.
1. Electronic Security System Network.
2. Facilities Network.
D. Security:
1. The switch shall support IEEE 802.1x for AAA, Dynamic ARP
Inspection, IEEE 802.1AE link encryption, ACLs and VLAN ACLs.
2. Shall support various port level security features.
3. The platform shall support the ability to harden the

infrastructure by forcing switches to authenticate before they
come online in the network.
4. Platform shall support any feature that helps protect the

network against spoofed source IP traffic, any mechanism to
block or rate limit unknown unicast traffic that is flooded in a
VLAN, security measures to prevent man-in-the-middle or DoS
attacks that might take advantage of DHCP and a
mechanism to mitigate DoS attacks directed at the
management / supervisory module.

E. Monitoring:
1. Platform shall support a feature which would allow the system

to page or e-mail an engineer in the case of a system event.
The event threshold shall be configurable.
2. Platform shall have the ability to check the status of copper

cabling from the CLI.
3. Platform shall support Simple Network Management Protocol

(SNMP) v1, 2 & 3.
4. Platform shall support Remote Monitoring (RMON) as defined

by RFC 1757 and RFC 2021.
5. Platform shall support Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN) and

RSPAN.
6. The platform shall support a mechanism that allows the

network administrator to define views which are a set of
operational commands and configuration capabilities that
provide selective or partial access to CLI commands.
7. Platform shall have the ability to monitor or display user

sessions.
8. Platform shall support Layer 2 Trace-route.
9. The platform shall support the ability to send notifications, via

SNMP trap, of dynamic changes to the MAC table.
10. The platform shall support an auto-discovery protocol that can

see neighbors on the network.
11. The platform shall support IEEE 802.1ab Link Layer Detection
Protocol-Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED.
12. The platform shall support Network Time Protocol (NTP) as

defined by RFC 1305.
13. The platform shall support a mechanism that identifies the

connected device and dynamically provisions the port by
executing a set of commands as part of a macro.
14. The platform shall support netflow.
F. Multicast
1. The platform shall support IGMP Snooping.

2. The platform shall have the capability to rate limit RPF Failure
Traffic as part of its Multicast implementation.
3. The platform shall support any form of Multicast Suppression.
4. The platform shall support any form of Multicast HA.
5. The platform shall support Bidir-PIM.
G. Virtualization
1. The platform shall support the ability to combine two physical

switches into one virtual switch.
2. The platform shall support switch virtualization while supporting

all the same features as a standalone switch.
3. Shall support Network virtualization through VRF technology for

Layer 3 segmentation.
4. Shall support service virtualization capability shall allow the

switch to host applications other than the switch OS, such as
customer written applications, or third-party applications.
H. High availability
1. The platform shall support stateful switchover (SSO)

mechanisms between the management modules.
2. The platform shall support Non-Stop Forwarding (NSF) at Layer

3 to prevent packet loss during switchover between the
management modules.
3. Platform shall support the ability to upgrade/change the

software version in a hitless manner.
4. Platform shall support the stateful redundancy across chassis.
5. Platform shall provide layer 2 link redundancy mechanisms.
I. Power
1. AC input with hot swappable dual power supply.
2.4 SERVER SWITCHES

A. The Server switches shall be provided for the Electronic Security
System Network and Facilities network.
B. Fixed configuration, Enterprise Class switches, shall have 24 or 48

10/100/1000 ports and 4 SFP based Gigabit Ethernet ports.

C. Each switch shall be stackable support dedicated stacking

modules.
D. Stacking bandwidth shall be 160Gbps.
E. Performance:
1. 24 ports Switch: The switch shall have Forwarding Rate at least

of 65 MPPS and Switching Capacity not less than 88Gbps.

F. Power:
G. Virtualization:
1. The switch shall be working in Virtualized mode, where 9

switches can be virtualized, combined, and managed as one
application.
H. Layer 2 /3
1. The switches shall support full layer 3 functionality, if required.
I. Features
1. The switch shall be 1 RU.
2. AAA (Authentication, Authorization & Accounting) as

mandatory and Public Key Infrastructure (PKI) support as
optional.
3. SNMP v3 & SYSLOG; support IEEE 802.1x.
4. Shall support and include monitoring module, Hardware OAM,

Hardware CFD (connectivity Fault Detection), Dual Bootrom
boot up, One-key energy saving, EEE (Energy Efficient
Ethernet).
5. Shall support and include MPLS, VPLS, OSPF, Tunneling (IPv6 in

IPv6, IPv4 in IPv6, IPv4 in IPv4, GRE), minimum 32K MAC
addresses support, minimum 16K is ARP table size, VLAN
Mapping, MAC Based VLAN support, IEEE 802.1Q (GVRP)
support, Jumbo packet support, Selective QinQ and IEEE
802.1ad QinQ support.
6. Shall support IGMP Multicasting support, filtering, IPv6

switching, DiffServ QoS, Port Security, DHCP Snooping,

Dynamic ARP protection (DAP), IP Source guard, Isolated

VLANs , Rapid Ring Protection Protocol (RRPP), Dual flash
images, PIM-SSM, PIM-DM, and PIM-SM.
7. RIPng, OSPFv3, IS-ISv6, and BGP4+ for IPv6 support.
8. LLDP-MED (Media Endpoint Discovery), IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer

Discovery Protocol (LLDP) support.
9. Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding (URPF), Security VLAN ACLs,

Port-based ACLs, LACP Ethernet-channel port aggregation,
Bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) Protection, Spanning Tree
Root Guard, VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol).
10. Spanning Tree, IEEE 802.1s/w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

(RSTP) and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).
11. The switch shall support Stacking speed not less than 96Gbps
Full Duplex.
12. The switch shall be limited lifetime warranty from the

Manufacturer on the HW and SW.
2.5 EDGE/ACCESS SWITCHES

A. The edge switches shall be fixed configuration, Enterprise Class
switches.
1. All switches shall be POE based for the Electronic Security

System Network.
2. The type of switches for the Facilities Network shall be based

on the requirement of PoE and non-PoE ports, the type of
switches shall be followed as below.
3. Twenty Four (24) Ethernet RJ-45 PoE+ interfaces of 10/100/1000

speed, with dedicated 2 x 1GE SFP ports for uplink.
4. Forty Eight (48) Ethernet RJ-45 PoE+ interfaces of 10/100/1000

speed, with dedicated 2 x 1GE SFP port for uplink.
5. Twenty Four (24) Ethernet RJ-45 Non PoE + interfaces of

10/100/1000 speed, with dedicated 2 x 1GE SFP ports for uplink.
6. Forty Eight (48) Ethernet RJ-45 Non PoE + interfaces of

10/100/1000 speed, with dedicated 2 x 1GE SFP port for uplink.
7. Each switch shall be stackable support dedicated stacking

modules.
8. Stacking bandwidth shall be 480Gbps.

9. Shall consist of (48) 10/100/1000 ports and 2 SFP based 1

Gigabit Ethernet ports. 24 port Switches may be offered for
low density areas if it fully meets the technical requirements of
the Specification and as accepted by The Engineer.
10. All Electronic Security System switches shall be PoE based.

B. Performance


C. Power
1. AC input with hot swappable single power supply.
D. Virtualization

application.
E. Layer 2 /3
1. The switches shall support full Layer 2 functionality and static

IPv4 & IPv6 routes.
F. Features
1. The switch shall be 1 RU

optional.
3. The switch shall support IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol,

IEEE 802.1p, 802.1Q Trunking, 802.1s 802.1w, 802.1x, 802.1ab,
802.3ad.
4. The switch shall support RFC 768 - UDP
5. The switch shall support RFC 783 - TFTP
6. The switch shall support RFC 791 - IP
7. The switch shall support RFC 792 - ICMP
8. The switch shall support RFC 793 - TCP
9. The switch shall support RFC 826 - ARP
10. The switch shall support RFC 854 - Telnet
11. The switch shall support RFC 951 - Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)
12. The switch shall support RFC 959 - FTP

13. The switch shall support RFC 1112 - IP Multicast and IGMP
14. The switch shall support RFC 1157 - SNMP v1
15. The switch shall support RFC 1166 - IP Addresses
16. The switch shall support RFC 1256 - Internet Control Message
Protocol (ICMP) Router Discovery
17. The switch shall support RFC 1305 - NTP for accurate and
consistent timestamp
18. The switch shall support RFC 1492 - TACACS+
19. The switch shall support RFC 1493 - Bridge MIB
20. The switch shall support RFC 1542 - BOOTP extensions
21. The switch shall support RFC 1643 - Ethernet Interface MIB
22. The switch shall support RFC 1757 - RMON (history, statistics,
alarms, and events)
23. The switch shall support RFC 1901 - SNMP v2C
24. The switch shall support RFC 1902-1907 - SNMP v2
25. The switch shall support RFC 1981 - Maximum Transmission Unit
(MTU) Path Discovery IPv6
26. The switch shall support RFC 2068 - HTTP
27. The switch shall support RFC 2131 - DHCP
28. The switch shall support RFC 2138 - RADIUS
29. The switch shall support RFC 2233 - IF MIB v3
30. The switch shall support RFC 2373 - IPv6 Aggregate Address
31. The switch shall support RFC 2460 - IPv6
32. The switch shall support RFC 2461 - IPv6 Neighbor Discovery
33. The switch shall support RFC 2462 - IPv6 Auto configuration
34. The switch shall support RFC 2463 - ICMP IPv6
35. The switch shall support RFC 2474 - Differentiated Services

(DiffServ) Precedence
36. The switch shall support RFC 2597 - Assured Forwarding

37. The switch shall support RFC 2598 - Expedited Forwarding
38. The switch shall support RFC 2571 - SNMP Management
39. The switch shall support RFC 3046 - DHCP Relay Agent
Information Option
40. The switch shall support RFC 3376 - IGMP v3
41. The switch shall support RFC 3580 - 802.1X RADIUS
42. The switch shall support Per-port broadcast storm control to

prevent faulty end stations from degrading overall systems
performance.
43. The switch shall support Per-port multicast storm control to

performance.
44. The switch shall support Per-port unicast storm control to

performance.
45. The switch shall support Voice VLAN to simplify IP telephony

installations by keeping voice traffic on a separate VLAN.
46. The switch shall support Auto-negotiation on all ports to

automatically select half- or full-duplex transmission mode to
optimize bandwidth.
47. The switch shall support Automatic media-dependent

interface crossover (MDIX) to automatically adjusts transmit
and receive pairs if an incorrect cable type (crossover or
straight-through) is installed.
48. The switch shall support Unidirectional Link Detection Protocol

(UDLD) and Aggressive UDLD to allow for unidirectional links
caused by incorrect fiber-optic wiring or port faults to be
detected and disabled on fiber-optic interfaces.
49. The switch shall support IGMP v1, v2 & 3Snooping
50. The switch shall support MVR (Multicast VLAN Registration)
51. The switch shall support Inter-VLAN routing
52. The switch shall support IPv4 unicast Static Routing
53. The switch shall support IPv6 unicast Static Routing

54. The switch shall support Software image update and switch
configuration without user intervention.
55. The switch shall support automatic configuration of switch port

as devices connects.
56. The switch shall support diagnostic commands to debug issues
57. The switch shall support system health checks within the switch
58. The switch shall support run-time Diagnostics without any down
time.
59. The switch shall support real-time alerts and remediation

advice when an issue is detected.
60. The switch shall prevent booting any counterfeit images
61. The Switch shall support signed images
2.6 EDGE/CORE SWITCH FOR RETAIL [COMMON AREA]

A. The Contractor shall supply and install 2 no’s IT switches as specified
for the Retail Network. 1 switch will be used for the core and the
second shall used for the edge.
B. Architecture
1. Core Switch - Twenty Four (24) Port Ethernet RJ-45 PoE+

interfaces of 10/100/1000 speed, with dedicated 4 x 1GE SFP or
dedicated.
2. Edge Switch – Forty Eight (48) Port Ethernet RJ-45 PoE+

interfaces of 10/100/1000 speed, with dedicated 4 x 1GE SFP
or dedicated.
3. Each switch shall be stackable and support dedicated

stacking modules.
4. Stacking bandwidth shall be 160Gbps
C. Performance
1. The switch shall have Forwarding Rate at least of 65 MPPS and

Switching Capacity not less than 88Gbps.
D. Power
E. Virtualization


application.
F. Layer 2 /3
1. The switches shall support full layer 3 functionality, if required.
G. Features
1. The switch shall be 1 RU

optional
3. SNMP v3 & SYSLOG; support IEEE 802.1x
4. Shall support and include monitoring module, Hardware OAM,

Hardware CFD (connectivity Fault Detection), Dual Bootrom
boot up, One-key energy saving, EEE (Energy Efficient
Ethernet)
5. Shall support and include MPLS, VPLS, OSPF, Tunneling (IPv6 in

IPv6, IPv4 in IPv6, IPv4 in IPv4, GRE)
6. At least 32K MAC addresses support
7. At least 16K is ARP table size
8. VLAN Mapping and MAC Based VLAN support
9. IEEE 802.1Q (GVRP) support
10. Jumbo packet support
11. Selective QinQ and IEEE 802.1ad QinQ support
12. IGMP Multicasting support and filtering
13. IPv6 switching Support
14. DiffServ QoS support.
15. Port Security
16. DHCP Snooping
17. Dynamic ARP protection (DAP)
18. IP Source guard
19. Isolated VLANs

20. Rapid Ring Protection Protocol (RRPP) support
21. Dual flash images support
22. Shall support and include PIM-SSM, PIM-DM, and PIM-SM
23. RIPng, OSPFv3, IS-ISv6, and BGP4+ for IPv6 support
24. LLDP-MED (Media Endpoint Discovery), IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer

Discovery Protocol (LLDP) support
25. Unicast Reverse Path Forwarding (URPF)
26. Security VLAN ACLs
27. Port-based ACLs
28. LACP Ethernet-channel port aggregation
29. Bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) Protection
30. Spanning Tree Root Guard
31. VRRP (Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol) support
32. Spanning Tree, IEEE 802.1s/w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

(RSTP) and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).
33. The switch shall support Stacking speed not less than 96Gbps
Full Duplex
34. The switch shall be limited lifetime warranty from the

Manufacturer on the HW and SW
2.7 INTERNET ACCESS GATEWAY

A. Design, Supply, configuration, monitoring and support by FRHI.
2.8 FIREWALL AND INTRUSION PREVENTION SYSTEM

A. The Firewall and Intrusion prevention system for the Admin and
Guest Networks shall be supplied by FRHI.
B. Provide the Firewall and Intrusion prevention system appliances for

the Electronic Security system and Facilities networks.
C. The Security Firewall appliances must provide robust user and

application policy enforcement, multi-vector attack protection,
and secure connectivity services through security and networking
services
D. The Firewall service shall run on security-hardened platforms

E. Voice-Over-IP and Multimedia Security
F. Active/Active and Active/Standby Stateful Failover
G. Specifications
1. Stateful Inspection throughput (Maximum throughput with UDP

traffic measured under ideal test conditions) - 2 Gbps
2. Stateful Inspection throughput (Multiprotocol = Traffic profile

consisting primarily of TCP-based protocols or applications like
HTTP, SMTP, FTP, IMAPv4 and DNS) - 1 Gbps
3. Concurrent sessions - 500,000
4. Connections per second - 20,000
5. Packets per second (64 byte) - 700,000
6. 3DES/AES VPN throughput - 300 Mbps
7. Site-to-site and IPsec IKEv1 client VPN user sessions - 750
8. Any-Connect or clientless VPN user sessions - 750
9. Cloud Web Security users - 500
10. VLANs - 200
11. High-availability support - A/A and A/S
12. Integrated I/O - 8-port 10/100/1000
13. Expansion I/O 0 6-port 10/100/1000 or 6-port GE (SFP)
2.9 DMZ SWITCHES

2.10 GPON SYSTEM

B. Mounting brackets for the ONT Units shall be supplied by FRHI.
2.11 IP-PBX [HYBRID] TELEPHONE SYSTEM

A. Hybrid IP/Analog telephone switch with the latest “state-of-the-art”
PBX technology switch, hardware and software.
B. An enterprise communication system based on IP telephony

technology which shall support and satisfy current and future

operational requirements. This is necessary for the daily workings of

an organization. The system is expected to enable commercial
offices employees to effectively communicate and leverage
available information technology resources.
C. The Single server based IP PBX system with capability for

approximately 1500 lines includes 500 IP connection provision and
1000 Analog lines without changing and cascading multiplex PBXs
to achieve the future capacity. The IP exchange must have
capability to connecting number of trunk lines with redundancy.
D. The new system is expected to have a useful productive life of at

least 10 years, and must be designed and configured to support
the future growth and expansion requirements of the organization
in terms of both size and functional parameters. It is required that
the new system must also be able to accommodate future
technology enhancements that have the potential to increase
operational effectiveness and ease implementation of new
features, functions, and applications.
E. System should be designed with IP at the core, allowing fully

distributed IP solutions across data networks. The media gateway
architecture should allow traditional TDM or mixed IP-TDM
configurations.
F. System shall support Analog, IP and Digital stations sets and devices
including the facsimile machines and modems throughout the
facility.
G. The telephone system shall be organized around a general IP PBX

for the entire project comprising a redundant call server.
H. The Telephony System shall include a billing system, operator

console, calls audit printer, operator monitoring, voicemail and
network management for IP Telephony environments hardware
and software.
I. The PBX must be capable of receiving Automatic Number Identifier

(ANI) information from an external source, i.e. Local Telephone
Company and/or long distance carriers, etc. displaying the
information on digital and IP display telephones, and transmit the
information to an external computer.
J. Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature capability.
K. Complete interface to a Contractor or third-party provided call

accounting system.

L. Control of system administration for moves, adds and changes

using a PC software package provided by and Supported by
contractor. The console shall also permit the recording and
reporting of system statistics.
M. Capable of supporting a variety call route types including:

incoming, DID, Direct T-1, 2-way trunks within T1 circuits, ISDN PRI
connectivity.
N. Support shall be either by card difference, software changes or

both.
O. Able to support dynamically allocated incoming toll free calls on

both-way T1 circuits, routing the toll free calls to specific extensions
or ACD groups separate from incoming calls to other numbers.
P. Supports distant end completed call signaling (answer supervision)

over T1 and ISDN services and outputs CDR only when distant end
completed call signalling is received over those trunks.
Q. Supports answer supervision on local switched trunks and output

CDR only when such signalling is received over those trunks
provided the local central office provides that information to the
switch.
R. Supports both loop and ground start central office true.
S. Supports call by call allocation through the Integrated Services

Digital Network (ISDN) Primary Rate Interface (PRI) connection.
T. Network Management
1. General
a. IP- PBX System Network Management could be part of

the overall Converged Network solution of this section or
part of the IP- PBX System.
b. Provide a comprehensive network management solution

to address network and service-level monitoring;
diagnostics and troubleshooting; provisioning, change
management and statistics analysis and reporting.
2. Network Monitoring and Management
a. The network management software shall provide a

comprehensive view of the IP and TDM communications
solution and underlying transport infrastructure.

b. The network management software shall be an open

platform.
c. The management software shall have an easy-to-use,

web-based Graphical User Interface (GUI).
d. The management software shall use standard protocols

and interfaces (such as SNMP and HTTP) to gather
information from the network.
e. The network management software shall display and

continuously monitor the operational status of each
element in the IP communications network and
underlying transport infrastructure.
f. The management software shall display configuration

attribute information for individual IP endpoints.
g. The management software shall generate reports that

document move, add, and change operations on IP
endpoints in the network.
h. The management software shall generate real-time

notifications via SNMP traps, syslog notifications, and e-
mail to inform higher-level management applications
and/or operators of problems.
i. The management software shall provide visualization

using logical topologies and service views.
j. The management software shall provide current

information on endpoint outages.
3. Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
a. The management solution shall provide contextual

diagnostic tools for troubleshooting.
b. The management solution shall provide tests to simulate /

replicate end-user activity (such as making calls and
leaving voice mail).
c. The management solution shall support probable path

trace performance between two endpoints of a
monitored segment.
4. Provisioning and Change Management
a. The management solution shall support the creation and

management of gateway dial plans.

b. The management solution shall support the configuration

of voice ports on gateways.
c. The management solution shall support the configuration

of bandwidth control and call-admission parameters for
gatekeepers.
d. To enable more accurate operations, the management

solution shall provide the ability to view status changes
and manage moves, adds, and changes.
e. The management solution shall provide templating

features to enable scalable configuration and
provisioning of large numbers of gateways and
gatekeepers.
f. The management solution shall have the ability to

provision and activate services and users on the network.
g. The management solution shall support the notion of

domain-level delegation for management of services
and subscribers.
h. The management solution shall support templates to

facilitate the auto-configuration of the voice
infrastructure in a consistent manner.
i. The management solution shall support batch

provisioning capabilities.
j. The management solution shall support inventory tracking

capabilities.
k. The management solution shall support a rich set of

unified communications statistics analysis and reporting
capabilities.
5. Voice Quality
a. To achieve voice quality comparable to that offered on

circuit-switched voice networks, the IP network shall
support the ITU standard G.114.
6. Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
a. There shall be enough DSP resources to cover all the IP

endpoints.
b. The solution shall have sufficient DSP resources to enable

all users to make a call simultaneously.

7. Interfaces
a. General - The System shall provide an IP / 232 interface

between the PBX and the contractor or hotel supplied
call accounting equipment. If required for signal integrity,
Contractor shall provide any necessary limited distance
modems or line drivers should the distance between the
PBX RS232 port and the Call accounting PC Async port
exceed system specifications.
b. Data Interface Requirements:
1) For outgoing calls of less than 1 minute. CDR shall

provide call duration in seconds or tenths of a
minute.
2) For outgoing calls greater than 1 minute CDR shall

provide call duration in minutes and tenths of a
minute.
3) CDR output shall include all incoming voice and

data and outgoing voice and data call records.
4) CDR output shall include the date and time of call,

digits dialed, originating extension and outgoing
trunk for outbound calls and incoming trunk and
destination extension (if possible) for incoming calls.
5) CDR is also required on internal calls from the

Attendant Console to specific stations.
c. Property Management System (PMS) Interface - Property

Management System Interface must provide hospitality
features as outlined in the property management
interface section and contractor shall coordinate with
PMS vendor for interface activities
d. The PBX MUST readily interface to the Fidelio property

management system.
e. Contractor to install the remote line monitor [RAM] to verify

interface communication between the PBX, PMS and
CAS.
f. Video display Unit and input terminal is required in the

operator room to facilities input of guest name and use
all of the PMS functions available in PBX system.
g. The PBX system must be able to interface with following

1) Long distance carrier
2) Local phone service provider
3) Operator service provider
h. Voice Mail interface
1) Differentiate trunk calls including Direct Inward Dial

calls from a station to station call and a busy
condition from a don't answer condition and
differentiate internal (Station to Station) calls from
external calls (Trunk/external line to Station/internal
line) for incoming call coverage and routing
purposes.
2) Maintain the original station identity in a multiple call

forwarding situation (i.e. Extension 2000 calls forward
busy to 2001 which calls forward to the voice mail
system. The Voice Mail System receives station 2000
in the data stream).
3) If last message light activation was from Property

Management System or Operator, route the call to
the Operator. If the last message light activation was
from Voice Mail, route the call to Voice Mail.
4) The message light was activated from several

sources, maintain active message waiting light status
until receipt of message light cancellation
command from all sources which activated
message waiting lights.
5) When communication is received from the PMS to

activate a message waiting light, transmit
information to the Voice Mail System indicating the
presence of a text message. Send a disconnect
signal to the Voice Mail System immediately when a
user goes on hook after accessing the Voice Mail
System for messages.
6) A non-primary extension on an electronic multi-line

instrument must be able to route to a personal
greeting in the voice mail system
8. IP- PBX System requirements;
a. Account Codes: Allow for the input of either validated

(pre-programmed in PBX) or non-validated account

codes in order to place long distance calls. Codes shall

be a minimum of 4 and a maximum of 6 digits. This
feature must be enabled by a class of service separate
from all other classes of service. CDR must include the
account code in addition to the station number from
which the call was made (insert description of the -
locations in the CDR output where the account code
and station number will appear). This feature must be
separately programmable by guest and administration
extensions.
b. Alarm Condition- major and minor. A visual or numerical

display to identify the type of alarm
c. Alternate Answer Position: In addition to the attendant

console, it shall be possible for any station to answer
incoming calls. Area/Office Code Restriction: The system
has the capability for either single digit, multiple digit or
area code/country code toll restriction, depending
completion of calls. Attendant Camp-On Attendant Trunk
Group Busy Lamps
d. Authorization Codes: The PBX must be capable of

accepting a random authorization code for use in
controlling toll calls. The authorization code must be
related to a specific station number for the code to be
valid. A station user may dial the assigned code, which
will override any toll restriction or facilities restriction which
is associated with a particular instrument.
e. The SMDR will report the call from the station as if it

originated from the user's assigned station. SMDR must
include the authorization code (insert a description of
where in the SMDR output the assigned station number
and authorization code will appear).
f. Automatic Call back - No Answer: An internal call

reaching an unanswered station shall have the ability to
activate a Call back code: When the unanswered station
is placed off-hook and then on-hook the system shall then
attempt to connect the original party. If a connection is
not achieved in a system programmed number of
minutes the call is cancelled. Automatic Route Selection:
see least cost routing below.
g. Automatic Station Release: Provides automatic release of

stations where handsets are left off-hook for a pre-
determined length of time

h. Automatic Wake up: The switch must be capable of

providing the automatic wake up features. The recorded
wake up announcement must start at the beginning of
the announcement on each wake up call Without
Inserting music or other interim pauses containing silence
or information. Must be programmable by guest.
i. CDR Messages will be transmitted to the call accounting

system through IP Link.
j. Call pickup group: The PBX must support a minimum of

thirty (30) digita1/analog stations in a pick group.
k. Call Waiting: Standard feature set individually by

extension. All incoming calls (DID, BIT or Internal) that are
extended to a station with call waiting tone must be able
to route to the desired station's voice mail box number
after a user defined number of seconds of ringing if the
forward ring no answer is programmed as voice mail
l. All incoming calls (DID, BIT or Internal) that are extended

to a station that is busy with a call waiting will route to
that station's voice mail if the forward busy is
programmed as voice mail
a. When the voice mail is inoperable calls should return to

the operator consoles after a pre-determined number of
rings (in seconds). The PBX must be able to generate call
waiting tone to guest and an administrative analog
stations on DID calls
b. Calling Name ID: The multi-line station display provides a

visual display of the called party name when connected
to a station.
c. Calling Number Display: The multi-line station users shall

be presented with the number and name (if available) of
the calling party's station before answering.
d. Called Party Status: The multi-line station display provides

a visual indication of the called party status (i.e. Busy,
forwarded)
e. Class of Service: Specify number of classes available.
1) The console shall be able to change a station's class

of service.

2) These classes of service shall include but not be

limited to:
3) Out of service
4) Ring down to operator
5) Ring down extension to extension
6) Intercom line
7) Internal extensions only
8) Local calls on
9) Local calls and domestic long distance only
10) Executive
11) Unrestricted
f. Conference calls: Provide the capability for six (6) party

conference calls and the ability to drop one (1) or more
of the parties during the conference call, and add one
(1) or more parties during the same conference call.
Data privacy: The PBX must be able to support data
privacy which is the ability to enter a code to deny call
waiting, camp-on, etc. tone origination to that station.
g. Dial Access to System Features: Allows all station users

with appropriate class of service to access features by
use of code numbers. A distinctive dial tone shall indicate
to users that the features have been accessed.
h. Do Not Disturb: The guest should be able to activate the

DO NOT DISTURB from his/her phone. Incoming calls
should hunt to the operator.
i. Flexible Station Numbering Plans: The system is capable of

using station number assignments in a flexible manner, i.e.
Guest room/telephone number correlation.
j. Hands free answer: for designated stations.
k. Intercept Treatment: There are two features: Any calls

attempted to a destination (e.g. Long distance, guest
rooms) not permitted by the class of service shall be
intercepted by an operator for handling DID calls to non-
working terminal numbers shall be routed to an intercept
recording. A maximum of three outside callers shall be
capable of receiving the intercept recording

simultaneously. Calls reaching the intercept recording

shall not receive answer supervision.
l. Last number redial: Memory within the PBX shall permit

the user upon entry of a code to activate a speed calling
treatment of the last number dialled from that station.
m. Message Waiting Notification: The PBX must support

message waiting notification by activating message
waiting lights on telephone instruments, activating stutter
tone, and activating Intermittent ring.
n. Miscellaneous trunk restriction: Preselected (by class of

service) station lines are denied access to preselected
trunk groups. Call attempts to such restricted trunk groups
shall be routed for intercept treatment.
o. Music on Hold: System will be equipped with an audio

input port for music to callers who have been put on hold
or in a camped-on position either by the operator or
station user. This feature shall be configurable by station
or by class of service. For example callers put on hold to
reservations will get music. Callers to other departments
will not.
p. Power Failure Restart: After a power failure, system

automatically restarts. No station database information,
including extension numbers, classes of service, system
speed call numbers, etc. is lost.
q. Power Failure Transfer: If batteries become spent, this

feature provides automatic ringing of and direct access
to a predesignated number 0 Central Office lines at a
predetermined number of single line phones on a one-to-
one basis during the failure. At least twenty-eight lines will
be so transferred during a complete failure Private Line
Termination: It shall be possible to terminate a Central
Office line on a specific instrument or instruments. Such
line need not be terminated on all instruments.
r. Recorded Announcement Service.
s. Remote Maintenance Access: Please describe the

requirements and capabilities of this facility. Contractor is
to provide all necessary hardware, including modems,
cabling and so is to implement.
t. Room Status Input: Via guestroom telephones, hotel

service personnel (maids, etc.) must be able to input a

variety of "room status" codes through the offered PBX to

the independent party management system.
u. Room to room dialing: Provide room to room dialing

which will simultaneously provide either 4 or 5 digit dialing.
v. Service Call Routing Simultaneous Voice and Data

transmission: The system shall be capable of supporting
both voice and data transmission on the same port.
w. Single Digit Dialing: Afford the ability for guests to dial

hotel services with single digits without seriously limiting
the numbering plan of the hotel.
x. Speed Calling: Both system wide and user specific speed

dial list capability (identify size of each speed call list).
y. Station Hunting: Consecutive and Non-consecutive. If all

lines on a call busy hunt sequence are busy the PBX must
be able to route the call to a personal or departmental
greeting.
z. Time of Day Restrictions: All stations have the ability to be

programmed for time of day restrictions via class of
service independently of any other station. The property is
aware of the danger of toll fraud and requires contractor
to fully describe the capability of the PBX to restrict 900
calls, electronic call completion, collect calls and bill to
room.
aa. Auto Echo Cancellation, Automated Endpoint Installation

Configuration , Event Logging and Reports , Event Viewer
Interface , External SMDI Interface , Last Number Redial,
License Management, Multiple Calls Per Line
Appearance, Multiple Line Appearances, Performance
Monitor Interface, Redundant CPUs, Remote Process
Control . Ringer Pitch Adjust, Ringer Volume Adjust ,
Shared Extensions on Multiple Endpoints, System Events on
Windows NT Event Viewer and Tone On Hold.
9. Automatic call distribution ACD :
a. In the base configuration requirement the queue system

must provide automatic call distribution (ACD) able of
serving a minimum of three (3) departments:
Reservations, Room Service, etc. for queuing of incoming
calls.

b. If site requests more call queuing options an advanced

PC based system may be required to be sourced and
engineered by contactor.
c. The ACD must accept the trunk and tie call.
d. System shall provide outgoing call forwarding and call

diversion during hours when reservation department
closed. Description as following:
1) ACD display features - Logged-on agents see on

their display telephones, the number of calls queued
and trunk text. Each time an agent answers a call
changes in the call queue are reflected on the
display.
2) Agent Activation: An agent joins a group through

use of Logon key and (optionally) an agent ID code.
If ID codes are used performance can be tracked
by agent. Agent ID codes are assigned from the
ACD Supervisor console. An ID can be used by only
one agent. Logoff removes the agent from the
group. Indicate the maximum number of agent IDs.
Agent Outbound Calling: ability to restrict agent to
intra system calls, local calls or limited long distance.
3) Automatic Number Identification: Display the

Automatic Number Identifier (ANI) on agent and
supervisor telephones if the ANI is sent to the PBX
4) Call Activity Display: Display real-time and, at a

minimum display:
a) The number of calls waiting,
b) The number of calls abandoned within the last

fifteen (15) minutes,
c) The total number of incoming calls within the

last fifteen (15) minutes,
d) Non-active agents by agent
e) Average talk time per call by agent.
5) Call Direction: Ability to direct calls to certain agents,

and prioritize calls to specific numbers to specific
agents, i.e. more experienced agents ret more calls,
automatically direct a specific DID cal to a specific
agent.

6) Call overflow: Overflow calls between agent and

operator consoles, showing the name of the ACD
group on display telephones and operator consoles.
7) Disconnect: When the agent finishes a call a

specified key is pressed to disconnect. Position is
then ready to accept another call.
8) Forced Answer: Calls are connected automatically.

The telephone will not ring, and agent does not
have to press any key to answer. A tone will be
provided to alert the agent when a call is presented.
9) Group Size: Must be able to support a minimum

often (10) agents in each ACD group.
10) Help: By pressing a designated key at any time an

agent can reach supervisor for assistance. This
places all on hold and automatically dials supervisor.
11) Manual Answer: Phone rings and agent presses a

specified key to answer.
12) Priority Answer for Trunks: Important calls and/or calls

over expensive routes are presented before non-
priority calls in queue.
13) Record: When pressed this key activates a recording

machine.
14) Recorded Announcements: Must be able to direct a

different sound source and/or at least three
(3)different announcements to each ACD group
simultaneously.
15) Reports: For each ACD agent
a) Whether placed in a queue or not, show the

number of calls directed to group,
b) The number of calls abandoned by quarter-

hour,
c) Average speed of answer.
d) Average wait time before answer,
e) Average talk time per call by group and agent,
f) Average post call processing (Wrap up) by

group and agent,

g) Average cal s handled in quarter-hour

segments by individual agents,
h) Total number of calls processed by group and

by individual agents,
i) Total incoming calls and CCS by

trunk/extension by hour
j) Number of calls answered within x period of

time (e.g. Twenty (20) seconds).
e. ACD reports can be programmed to print automatically

on the quarter (1/4) hour, the half (1/2) hour, or on the
hour during each day. Reports shall also be available on
demand and at any time as elected by the Property.
f. Reports from all ACD groups must be able to be

configured to print on a single printer. A print report to file
application will be reviewed if available
1) Transfer - Agent to agent: within queue to an agent

in a busy condition.
2) Transfer - Agent to Supervisor and Agent to Property
3) Administration Phones: being completed in five (5)

keystrokes (including a 3, 4 or 5 digit station number)
or less.
4) Transfer - Outside Line: ability to transfer a call to an

outside line. If available, this must be restricted on a
set by set basis.
5) Unavailable: Pressing a -designated key will prevent

additional ACD calls from being presented to
position.
6) Announcements: There should be four types:
a) Greeting: notifies caller that call has been

recognized but cannot be answered
immediately. The call is placed in a queue.
b) Night: callers reach an ACD when all agents

logged off. After callers hear the
announcement the call is disconnected.
c) Delay: encourages callers to continue holding

until call can be serviced. A call is taken from

the call queue to hear the delay message and

then returned to its original place in queue.
d) Overflow: in lieu of or in combination with an

overflow answering (station or another ACD
group) calls are routed to an overflow point
when the queue exceeds maximum number of
calls. Each group can have its own
announcements or groups can share.
Announcement lengths can vary for groups,
but all announcements within a group must be
the same length. Permissible ranges are 0-255
seconds.
7) All announcements are broadcast, allowing many

callers to get the same announcement
simultaneously which requires only a single
announcement source per announcement.
8) Automatic Answer: The system automatically

answers incoming calls with an announcement if all
agents are busy.
9) Call Queue: When all agents are busy additional

incoming calls are answered with the greeting
announcement and placed in a queue in order of
arrival. While in queue, calls can be provided with
10) Music-on-Hold. Calls are processed using FIFO. When

the number of calls in a queue exceeds the
maximum, calls can be routed to other answering
positions for handling.
11) Call Queue Full: If the queue contains the maximum

number of calls allowed, the call will not receive the
greeting announcement but is routed directly to the
overflow point
g. Supervisor Features :
h. Break in: Pressing a designated key while listening to a

busy tone or while monitoring an agent/customer
conversation sounds the break in tone and a three-way
conversation is established.
i. Observe: key allowing supervisor to listen in on call

without notification
10. Simple Analog

a. The solution shall support 10/100 Ethernet ports and

analog ports for connection to either exchange or
subscriber lines.
11. Simple Digital
a. The solution shall support a single 10/100 Ethernet port

and up to 30B channels for connection to a digital
interface. This shall be configurable to either subscriber or
trunk lines.
12. Bulk Digital
a. The solution shall support a single 10/100 Ethernet port

and support for multiple E1 services using Q.931.
13. Emergency Calling
a. The system shall support the sending of emergency calls

to the appropriate public safety answering point (PSAP)
for the caller's location and support the ability of the PSAP
to identify the caller's location.
14. Paging
a. The system shall allow voice paging to individual

endpoint or group of endpoints from any endpoint
location. The system architecture shall allow creation of
zones, groups including priority paging from simple
interface.
b. The system shall have password protection for user

access management.
15. Call Detail Output
a. The system shall store call detail records (CDR) in an open

standard format.
16. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Support
a. The proposed communication system shall support RFC

3261.
17. Voice Mail
a. The operating system for the messaging solution shall be

a recognized, industry-standard operating system.
b. The operating systems for your messaging products shall

be capable of being centrally maintained via standard

administrative processes, such as management

programs, scripts, or automated update services.
c. Security
1) The solution shall provide secured / restricted access

for users of the system telephony user interface (TUI)
and GUI / web interface.
2) The solution shall provide a secure web server /

service.
3) The solution shall provide mechanisms to detect

hacker access and to lock accounts.
4) The solution shall allow you to define the number of

characters / digits for passwords, password history,
and how often passwords must be changed.
5) The solution shall provide an integrated security

agent that can be controlled by a centralized
system.
6) The solution shall allow password and account

policy management.
7) The solution shall provide over-the-wire security using

an industry standard protocol between the
messaging system, the call-control system, and the
IP-based endpoints.
d. Features:
1) The solution shall support mailbox configuration.
2) The solution shall give users the option to allow

themselves to be listed in the public directory.
3) The solution shall provide the ability to select which

information is included when listening to messages-
for example sender's name, message number, and
timestamp before or after message.
4) The solution shall provide the ability to record name

and greetings via the end-point or microphone on a
multimedia PC or laptop.
5) The solution shall provide the ability to set the

playback device to end-point, PC or laptop
speakers.

6) The solution shall provide the option to put callers on

hold if busy.
7) The solution shall provide the ability to set and

change passwords.
8) The solution shall allow customization of notification

methods.
9) The solution shall support the controlled replay of

messages including the following:
a) Pause
b) Rewind
c) Fast Forward
d) Move to Next message
U. Voice Messaging Specification [Voice mail use]
1. Guest use :
a. On a ring no-answer to line in the guest room, the call

forwards to voice mail where the caller may leave a
message or press zero "0" to return to the operator.
Pressing zero "0" shall function at any point during the time
the caller is in voice mail (i.e. including during the
message recording period). On a busy condition the call
will forward to voice mail.
b. Upon checkout, any remaining unread voice messages

will go to a general mailbox tagged by the checkout
date, room number and guest name (or some variation)
which will allow the Telephone Switch operator to retrieve
these for the guest after checkout. The messages will
remain on the system until a system-wide predetermined
purge date which will in any case be at least 24 hours
after checkout. Read messages will be deleted from the
mailbox at checkout when the mailbox is cleared.
c. Passwords are only necessary for access to voice mail

when the guest is not in the room. There should be a
simple default password for guest rooms (e.g. In North
America, the first x letters of the guest name) and will only
be necessary on calls placed from outside the guest
room. The system will put the guest directly into the
mailbox without identification if done from that guest's
room phone.

2. Administration use:
a. External callers for administration positions may or may

not go directly to voice mail at the discretion of the hotel
management. Some departments such as Sales may
request voice mail not be used during business hours
unless requested by caller.
b. Internal callers will have unanswered calls to anyone

either go to voice mail directly or the caller will dial a
voice mail access number and enter voice mail directly.
c. Operators must be able to fast transfer a caller into a staff

member's mailbox if a call to that extension returns to the
operator console.
d. Visual and/or stutter dial tone (or similar audio capability)

notice to user of messages waiting.
e. Allow messages to be deleted, saved, or re-routed to

another mail user with or without comments (re-routing
admin only).
f. Rapid scan through messages without taking action on

them. Messages stay as unheard in this fashion.
g. The voice mail system shall be capable of providing voice

mail boxes for all guest rooms and approximately 200
administrative extensions.
h. Maintain original station identity in multiple call forward

situations. Station 1111 is called but forwarded to 2222.
2222 is forwarded to voice mail. The message should be
left in 1111's mailbox not 2222’s.
i. Callers must be able to reach a covering extension

(which may be different depending upon the called
extension), after pressing zero “0” at all times. For
example a call to the controller's voice mail would go to
the controller's secretary upon pressing zero “O” but a
call to the general manager's voice mail would go to the
general manager's secretary. If there is no specific
covering extension, the call should go to the operator.
j. Callers should also be able to dial another extension at

any time. Pressing zero “0” or an extension during the
message record process will terminate the recording and
send the message to the recipient. The caller then goes
to the designated destination. Callers should also be able

to leave multiple messages for different mailboxes

without hanging up and redialing.
k. The voice mail system must be capable of servicing both

analog and digital ports.
l. The system must be designed from a power and cooling

standpoint to function 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
m. Voice Mail database backups should be automated to

run nightly.
n. System administration functions must be available

remotely via dial up as well as through a standard system
administration console.
o. The administrator must be able to clear all messages and

security codes from a series of mailboxes via a single
command.
p. The system must be capable of providing automated

attendant functions for Administrative departments
including the following features:
q. The software must have at least a 2 level menuing system

with at least 30 seconds of announcement time per
selection. Total recording time must be at least 10
minutes.
r. Recordings and menus must be able to change by time

of day, day of week, or special circumstances such as
holidays.
s. Numeric prompts are required. Alpha prompts are

desirable in North America.
t. Provide dual language greetings for specific mailboxes.
u. Read messages on administrative mailboxes will be

deleted a configurable number of days after receipt.
Unread administrative messages will remain on file until
read.
v. Each mailbox must be configurable to either play or not

play prompts (basic or advanced users).
w. The system must support the creation of distribution lists for

both guest and administration stations to allow the input
of one message to reach a list of stations. Stations must
be able to be included on multiple lists.

x. The originator must get confirmation of receipt of all

messages by all list members. Administration personnel
must be able to create distribution lists for guest
extensions.
y. If the Telephone Switch - voice mail interface fails the

Telephone Switch must be notified of the failure to
reroute calls to voice mail to an operator or other station
number. Under no circumstances shall a call to voice mail
be allowed to ring no-answer.
z. The system must support universal access to all ports,

whether being accessed from a guest or administrative
extension.
aa. The system must support at least 3 security levels, with the
functions available to each configurable by the hotel.
bb. The system shall be capable of requiring a password only

when messages are retrieved remotely.
cc. The system must include an easy to use setup menu to

verbally guide user through the use of the system. This
guide should be configurable by station and each user
should be able to turn this guide on or off themselves.
3. Administrative Features:
a. Useable by the hotel administration in the same fashion

as the guest system with the added features common to
administrative voice mail systems. The two groups can be
configured differently and the system will operate for
each group independently according to those
parameters.
b. Allow for expanded prompts on message retrieval

beyond the basic ones standard for guest message
retrieval.
c. Standard (system supplied) or customized (user supplied)

greeting.
d. Dual personal greetings depending upon

internal/external source of call.
e. Ability to call forward to voice mail.
f. Internal/external call routing. i.e. External calls reaching

an extension with voice mail can route to a different
extension from internal calls reaching the same extension.

g. Custom operator revert: Can transfer out of a called

party's mailbox to any extension or to a personal
assistance position by dialling "Q" - not necessarily
operator console. Each mailbox owner can have calls go
to a different department secretary. Calls do not go to
just one position, i.e. the Telephone Switch console.
h. If personal assistance position does not answer, caller can

leave message for original party in mailbox.
i. Control routing of transfers to personal assistance position

by time of day/day of week.
j. Call back sender of message with one keystroke while

listening to messages and return at completion of call to
where person left off.
k. On a busy condition, allow the caller to wait, call another

extension, call the operator, or leave a voice message.
l. Reply to sender of messages.
m. Global and personal distribution lists.
n. Compose and route messages to individual mailboxes or

distribution lists. Direct dial mailbox without dialling
extension.
o. System can dial a pager and if a digital pager can send

the number to be called.
p. System can dial external number restricted by user to

local, specific area codes or anywhere, when a message
has been received to notify person getting message.
q. Time and/or number of messages configurable by user.
r. User classification levels based on features available to

user and/or group in which user is put: novice user,
experienced user (more features available), system
administrator, technician; department grouping.
Standard classifications with system to use as models to
build user base. Can be customized later as required.
s. Spell out name of mailbox user if extension or mailbox not

known (automated attendant).
t. Schedule message for future delivery.

u. Mark messages private (Cannot be passed onto another

user).
v. Mark messages registered (notifies sender of receiver

reading message).
w. Mark messages urgent (will play first)
x. Optional automated attendant capability by extension

with menus customizable by user.
y. Caller can re-record message or part of message.
4. Guest Voice Mail Features
a. Property Management system interface requirements:
1) Voice mail provider .will coordinate all matters

related to the interface installation.
2) Voice mail provider will include all software and

hardware required to interface to the property
management system, including any required
cabling and terminations between the systems (If a
new installation to an existing switch; else Telephone
Switch supplier will provide cabling). .
3) The interface must accomplish the following:
a) At check in, automatically assign a mailbox.
b) Automatically move all messages from one mail

box to another when a guest moves rooms.
c) At check in, automatically select a foreign

language greeting for a specific mailbox, if that
language has been installed. Else select default
language.
d) At check in, receive a group code from the

property- management system for specific
rooms/mail box numbers and automatically
create a distribution list on the group code
number.
e) Accept messages from the PMS informing the

voice mail that there are text messages in the
PMS.
f) Create a message for the guest that states this

when they retrieve their messages, i.e. "You

have a text message and 'x' number of voice

mail messages. Contact the concierge for text
messages".
g) Upon storing a received voice message sent a

message to the PMS informing it that there is a
voice message for the guest room.
h) When a guest has listened to all messages send

a message to the PMS informing it that there
are no more voice messages.
i) At checkout, notify the PMS that there are

unplayed messages prior to archiving them. At
the end of the day any unplayed messages are
archived for a minimum of 1 full day after the
day the guest departs. The means of accessing
archived messages must be straightforward
and easy to do from the operator console, for
example, add a leading digit on the room
mailbox or access by checkout date and room
number.
j) Automatically clear guest mailbox messages at

checkout or archive for later retrieval at hotel
option.
k) Perform a data swap with the PMS upon start-

up of the interface or as required, to ensure the
message information is correct between the
two systems.
4) Read guest messages must be saved automatically

unless deleted by the user. Read messages will be
deleted at checkout. Unread messages go to an
archive mailbox for a system configurable number of
days. (See 1. c. viii)
5) Be able to receive incoming messages from calls

due to:
a) Busy condition on the associated Telephone

Switch line.
b) No-answer condition on the associated

Telephone Switch line a direct transfer from the
operator console.

c) Provide caller with a simple greeting, and

prompt caller on the method of leaving a
message.
6) Provide a simple procedure for the caller to return to

a live operator at any time during the process of
leaving a voice message.
7) Be able to light the message waiting lamp on the

guest room-phone. Voice mail system must be able
to control message waiting lamp as follows:
a) Upon receipt of a voice message; send request

to Telephone Switch to turn message lamp on
in room. If voice mail system knows that
outstanding text messages exist (due to
notification from PMS), the voice mail system
may intentionally not send this request.
b) Upon receipt of text message notification from

PMS send request to Telephone Switch to turn
on message lamp in room. If unlistened to voice
messages already exist, voice mail system may
optionally not send this request.
c) When guest has listened to all voice messages

and if there are no text messages outstanding,
send request to Telephone Switch to turn
message lamp off.
d) Upon receipt of notification from PMS indicating

that all text messages have been received,
and if there are. unlistened to voice messages,
send message to Telephone Switch to turn
message lamp off.
e) Be able to add an optional password if the

guest desires. Suggested default is first 4 letters
of last name.
f) Single button message retrieval by guest in

room with no need to enter password.
g) Unread messages begin to play automatically.
h) Provide access from the attendant console for

the retrieval of guest messages should the guest
be calling from a telephone other than the

guest room phone. Password required for such

external access to voice mail.
i) Provide the ability to provide the same

message to multiple mailboxes (group
messaging) based on some identifiable criteria
such as a distribution list, group code, or other
key provided by the PMS.
j) Provide mailboxes for pre-check in and post

check out use by the operator.
k) Messages left prior to check in automatically

move to guest room when guest arrives.
l) Personal greeting available if guests shown how

to use it, but not required.
m) System should allow multiple mailboxes per

room based on different guests in the room.
n) Multi-lingual prompts available based on

language code entered for guest or passed to
system" by PMS interface. There should be a
minimum off five languages (Japanese,
German, French, Spanish and English).
o) Customized general greeting when guest first

logs into voice mail to give introduction to
system. Does not play on subsequent log-ins on
same stay. Guest can override on subsequent
visits to hotel with single keystroke.
p) On a re-check-in messages from checked out

mailbox automatically reinstated to new room
(this does not include deleted read messages).
q) If a guest changes rooms, the voice mail system

will move the messages for that guest to the
new room mailbox automatically upon a room
move message from the PMS system.
r) If there were any unread messages the

message waiting light in the new room is
automatically turned on. The message waiting
light in the old room is turned off.
s) Optional: Convention services capabilities, i.e.

ability to have guest mailboxes set up for

convention delegates who are not staying in

the hotel but for whom we want to provide this
service at some fee.
t) Describe how your system can be configured

to handle this capability
V. Configuration
1. Describe proposed system including make, model number

and software release proposed. State Telephone Switch
software release and Property Management software release
required for interface to function according to requirements.
Proposed system must include all components to operate
according to required specifications, including interfaces to
Telephone Switch and Property Management System.
2. If System is PC based, indicate make, model number and

release of operating system of the PC server required for
system.
3. Describe expansion capabilities. What are the available

increments of storage and Telephone Switch ports?
4. Time needed and requirements to back up mailboxes off-line

without disturbing system function, or, if system must be shut
down, time out of service to perform function and from what
location must backup be instituted (i.e. terminal in Telephone
Switch room Operator's room or VMS console).
5. Describe Power fail backup requirements.
6. What happens when mailbox fills up either with number of

messages or total length? What warnings are provided when
the system fills up?
7. What interfaces exist to what Property Management Systems

and exactly how do they work? Attach any documentation
describing how the interfaces function, including what versions
of Property Management Software work with the voice mail
system.
W. Hospitality System Interfaces and Features
a. Latest features shall be available
b. Provide Interface with the Hotel Property Management

System (PMS) to accomplish the following:

1) Upon guest check in, receive and store the following

information received from the property
management system: Name, a minimum of twenty-
five (25) characters. Special status, i.e. VIP, minimum
of four (4) characters, Special code to indicate
foreign language/s, up to four (4) characters. Room
Number, up to five (5) digits.
2) Upon receipt of the room number assignment,

change the station Class of Service in the assigned
room.
3) Provide a six (6) member group of dial codes to be

used to communicate Room Status information to
the PMS.
4) Receive from the PMS the communication to

activate/deactivate a message waiting lamp on a
guest room telephone.
5) Upon receipt of checkout notice from the PMS, -

change the station Class of Service in the
appropriate room.
6) When communication is received from the PMS to

activate a message waiting light send
communication to the VMS indicating the presence
of a text message.
7) The must provide all equipment and software

required to interface to a PMS.
8) Whether or not there is a working interface between

the PBX being proposed and the PMS operating at
the property at the time of PBX cut over.
9) Multi-Language Support to include Arabic, English

French, German, Spanish, Russian and Japanese.
10) During check-in, the Guest language is set by the

Property Management System. Default language is
selectable and is either the Arabic language or
English.
11) During check-in, a default password is allocated

and this can be changed by the guest.

12) When the guest wants to retrieve messages from

outside, the system requires the room number and
the password to be entered.
13) The guests can access their messages directly

without entering a mailbox or password from their
room.
14) Staff can leave a message to all the guests or to a

single guest without calling the room.
15) Upon accessing the mailbox, the guest can read, re-
read, delete the message. Messages are day and
time stamped so the guest can also listen to the time
the message is left.
16) Whenever a new message is left or read, the

information is sent to PMS. So, during check-out the
guest can be notified for the unread messages.
17) If someone leaves a message at the front desk for

the guest, as soon as it is saved in PMS, a standard
voice mail is left saying “You have a message at the
front desk”.
18) Whenever a new message is left or read, Message

Waiting Indicator (MWI) is turned on and off.
19) The number of messages remaining/read/deleted

for all guests can be viewed at a glance.
20) Option to leave a greeting message after check-in.
21) Deleted messages can be restored.
c. Wake-Up System
1) Single or Group Wake-Up Calls
2) Attendant programmed wake-up calls (From PMS)
3) Guest programmed wake-up calls (via phone

screen or IVR).
4) Multiple reminder calls for the same day.
5) Automatic repeated calls
6) Snooze function

7) Operator gets notified if “No Answer” after 3

attempts
8) All registered wake-up requests follow the guest in

case of room change
9) Tracking the completion of calls and unique

handling of failed wake-up calls
d. Staff Services
1) Different passwords for mini-bar and room status

change.
2) Integration with hotel POS for posting of minibar

charges
3) Integration with hotel PMS for changing room status

from the phone
4) Room status in PMS is updated from the IP Phone

screen
5) Unlimited number of Room Status can be defined
6) Voice instructions to guide user
7) Available to Housekeeping staff in any of the

supported languages
e. The following Guest Services shall be available on the IP

phone set:
1) Local City Guide (optional with Map)
2) Hotel Facilities
3) Weather information
4) Airline/Flight information
5) RSS news services
6) Wake-up Service
7) Currency rates and conversion
8) Hotel Central Message Broadcasting Features
2. Additional features:
a. Billing records are sent directly to PMS.

b. Multi-thread structure of the interface ensures that no

message is lost under heavy load.
c. Indefinite buffering of data in case of PMS failure.
d. Communication Failure Alert
e. Transaction and Information logging.
f. Individual and Group Check-in/out
g. Room Move
h. Guest Information Change
i. Do Not Disturb
j. Make up Room
k. Room Service
l. Set Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) on/off
m. Text Message
n. Guest Bill Items and Balance
o. Voice Mail Status (Read/Unread, Deleted)
p. Room Status
q. Enable linking of multiple phones to same service

definition and bill.
1) Delete call history after check-out
2) Multiple phones in a suite to a single VM box.
3) Database synchronization
r. Call Accounting and Billing System
1) Operate as an MS Windows Server 20XX system

service so that there will be Automatic System
Restart following power failure.
2) Web based management
3) Automatic or Manual CDR polling
4) Automatic polling interval is parametric (in seconds

or record count)

5) Option to backup raw data
6) Option to delete CDR in Call Manager after retrieval

(to enhance performance)
7) Alert if there is no data for a certain period of time

(parametric)
8) Alert if the communication fails (No network

connection or Call Manager is down)
9) Unlimited number of levels
10) Carrier based tariff configuration
11) Destination based charging
12) Multiple Carrier support
13) Time and Day based tariffs
14) Two level charge
15) Surcharges can be defined for each destination
16) Surcharge rates may be fixed or percentage
17) Unlimited number of different types of charges may

be defined (Service charge, taxes etc.)
18) Order of these charges may be changed.
19) Exceptions Support
20) Special Days Support
21) Discounts may be applied based on total cost or

number of calls.
22) Discounts may be applied for general, VIP or groups.
23) Direct, forwarded, consulted transfer, blind transfer,

conference call billing.
24) Standard reports for extensions, departments,

carriers as well as staff performance reports like
operator response times
25) Detailed Error logs
26) Shall include the following Reports
a) Authorization Code

b) Authorization Code and Call Transfer
c) Charge Account with AUXID
d) Calling Party Number
e) Charge Conference (3 types)
f) Call Transfer and Charge Account features
g) Metered Transferred Call
h) Multi-Tenant
i) Calling Line Identification (CLID)
j) Calling Line Identification (CLID) on a tandem

call
k) CDR with Outpulsed Digits
l) In-Band Automatic Number Identification
m) Feature Group D Automatic Number

Identification
n) Abandoned Call
o) Emergency (911/999) Abandoned Call
p) Call Transfer, Charge Account, and Time to

Answer features
q) Metered Transferred Call and Time to Answer
r) Attendant CDR Enhancement for outgoing

non-metered CO trunks
s) CDR Call Transfer Enhancement
t) CDR Call Transfer Enhancement with network

calls
u) Station Activity Record
v) Public Network Feature Invocation Record
w) CDR 100 Hour Call
X. End Devices
1. Administration Desk Phone

a. Multi-line IP Desk phone supports up to 12

line/programmable feature keys1, 14 fixed keys and four
context sensitive soft key.
b. Integral switch 10/100/1000 Mbps
c. Large backlit high resolution touch color screen
d. Add on conference, call forwarding, call hold, call park,

call queuing, conference three and six party, DND,
extension to extension dialing with add the PBX, flexible
station, full operator stations, hunting, indication for clear
to station, individual transfer calls, intercom service, off
premises extensions, privacy feature, room to room
calling and trunk queening.
e. Fixed feature keys, including keypad, media, call waiting,

conference, transfer, hold, message indicator, music on-
hold, volume / ringer control, speaker phone, headset
port, apps, directories, voice messaging system and more
f. VPN, XML applications
g. Bluetooth and USB port
h. Supports 802.3af standard-based PoE or local AC power
i. Support expansion module
2. Kitchen and Storeroom Phone
a. Four context sensitive soft keys
b. Pixel based LCD display, backlit, with adjustable contrast.
c. Speaker for on-hook listening/dialing
d. Three call- processing fixed keys
1) Hold, goodbye and line
e. Thee specialized feature keys
1) Services, Message/inbox, expand to PC
f. 10/100 Ethernet switch for shared PC access
g. Automatic network configuration
h. Hearing aid compatible

3. Analog phones [Supply, Design, install, Support and Monitor by

Operator]
Y. Operator Console
1. Alarms: catastrophic and major alarms requiring immediate

action to maintain service shall appear on the attendant
console or an associated display. Alphanumeric Display for
Attendant Position: A visual display using numeric and
alphabetic characters indicating the trunk or line to which the
attendant is connected. Other information such as intercept
details, class of service and call type should also be displayed.
Personal Computer consoles are NOT permitted due to space
limitations.
2. Attendant Conference: Allows the attendant to establish a

conference call between a set number of inside or outside
parties. Attendant Exclusion: This prevents an attendant from
monitoring any circuit unless a tone first alerts the station user
to the situation
3. Attendant Guest Name Display: All calls from Guest rooms to

the console shall cause the guest name to be displayed on
the console as provided through the property management
system interface.
4. Attendant Numerical Call Waiting Display: A special display

located on the console giving an indication of the number of
calls waiting for attendant processing. Attendant Transfer - All
Calls: Ability for the attendant to transfer any call that appears
at the console position (internal, incoming to any non-busy
extension in the system. Automatic Hold: Allows the attendant
to move from one trunk call to another on the console without
using a hold button.
5. Automatic Recall: Automatically alerts the attendant after a

prescribed period of time to a camped-on or unanswered call
completed through the console. This enables the attendant to
give a status report to the outside calling party. These calls will
queue in order of presentation, as well as being placed first in
the overall queue.
6. Bad Line Reporting.
7. Busy Override: Allows attendant entry into an existing busy

connection, providing a warning tone to the parties to
indicate third-party entry.

8. Busy Verification of Stations and Trunks: Permits positive

verification that a given circuit is either busy, idle or out of
order.
9. Call Splitting: Allows the attendant to speak privately with the

source and destination parties, and to alternate between
them without connecting them by use of special control keys.
10. Camp On: An incoming call that an attendant attempts to

complete on a busy line within the system is automatically
placed in a special waiting mode until the desired station
becomes idle. The called station is then automatically rung
and connected to the incoming call upon answer.
11. Cancellations: Attendant may cancel at any time on either a

system wide or individual basis such station activation features
as call forwarding or do not disturb.
12. Conference: Capable of establishing a minimum of six (6)

party conferences, one at a time.
13. Console Answering Priorities: The priority with which calls are
presented to the console can be programmed.
14. Controlled Outgoing Restriction: Permits the attendant to

control the restriction of outgoing calls from selected lines on
an individual basis.
15. Console Routing: Incoming or outgoing attendant assisted

calls can be discriminated between or among consoles.
16. Controlled Station-to-Station Restriction: Permits the attendant

to control the restriction of station to station calls from selected
lines on an individual basis.
17. Direct Inward Line Appearance.
18. Direct Trunk Access, for testing
19. Do Not Disturb: Permits attendant to deny to any station on an

individual or group basis, the ability to receive calls. This
feature IS under direct activation and deactivation of the
attendant and when activated calls to those stations are
routed for intercept treatment to either the attendant or a
prerecorded announcement. This feature applies to both
guest and administrative extensions.
1. Flexible Intercept: Facility allows attendant to set completely

flexible and instantly changeable intercept conditions such as
unassigned number, temporary disconnect, vacant code, toll

restriction, change number, out of service line, etc. Indication

of Station Features: When a user activates a feature such as
call forward or do not disturb, the attendant will be alerted to
the situation. Intercept: Calls to certain extensions or trunks will
be routed to the attendant or a recording. The attendant
should be able to set or cancel all intercepts. Interposition
transfer: Calls on one console may be transferred to a different
console by the attendant dialing a code. These calls will go to
the top of any call queue on the receiving console.
2. Message Waiting: In the event the PMS system interface is

down, messages waiting control should be done through the
console.
3. Night Service: The attendant shall be able to transfer selected

trunks to a specified telephone or console whenever regular
consoles are not in use.
4. One-Way Automatic Splitting or Equivalent Paging Access: The

attendant will have direct access to the Hotel's paging system
through the console, and will not be dependent on secondary
equipment.
5. Serial Calls: Allows the attendant to program a trunk to return

to the console automatically after being disconnected from
any station.
6. Supervisory Console: In a multi-console system, one console

can be programmed to have control over the others, or have
access to certain features which are denied to the other
consoles.
7. System Changes: The attendant, through the console, may

restrict local and long distance ca Is, change extension
numbers, assign direct inward dial service, change station
forwarding, and change COS assignments.
8. Temporary Station Disconnect: Allows the attendant, from the

console, to remove selected stations from total service at any
time on a temporary basis.
9. Through Dialing or Equivalent
10. Touch Tone service: Console dial pad supports touch tone
output to allow pager activation and transfer of users into
voice mail system.
11. Transfer All Calls:

12. Trunk Group Access Control: The attendant can allow or deny
access to specific trunk groups by user.
13. Trunk Group Status: The attendant receives a visual indication

when all trunks in a given group are busy.
14. Trunk-to-Trunk Connections - Attendant: The attendant is able

to establish a connection between two trunk circuits which
terminate in the PBX and then extend this conference to a
user.
15. Trunks--Switched Loop Operation.
16. Type of Call Display: Provides a visual display of the type of call
reaching the attendant console.
17. Volume Control - Console: Allows variable control of electronic

audible signals at the attendant console. An on or off switch is
not acceptable.
2.12 INTERNET BILLING SYSTEM

A. Design, Supply, configuration, monitoring and support by FRHI
2.13 WIRELESS INTERNET AND NETWORK CONNECTIVITY

A. Design, Supply, configuration, installations, monitoring and support
by FRHI preferred vendor.
2.14 SPARES
A. Provide the below spare items as a minimum:
1. 5% spare of Edge switches
2. 5% spare of SFP’s
3. 5% spare of IP Phones


PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION


A. After assembly of rack systems in the shop, measure, and record
the D.C. resistance between the racks ground bus bar and the
chassis of all rack-mounted components. Also measure and record
the D.C. resistance between the rack ground bus bar and the
signal common for all components.
B. In the shop, photograph the interconnect wiring within racks

including patch panels and grounding to show the quality of
workmanship and compliance with the specified grounding
procedures.
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas to receive the Work and the conditions under
3.4 INSTALLATION

C. The Contractor shall install all system components including

Employer Furnished Equipment, and appurtenances in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions, and adjustments required to
deliver a complete and operable system.

D. The contractor shall adhere to the installation schedule of the

E. Firmly and permanently, attach electrical boxes, enclosures, and

permanent equipment to the building. Rigidly mounted equipment
and devices shall be plumb and square.
F. Choose colors and finishes of all exposed and custom fabricated

G. Final configuration shall be performed to the satisfaction of the

Employer’s IT Staff. This includes, but is not limited to; VLAN
configuration, IP addressing schemes, final port assignments and
configurations. Installation contractor shall ensure that the proper
documentation is provided to assist in the final system
configuration.
H. Labeling
1. Label product in a logical, legible, and permanent manner

corresponding to the Contract Drawings using wording,
format, style, color, and arrangement of text approved by the
Consultant. Refer to labelling section for additional details.
I. Engraving
1. Refer to drawings for plate engraving and construction details.
J. Grounding and Shielding
1. Earthing and Bonding shall be installed as necessary to

preclude ground loops, noise, and surges from adversely
affecting system operation.
2. Mount equipment racks in a manner which provides electrical

isolation from the building structure and electrical raceways.
Use flexible conduits and PVC fittings to provide insulated
connections between equipment racks and the building
electrical raceways.
3. Ground the chassis of all rack mounted components in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and verify a
D.C. resistance between each chassis and the rack ground
bus bar.
K. Cutting and Patching


limited to:
b. Removal and replacement of defective Work

requirements of the Contract Documents

testing.
e. Routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces to permit

installation of new construction elements


perform all cutting to the existing surfaces encountered during
the course of the Work of this project to the extent necessary
and required to permit the installation of new Work and to
remove existing Work in place.

penetrations are revealed by demolition procedures specified
herein.



construction, repair wall, ceiling, or floor assembly as necessary
to maintain the required fire rating.


L. Wireless Systems:
1. Design, Supply, Configuration, monitoring and support by FRHI.

A. Maintain a competent supervisor and supporting technical
installation. Change of supervisor during the project shall not be
acceptable without prior written acceptance from the Employer.
B. Before connecting any equipment to electrical power outlets,

measure and record the A.C. voltages between hot, neutral, and
ground and verify correct outlet polarity. Verify test and document
correct and safe function of isolated ground power systems.
C. Determine the best sequence of energizing systems to minimize the

risk of damage.
D. After successfully energizing the systems, make preliminary

adjustments and document the settings of all controls, parameters
of corrective networks, voltages at key interconnection points,
gains and losses as applicable. Replicate the unity gain tests
performed at the shop and document the absence of any
waveform distortion, interference signals, or oscillations.
E. The Contractor shall develop and execute an onsite acceptance-

testing program.
F. The plan shall address all requirements identified in this Specification

and test all Contractor supplied cabling and hardware
components. The plan shall follow accepted industry testing
practices and have a method of independent verification
described.
Specification shall be replaced, upgraded, or added by the
Contractor as necessary to correct the noted deficiencies. After
correction of a noted deficiency, re-testing shall be performed to
verify the effectiveness of the corrective action.
H. Field Inspection of Connections: Perform 100% visual inspection at

bolted and welded connections in the Work. Examine the size,
quality and placement of each connection to verify installation in
accordance with Contract Documents and executed Shop
Drawings.
I. Manufacturer’s Field Service: At the start of the installation,

periodically as the Work progresses, and after completion, furnish

the services of the manufacturer’s technical representative at the

job Site as necessary to advise on every phase of the Work. As a
minimum, furnish full-time attendance during the first three work
days, at least once every week thereafter, and furnish technical
assistance to the Installer as may be required.
3.6 TRAINING
provide 5 Days of training sessions. Duration of each training session
shall be at-least four hours long. Contractor to video record each
session and provide six soft copies of the recording as part of the
Close-Out Submittals.

C. Manuals, drawings and technical documentation must be used in

training and shall be left with the Employer, or its designated
representative at the completion of training for Employer use in the
future.

technical documentation, such as programming information,
electronic schematic drawings and technical description, as part
of training and documentation. It shall be the responsibility of the
contractor to ensure this documentation can be obtained prior to
acceptance, as listed in this document.
3.7 INSPECTION
The Engineer.
B. Schedule a time for The Engineer to perform system acceptance

testing and equalization with at least 14 days advance notice.
C. Furnish a technician who is familiar with the system to assist The

Engineer during the acceptance testing and equalization for the
duration of time it takes to complete the adjustments (regular time

or overtime as required). A minimum of 24 hours, as required to

complete the adjustments.
D. Record final settings on all equipment and submit with contract

closeout documents.
E. Upon completion of initial tests and adjustments, submit written

report of tests to the Employer along with all documents, diagrams,
and record drawings required herein.
F. If the system does not meet criteria or if additional trips to the job
Site for testing or equalization are required, The Contractor shall
reimburse the Employer for all expenses and professional time
encountered by The Engineer.
3.8 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish all test equipment necessary for the complete testing and
commissioning of the system, to be available for the entire test
period through final system testing and Taking-Over.
3.9 ADJUSTING
directed.
1. System and components have been installed and inspected in

accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.



indicated.
5. The Employer Information Technology Staff and The Engineer

have accepted the installation.
C. Satisfaction of the above requirements shall not relieve The


equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of The

Contractor’s deficient work/defective equipment.
D. The Employer reserves the right to direct changes to the control

system software and programming for a period of three months
after final acceptance. Such changes shall be made without
additional cost to The Employer.
3.10 CLEANING
debris.
3.11 PROTECTION
acceptance.
END OF SECTION


or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X
Handover 0 X
Procurement (RFQ) X
3
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Access Control X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X
Handover X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X
Handover X
ISA Server X
Procurement (RFQ) X
7
Training X
Handover X
Deployment Server X
Procurement (RFQ) X
8
Training X
Handover X

by FRHI X
9
Training X
Handover 0 X
1 PMK International
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
GPON by FRHI
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X
Handover 0 X
Procurement (RFQ) X
system equipment.
Training X
Handover X
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Security Network -
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
13
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Retail Network -
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
14
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Servers X
Procurement (RFQ) X
15
Training X
Handover X
Desktops X
Procurement (RFQ) X
16
Training X
Handover X
Laptops X
Procurement (RFQ) X
17
Training X
Handover X
Printer X
Procurement (RFQ) X
18
Training X
Handover X
2 PMK International
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
Procurement (RFQ) X
19
Training X
Handover X
Point of Sale X
Procurement (RFQ) X
20
Training X
Handover X
Procurement (RFQ) X
21
Training X
Handover X
Passport Scanning X
Procurement (RFQ) X
22
Training X
Handover X
Procurement (RFQ) X
23
Training X
Handover 0 X
Procurement (RFQ) X
24
Training X
Handover X
Procurement (RFQ) X
25
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Procurement (RFQ) X
26
Training X
Handover 0 X
Procurement (RFQ) X
27
Training X
Handover 0 X
Media Panel X
Procurement (RFQ) X
28
Training X
Handover 0 X
3 PMK International
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
Digital Signage X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
CCTV System X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
GRMS X
Procurement (RFQ) X
documents.
Training X 0
Handover X 0
4 PMK International
12128
DIVISION 03 – AUDIO VISUAL SPECIFICATION
REV. E
17 NOVEMBER 2016

01

DWG № Rev:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1- GENERAL .............................................................................................................................................................. 3
1.1 SUMMARY .............................................................................................................................................................................3

1.2 ACRONYMS..........................................................................................................................................................................4
1.3 REFERENCES .........................................................................................................................................................................8
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..........................................................................................................................................................9
1.5 COORDINATION ................................................................................................................................................................23
1.6 SUBMITTALS .........................................................................................................................................................................24
1.7 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS ....................................................................................................................................................28
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................................................................................................31
1.9 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................................................34
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING............................................................................................................................35
1.11 WARRANTY .........................................................................................................................................................................35
1.12 MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................................................................36
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................................. 39
2.1 MATERIALS ..........................................................................................................................................................................39

2.2 AUDIO - MICROPHONE AND LANGUAGE TRANSALATION SYSTEM .............................................................................40
2.3 AUDIO – DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR (DSP) .................................................................................................................44
2.4 AUDIO - AMPLIFIERS ..........................................................................................................................................................46
2.5 LOUDSPEAKERS ..................................................................................................................................................................47
2.6 CONTROL COMPUTERS ....................................................................................................................................................52
2.7 VIDEO SOURCE EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................................................................52
2.8 VIDEO – PROCESSING EQUIPMENT..................................................................................................................................53
2.9 VIDEO – PROJECTORS & MOUNTS ...................................................................................................................................56
2.10 VIDEO - PROJECTION SCREENS .......................................................................................................................................58
2.11 VIDEO - DISPLAYS: .............................................................................................................................................................59
2.12 AUDIO & VIDEO NETWORK ...............................................................................................................................................63
2.13 REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM ..............................................................................................................................................64
2.14 SYSTEM CONTROL TOUCH PANELS ..................................................................................................................................66
2.15 DIGITAL SIGNAGE SYSTEM ................................................................................................................................................68
2.16 IPTV SYSTEM AND SATELLITES DISHES................................................................................................................................74
2.17 GRMS SYSTEM ....................................................................................................................................................................74
2.18 WIRE AND CABLE ...............................................................................................................................................................84
2.19 CONNECTORS, PLATES, AND PANELS .............................................................................................................................84
2.20 MISCELLANEOUS ...............................................................................................................................................................85
2.21 TERMINATIONS ...................................................................................................................................................................89
PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................ 90
3.1 FABRICATIONS ................................................................................................................................................................ 900

3.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ............................................................................................................................................90
3.3 EXAMINATION ....................................................................................................................................................................90
3.4 INSTALLATION.....................................................................................................................................................................90
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ..................................................................................................................................................96
3.6 TRAINING ......................................................................................................................................................................... 100
3.7 INSPECTION ..................................................................................................................................................................... 101
3.8 TEST EQUIPMENT .............................................................................................................................................................. 101
3.9 ADJUSTING ...................................................................................................................................................................... 102
27 40 00 Audio Visual System - Rev. E Page 1 of 103

3.10 CLEANING ....................................................................................................................................................................... 103

3.11 PROTECTION ................................................................................................................................................................... 103

SECTION 27 40 00
AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Contractor shall perform all work, coordination, systems
integration, engineering design, and testing, and shall provide all
products required in order to ensure a fully operative system and
proper installation of equipment. System operability and proper
installation shall be verified via completion of the acceptance
test plan.
B. Contractor shall coordinate all installation activities and details

with the Employer’s Information Technology Provider including
final configurations.
C. Contractor shall provide all system documentation and

submittals.

specified.
E. Contractor shall provide all calculations and/or analysis to

support design and engineering decisions as specified in
Submittals.
G. Contractor shall secure and pay for plan check fees, permits,
fees, and licenses necessary for execution of work as applicable
for the project.
I. Contractor shall perform pre-delivery testing, site testing, and


K. Contractor to provide alternate price for installation,

configuration, and testing of equipment provided by the
Employer

L. Employer reserves the right to procure the required equipment

M. The Contractor shall verify space, power and cooling

requirements associated with this section.
1. “ITE” Series Drawings
2. “ITS” Series Drawings
1. Architectural Drawings
2. Interior Drawings
3. Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing Drawings
4. Hardscape Drawing
5. Coordination and interface with other trades and authorities

having jurisdiction.
6. Communication Cabling Specification 27 10 00
7. IT Network Equipment Specification 27 20 00
8. Electronic Security System 28 00 00
P. Contractor to refer to Appendix A “AV/IT/Security Responsibility

1.2 ACRONYMS
AEC Acoustic Echo Cancellation
AES Audio Engineering Society
Ajax asynchronous JavaScript and XML
ASI Asynchronous Serial Interface
ASP Advanced Simple Profile
ASTM® American Society for Testing and Materials
AVC Advanced Video Coding
AVI Audio Video Interleave

BGM Background Music System
BMP Bitmap Image
BS British Standards
CEC Consumer Electronics Control

Standardization)
CMP Communication Plenum
CMR Communication Riser
DB Decibel
DLP Digital Light Processing
DSP Digital Signal Processor
DVB Digital Video Broadcasting
DVI Digital Visual Interface
DVI-D Digital Visual Interface - Digital
EDID Extended display identification data
EN European norm
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FTP File Transfer Protocol
GIF Graphics Interchange Format
HD High Definition
HDCP High Definition Content Protection
HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface
HID Human Interface Device
HTML Hypertext Markup Language
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol

HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure
ICT Inductively Coupled Transducer
IEC International Electro technical Commission
IR Infrared
ITU International Telecommunication Union
ITU-T ITU—Telecommunication Standardization Sector
J2EE Java 2 Platform, Enterprise Edition
JPEG Joint Photographic Expert Group
KSV Key Selection Vector
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
Mbps Megabit per Second
MP3 Moving Picture Experts Group Audio Layer III
MJPEG Motion Joint Photographic Expert Group
MPEG Moving Picture Experts Group
OB Outside Broadcast
PDU Power Distribution Unit
PNG Portable Network Graphics

RAID Redundant Array of Independent Drives
RAM Random Access Memory
RCA Radio Corporation of America
RGBHV Red Green Blue Horizontal Sync Vertical Sync
RF Radio Frequency
RU Rack Unit
SMATV Satellite Master Antenna Television
SPDIF Sony/Philips Digital Interface Format
SPL Sound Pressure Level
SQL Structured Query Language
STB Set-Top Box
SVG Scalable Vector Graphics
SWF Small Web Format
TCP Tenant Consolidation Point
THD Total Harmonic Distortion
UDP User Datagram Protocol
UHF Ultrahigh Frequency
UNC Universal Naming Convention
USB Universal Serial Bus
WAV WAVeform audio format
WMF Windows Metafile
WMV Windows Media Video

1.3 REFERENCES
D. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI)

standards.
E. American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.), Electronics

Industries Association (E.I.A), Telecommunications Industries
Association (T.I.A.) standards
F. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) standards
G. ISO/IEC Standards
H. Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
I. National Electric Code (N.E.C.).
J. National Electric Safety Code (N.E.S.C.).
K. National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.).
L. American Society for Testing Materials (A.S.T.M.).
M. Building Seismic Safety Council (B.S.S.C.)
N. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
O. Structured Cabling Section for fiber/copper/wireless installation and

testing procedures.
P. ANSI/INFOCOMM 10:2013, Audiovisual Systems Performance

Verification
Q. ANSI/INFOCOMM 4:2012, Audiovisual Systems Energy Management
R. ANSI/INFOCOMM 3M-2011, Projected Image System Contrast Ratio
S. ANSI/INFOCOMM 2M-2010, Standard Guide for Audiovisual Systems

Design and Coordination Processes
T. ANSI/INFOCOMM 1M-2009, Audio Coverage Uniformity in Enclosed

Listener Areas
U. IES/INFOCOMM RP-38-1X, Videoconferencing Lighting
V. INFOCOMM 5M-201X, Display Image Size for 2D Content

W. INFOCOMM 8M-201X, Audio System Spectral Balance
X. ISA/INFOCOMM 111.01, Unified Automation for Buildings - Part 1:

Terminology and Concepts
Y. Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (S.M.P.T.E.)

Standards:
1. S.M.P.T.E Standards related to Audio
2. S.M.P.T.E Standards related to Broadband
3. S.M.P.T.E Standards related to Cameras
4. S.M.P.T.E Standards related to Compression
5. S.M.P.T.E Standards related to Control
6. S.M.P.T.E Standards related to Image Formats
7. S.M.P.T.E Standards related to Interfaces
8. S.M.P.T.E Standards related to Network
9. S.M.P.T.E Standards related to Projection
10. S.M.P.T.E Standards related to Television
11. S.M.P.T.E Standards related to Test and Measurement
12. S.M.P.T.E Standards related to Time & Sync

A. Public Address / Background Music System
1. Processing and Control
a. The entire system shall be controlled and monitored via a

central server in the Main AV head end room on the
Podium level 04 and via any permitted computer
connected to the facility Ethernet network.
b. Contractor to liaise with the IT contractor to ensure

internet connectivity is provided for remote connection.
c. The system shall include control via touch panel control

system for routing and monitoring operation functions.
Paging shall be available on selected zones as required,
refer drawings for locations.
d. A subscription music server is understood to be provided

by the operator and shall be installed in the Main AV

Rack. This shall provide scheduled music programs for

public address and background music system throughout
the hotel.
e. Audio amplifiers, audio sources, processors shall be

provided in the main AV head end room.
f. Volume and source selection control panel shall be

provided in areas where local control is required such as
Reception, Restaurants, Pool area, treatment rooms, staff
dining etc.
g. Local audio input panel shall be provided in the

restaurants and Pool area.
h. Paging microphone shall be provided in the main security

room and lobby reception desk.
2. Loudspeaker System
a. The system shall utilize a combination of typical constant

voltage distributed loudspeakers powered from amplifiers
located in the AV head-end room and a combination of
remote racks to minimize loudspeaker line lengths. The
selection of loudspeaker types (combination of ceiling
and surface mounted loudspeakers) and models shall be
based on the individual areas covered, architectural and
interior design considerations.
b. BGM and paging loudspeakers shall be provided in the

following areas:
• Hotel Entrance and drop off area
• Hotel Lobby
• FOH office
• Public Restrooms
• All Day Dining Restaurant
• Lobby Lounge
• Restaurants
• Public Areas on Podium Level
• Ballroom Pre-function area
• Majlis
• Hotel Pool Area
• Residential Pool Area

• Elevator’s
• Business Centre
B. Ballroom
1. Audio System
a. The audio system shall be based on a fully configurable

DSP platform providing analogue and digital audio inputs
and outputs, all necessary audio signal processing
including mixing, equalization, delay, compression/limiting
and routing.
b. The system shall utilize a typical constant voltage

distributed ceiling loudspeakers, column loudspeaker and
portable speakers for background and foreground music
applications. Portable speakers shall be used due to the
absence of wall to mount fixed speakers.
c. Wired and wireless microphones with the corresponding

RF antenna system shall be deployed in the Ballroom.
Wireless microphones shall be set at different frequencies
to avoid interferences.
2. Video System
a. The video system shall be composed of projectors

mounted within retractable projector lifts recessed into
the ceiling.
b. An appropriately sized motorized projection screens with

an aspect ratio of 16:9 shall be installed as shown on the
drawings.
c. The video distribution system shall comprise of a

combination of analogue and digital video signals.
d. Each Ballroom section shall include a wireless presentation

gateway to allow presenters to wirelessly display
presentations, photos, videos, etc. from their laptops,
ipad’s, tablets, smartphones etc.
e. The system shall also include feeds from the IPTV system
and be capable of displaying any channel in any of the
ballroom sections simultaneously via the video switcher.
3. Control System
a. Each Ballroom section / partition shall have a wireless

touch panel on a wall mounted docking station
connected to a central control processor in the Ballroom
AV rack. The wall mounted docking station and touch

panel shall be passcode enabled in order to prevent theft
and unauthorized access.
b. A 15” wired touch panel shall be provided in the control

room for the entire Ballroom AV system control. The
control system processor shall be connected to the Hotel
IT network for remote monitoring and control.
c. The operable partitions, lighting, curtains shall be

interfaced to the control system. The system shall have
various scene settings in the combined and non-
combined mode.
d. The GUI on the touch panel shall indicate control for

various scene settings and functionality.
4. Floor box , Facility Panel and power
a. AV facility panels (HDMI, RGBHV, audio input and power)

at the floor boxes and facility panel shall be provided in
each divisible space at convenient locations to allow the
connection of third party equipment.
b. Provision for AV capture and streaming of live events to

other areas of the hotel shall be provided. Connectivity
shall be provided to allow connection of cameras when
required. Permanently installed cameras are not
permitted in the ballroom due to the local culture.
c. Bus port shall be distributed throughout the ballroom for

providing mounting support, power, and connections for
audio, video and lighting equipment. The contractor shall
coordinate with the electrical contractor for power and IT
contractor for data requirements.
5. Ballroom AV Equipment Rack
a. The Ballroom AV equipment rack shall be located in the

main AV room on the Podium level 4.
b. All wiring in meeting room, ballroom, and pre-function

space shall be wired to the nearest IDF. The
corresponding IDF’s shall be interlinked.
C. Meeting Room 1,2,3 and 4 (Divisible type)
1. Audio System



including mixing, equalization, delay, compression/limiting
and routing.

distributed ceiling loudspeakers for background and
foreground music applications.
c. Wired and wireless microphones shall be provided to be

used in the combinable mode.
2. Video System
a. The video system shall be composed of projectors

the ceiling.
b. An appropriately sized motorized projection screens with

drawings.
c. The video distribution system shall comprise of a

d. System shall include a wireless presentation gateway to

allow presenters to wirelessly display presentations,
photos, videos, etc. from their laptops, ipad’s, tablets,
smartphones etc.
e. The system shall also have feeds from the IPTV system.
3. Control System
a. Each Meeting room section shall have a wireless touch

panel on a wall mounted docking station connected to a
central control processor in the AV rack. The control
system processor shall be connected to the Hotel IT
network for remote monitoring and control.
b. The operable partitions, lighting, curtains shall be

interfaced to the control system. The system shall have
various scene settings in the combined and non-
combined mode. The GUI on the touch panel shall
indicate control for various scene settings and
functionality.
c. The room shall have an occupancy sensor to detect room

presence. This shall be linked to the control system such
that the room setting can be changed in case of non-
occupancy.

4. Floor box , Facility Panel and power

at the floor boxes and facility shall be provided in each
divisible space at convenient locations to allow the
connection of third party equipment and also at the table
locations to allow the connection of third party
equipment.
5. AV Rack
a. AV rack shall be located in the credenza within the room

to house the audio processor, video switcher, control
system and power amplifiers. Ventilated enclosures and a
cooling unit shall be provided within the credenza. The
rack shall be provided with an integrated system for
power distribution.
D. Meeting Room 6
1. Audio System

including mixing, equalization, delay,
compression/limiting, and routing.

foreground music applications. Wall recessed
loudspeaker shall be used for sound reinforcement during
video conference.
c. Flush mounted tabletop microphones shall be provided

as shown on the drawings.
2. Video System
a. 80-84” flat panel displays shall be provided based on the

viewing distance and seating arrangement.
b. The video distribution system shall comprise of a

c. HD video conference system shall be provided. Video

conference camera shall be provided in the in-wall
enclosure and is to be coordinated with the ID /
Architect.

d. System shall include a wireless presentation gateway to

smartphones etc.
e. The system shall also have feeds from the IPTV system.
3. Control System
a. Each Meeting room section shall have a wireless touch

panel on a wall mounted docking station connected to
a central control processor in the AV rack. The control
system processor shall be connected to the Hotel IT
network for remote monitoring and control.
b. The room shall have an occupancy sensor to detect

room presence. This shall be linked to the control system
such that the room setting can be changed in case of
non-occupancy.
4. Floor box and Facility Panel

at the floor boxes and facility shall be provided shall be
provided at the table locations to allow the connection
of third party equipment.
5. AV Rack
a. AV rack shall be located in the credenza within the

room to house the audio processor, video switcher,
control system and power amplifiers. Ventilated
enclosures and a cooling unit shall be provided within the
credenza. The rack shall be provided with an integrated
system for power distribution.
E. Boardroom
1. Audio System

including mixing, equalization, delay,
compression/limiting, and routing.

foreground music applications. Wall recessed
loudspeaker shall be used for sound reinforcement during
video conference.

c. Table flush mounted microphones shall be provided.
2. Video System
a. 60-65” flat panel displays shall be provided based on the

viewing distance and seating arrangement.
b. The video system shall be composed of projectors

the ceiling.
c. An appropriately sized motorized projection screens with

drawings.
d. The video distribution system shall comprise of a

e. HD video conference system shall be provided. Video

conference camera shall be provided in the in-wall
enclosure and is to be coordinated with the ID /
Architect.
f. System shall include a wireless presentation gateway to

smartphones etc.
g. The system shall also have feeds from the IPTV system.
3. Control System
a. The Meeting room shall have a wireless touch panel on a

wall mounted docking station connected to a central
control processor in the AV rack. The control system
processor shall be connected to the Hotel IT network for
remote monitoring and control.
b. The room shall have an occupancy sensor to detect

room presence. This shall be linked to the control system
such that the room setting can be changed in case of
non-occupancy.
4. Floor box and Facility Panel

at the floor boxes and facility shall be provided shall be
provided at the table locations to allow the connection
of third party equipment.
5. AV Rack

a. AV rack shall be located in the credenza within the room

to house the audio processor, video switcher, control
system and power amplifiers. Ventilated enclosures and
a cooling unit shall be provided within the credenza. The
rack shall be provided with an integrated system for
power distribution.
F. Basement Meeting Rooms/ Interview rooms
1. Flat panel displays shall be provided based on the viewing

distance and seating arrangement, as indicated on the
drawings.
2. Audio shall be from the speaker built in within the flat panel
3. Facility panels shall be available for connection of third party

devices.
4. Flat panel display remote control shall be utilized for source

section and volume control.
G. Interview / Training Room
1. 119”, 16:9 motorized screen and projector on a motorized lift

shall be provided as shown on the drawing.
2. A 60” LED display shall be provided.
3. Facility panels with HDMI connectors shall be provided in the

table box and wall panel as shown on the drawing.
4. Ceiling loudspeakers shall be provided for program audio.
5. A lapel wireless microphone system shall be provided.
6. Control system shall be provided to control the AV and

lighting. 7” wired touch panel shall be provided.
7. An AV rack shall be provided inside the room to house the

digital video presentation switcher, Blu-ray player and
amplifier.
8. Provide HDMI video extenders as required.
H. Super Penthouse Cinema system
1. 110-120” professional display for cinema viewing shall be

provided for this room.
2. The loud speaker proposed for this room shall have surround
audio capabilities.

3. The video and audio processing unit shall be provided within

the local rack located in an adjacent room. The rack shall be
well ventilated and sufficient cooling shall be provided to
avoid over heating of equipment’s.
4. Wireless touch panel shall be programmed for audio, video,

lighting and curtain control. The room shall be programmed
for various scene settings.
I. Digital Signage System
1. A central IP Based Digital signage system shall be provided for

the building and would consist of the following:
a. Designer Software & Workstation
b. Content Manager Software & Server
c. Digital Signage - Set Top Box (STB) for each Display
2. 10” meeting room scheduler shall be provided at the outside

of each meeting rooms on level-02 and ballrooms.
3. 10” electronic signage displays shall be provided in the

elevator cabs.
4. Larger information displays (42-55”) shall be provided at the

lobby and reception desk. Refer drawings for location and
size.
5. High resolution HD video shall be distributed to all displays

throughout the facility via the structured cabling system (SCS)
and data network.
6. Digital signage set top boxes shall be provided at each display

location to convert IP video signals to AV signals.
7. Application for general public areas:
a. Hotel general information
b. Event information
c. Market ticker information etc.
d. Welcome messages
e. IPTV etc.
f. Way-finding
J. IPTV System

1. Provide a Hotel Interactive IPTV /HITV system server for the

building.
2. The system will obtain channels from the satellite dish farm
located on the Roof level.
3. Provide three (3) satellite dishes (Arab Sat, Nile Sat and Hot
Bird). All the channels shall be free of distortions.
4. The system will be provided with a comprehensive GUI

customized to suit the Hotel Operator requirements.
5. Hotel grade interactive flat panel display with built in set top
box shall be allocated for the hotel guestroom/ residence
apartments and maid’s area. This is an operator supplied
equipment however it shall be installed and commissioned by
the contractor in coordination with ID.
6. Mirror TV’s for bathrooms as indicated in the drawings shall be

connected to the IPTV system. It is to be noted that if external
set-up boxes are used, it shall be protected from water jets
and steam.
7. The system shall be interfaced with PMS.
8. Coordinate the channel list with the Operator.
a. A high definition IPTV system shall be provided for the

development distributing the TV signals from the satellite
dishes to all selected displays.
b. IPTV head end system and servers shall be located in the

Server room on the basement level.
c. Refer drawings for the IPTV location.
d. Single remote shall be programmed to control the TV

and IPTV features in the hotel apartment and residential
guestroom.
K. Guestroom Management System:
1. A guestroom management system (GRMS) shall include the

following functionality/features:
a. Occupancy Detection Systems
b. Thermostat
c. Occupancy Sensor
d. Door/ Window Sensor

e. Curtain Control Provision
f. Guestroom - Do not Disturb /Access Control/ Door Bell

(visual icon).
g. Welcome light
h. IPTV Interface Provision
i. Wireless Smart Gadget / iOS /Android Control
j. Property Management System Interface
k. Rooms / Housekeeping / Engineering System Interface
l. Energy Management Control System Requirements
m. Communications
n. Power, Data & Media Hub Provision
2. GRMS controller, bedside control panels, master control

panel shall be provided in each guestroom and residential
apartment. The control panels shall facilitate the control of
lights, a/c, curtains, and functions like DND (Do Not Disturb),
MUR (Make up Room). Refer drawings for control panel types.
3. Contractor shall refer to the lighting package for lighting

types, control requirements, zoning and circuiting. The GRMS
panel configuration for light shall be based on this. The
mounting location, finish and colour shall be coordinated
with ID.
4. Outside door panel for Hotel guestroom and residential

apartment shall include DND (Do Not Disturb), Door bell and
“Please wait” indicator. MUR (Make up Room) shall not be
indicated on the outdoor panel for security reasons.
5. Inside main door GRMS panel shall indicate the DND and
MUR.
6. The control panel in the w/c shall have a “Please wait” button
with indication to the outside corridor panel.
7. A wireless electronic door locking system shall be provided for

all guestrooms and residential apartments which shall be
recessed into the door. For the hotel guestroom and
residence apartments, the system shall be online. The door
lock system shall interface with the GRMS system via ZigBee
protocol. The ZigBee gateway shall be supplied from the
same supplier as the GRMS manufacturer. The contractor

shall refer to the security package for the door lock

specification.
8. Guestroom Interactive TV System
a. 47” HITV display with built in set-up boxes shall be

provided in each standard guestroom. Refer to the
drawings for size and location.
b. 55-60” HITV with built in set-up boxes display shall be

provided in the suites, presidential suite, penthouses.
Refer to the drawings for size and location.
c. 22” Mirror TV shall be provided in all the hotel guestroom

and residence apartment bathrooms.
d. Media hub shall be provided in all the guestrooms and

apartments with HDMI, audio and Bluetooth
connectivity. Refer drawings for location. Final mounting
height and location to be coordinated with ID.
e. Sound Bar’s shall be provided in all the hotel guestrooms,

residence, royal suite, presidential suite and penthouses.
This shall be integrated within the interior design to
ensure that is it not obtrusive.
f. In addition to the sound bars, the royal suite, presidential

suite and penthouses shall also be provided with a 5.1
surround sound system.
L. Infrastructure Design
1. A main AV head end room shall be located on Podium Level

4 to house the primary source equipment, DSP and power
amplifiers for the public address / background music system
and ballroom.
2. AV equipment rack shall be provided in the credenza in the

meeting rooms. Ventilated enclosures and a cooling unit shall
be provided within the AV rack to prevent overheating of the
equipment. The rack shall be provided with an integrated
system for power distribution.
3. The Ballroom audio system and PA/BGM audio system shall

be interconnected with the fire alarm system in order to mute
the audio system in the event of fire alarm.
4. A dedicated AV network infrastructure shall be required to

interconnect the main AV room and other areas within the
scope of this AV package.

5. Pathways would comprise of conduits, riser openings, cable

tray systems and containment for the vertical and horizontal
cabling. Spaces refer to the rooms which house the active
and passive equipment and associated cabling. Current and
future requirements shall be considered in the design of the
pathways and spaces for this project. Infrastructure design
shall be based on the following:
a. ANSI/TIA/EIA Standards
b. Additional Client’s Requirements
6. Corridor riser distribution shall be by means of perforated

heavy duty, return flange, hot dipped galvanized cable within
masonry and concrete walls and slabs.
7. Containment within AV rooms shall be via galvanized steel

wire mesh cable baskets.
8. All pathways and support systems shall be sized for an

installed capacity of ≤40%, or as required by NFPA-70
(National Electrical Code), and local codes. All penetrations
and sleeves shall be appropriate for the intended use, and
shall be fire blocked in accordance with the requirements of
the local authority.
9. All support systems shall be designed to be independent of

and coordinated with other building systems above finished
ceilings, below access floors, and within walls and slabs in
accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-569A.
10. The AV Equipment Room shall comprise of the following:
a. Equipment enclosures and racks
b. Space allocation for power disconnects, power supplies,

earthing and bonding systems.
c. Ceiling space allocation for overhead cable

management system
d. Space allocation for UPS.
e. Space allocation for future operator equipment.
f. Slab openings for vertical risers.
g. Wall space allocation for power outlets.
M. Equipment Room Environments

1. Environment for AV equipment rooms shall be based on EIA /

TIA / AHJ Standards and in conjunction with client’s
requirements. Special attention shall be given to the
following:
a. Utility Power Provisions.
b. UPS Provisions.
c. Cooling Provisions.
d. Earthing and Bonding System Design.
e. Security and Risk Management System Provisions.
f. Acoustic isolation of local AV rack closets for potential

active AV equipment fan/mechanical noise leakage.
g. Others: Any other requirements such as access, lighting

conditions, plywood on walls, floor drain etc.
N. Enclosures and Racks
1. All active equipment within the AV rooms shall be mounted

within enclosed, ventilated enclosures that are compatible
with the active equipment provided. The selected
manufacturer shall provide a comprehensive, integrated
system for power distribution and central monitoring via
Ethernet.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. The contractor shall inspect the site prior to installation to
understand the existing system and shall provide all necessary
interfaces, cabling, equipment needed for the AV system.
B. The contractor shall refer all design document related to AV and

IT system including the drawings, specification, design guidelines
to provide complete intended solution as described in the
documents.
C. The contractor shall coordinate with interior designer for the

location of AV equipment including loudspeakers, projectors,
projector screens, flat panel displays, floor boxes and AV panels.
D. The contractor shall coordinate with interior designer for the

faceplate colour of AV wall panels.
E. The contractor shall coordinate with IT contractor for the all data
outlets required for AV system.

F. The contractor shall coordinate with electrical contractor for all

the power and cabling requirement needed for the AV
equipment.
G. Coordinate arrangement, mounting and support of AV

equipment:
1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific

mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.
2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with

minimum interference to other installations.
3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at

required slope.
4. So connecting pathways, cables, wire ways, cable trays, and

bus ways shall be clear of obstructions and of the working
and access space of other equipment.
H. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set

sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other
structural components as they are constructed.
I. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the requirements

associated with this section and coordinate with the relevant
trades.
1.6 SUBMITTALS

a. Cabling Procurement Date
b. Equipment Procurement Date
e. Equipment Installation Start Date
f. Equipment Installation Completion Date

g. Equipment Testing Start Date
h. Equipment Testing Completion Date
i. Potential Slippage Periods
j. Contingent Tasks
k. Concurrent Tasks
l. Completion of Documentation
C. Each submittal set shall include
1. Electronic copies
2. Product data
3. Reduced size
D. In addition to hard copy submittals, submit all files necessary to

produce the above submittals as follows:
1. Transportation media shall be in CD/DVD format.
2. A Master File List in text format shall be placed on each

CD/DVD with a short description of files in the submittal. A
Drawing Register shall accompany every submittal of
drawings.
3. The shop drawings shall be in AutoCAD 2012 or later

AutoCAD drawing (.DWG) format. Drawing Exchange File
Format (.DXF) is not acceptable. All AutoCAD X-REFs, fonts,
and other drawing parts necessary shall be included.
Portable Document Format (PDF) versions should accompany
Bound AutoCAD drawings for quick reference.
4. Word processing files shall be in latest Microsoft Word format.

Graphs and Charts shall be in Microsoft Excel format. Any
graphic images necessary for the reproduction of the
submittals shall be included in the files, and shall be included
in JPEG file format, at an acceptable resolution.

E. Product Data - Submit Six (3) Sets


construction criteria related herein. It also represents that the
information contained within project drawings, product data
sheets and samples conform to the requirements of the work
and of these specifications. The Contractor shall notify in
writing of any irregularity or discrepancies to the Consultant
and provide the Consultant with possible solutions that shall
rectify any situations
2. Submit catalog data sheets, neatly bound with title page,

corresponding specification paragraph numbers or
equipment title. Indicate all accepted substitutions.

and color selections for all exposed items subject to
Consultant selection.
4. Submit a list showing coordination of selected frequencies for

all wireless transmitters. Include RF and Wi-Fi channels.
F. Shop Drawings - Submit Two (2) Sets

practices.

identifying every connection for information. Include
electronic devices such as switches, transformers, and
terminal blocks. Indicate locations of all components. Identify
cables by types, colors, and wire numbers. Include
termination details including conductor color codes and
cable dressing details for each type of connector used in the
system.
3. Submit room enlargements for all equipment rooms showing

equipment rack arrangements and cable trays. Provide
elevations for all devices within equipment rooms.
4. Submit system plans showing all device locations and ceiling

distributed loudspeaker layouts with wattage tap settings, if
appropriate.
5. Submit ceiling, wall and suspended loudspeaker layouts.

a. Calculate appropriate wattage tap required to achieve

85dB SPL at the listener with 10 dB of peak factor and
note tap values on the layout drawings.
b. Calculate circuit impedance of each loudspeaker circuit

and note the values on block diagrams.
6. Submit conduit riser diagrams showing connection of all

devices, required conduit sizes along with types and quantities
of cables to be used and cable identification tags.
7. Submit Power and cooling requirements for each equipment

rack / room. Heat load to be indicated in BTU/Hr.

9. Submit rack layouts indicating the proposed arrangement of

mounted equipment including junction boxes and locations of
conduit penetrations.
10. Submit fully dimensioned construction details of all panels,

plates and other custom fabricated items or modifications
(e.g. installation of audio/visual equipment in lecterns). Include
complete parts lists and, as required, schematic diagrams.
Include details of back boxes for roughing in, especially if
depth is non-standard.
11. Submit mounting and support details for distributed ceiling

loudspeakers, and all other items mounted overhead
complete with parts lists and dimensions. Include a full plan
view, front elevation, and side elevation of each item with
corresponding support structure and mounting hardware.
Verify load ratings of all hanging components including
attachment hardware, and safety wires.
12. Submit electronic copies of any custom programming

including source codes. Include printed copies of all control
screens, wiring pages etc.
13. Submit Touch Panel Layouts for each area / room.
14. Submit Interface block diagrams of the system with all building
systems.
G. Samples - Submit two Sets of each sample

shall be reviewed for color and appearance and
workmanship. Compliance with all other requirements is the

exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Furnish samples of

the following:
a. All exposed plates and panels for approval of color,

engraving, text size and material.
b. All exposed equipment such as display trims, projector

assembly panels etc.
c. Terminated cable samples.

should include:
1. Hard Copies (Two (2) Sets for all items below).
2. Electronic Copies (Submit Two (2) electronic copies for all

items below).
3. Source Code (Submit Two (2) electronic copy of source of all

software installed).
4. Operation Manual

b. Table of Contents.

and operational concepts (e.g. remote control features,
switching or routing functions, patch points, mixing and
linking capabilities).

e. Small scale plans showing locations and circuit numbers

for all system outlets and receptacles.
f. Single-line block-diagrams showing all major system

components.
g. Two sets of reduced size drawings showing the


h. Manufacturer's operation manuals for equipment

i. A properly licensed working copy of the latest version of

any and all software required to operate or configure the
systems specified herein shall be a part of the system
supplied. This includes, but is not limited to, all software,
firmware and hardware required for configuration,
adjustment, diagnosis and repair.
j. All software shall be fully documented, and that

documentation included.
k. Software shall be included in its “installable” state on

industry standard CD/DVD-ROM, or other appropriate
format. Back-up of the working software may be
provided as an additional inclusion. Disk images are
unacceptable.
l. Any and all user definable software configurations and/or

programming shall become the sole property of the
employer. This includes all source code, source code
m. The compiler shall be property of the employer with all

n. Key schedule cross referencing all keys to their respective

functions.
5. Maintenance Data Manual - Submit Two (2) Sets of Hard

Copies
a. Neatly bind each with tabbed dividers between

sections and include a title page with space for
submittal stamps.





g. Manufacturers' service manuals for all major equipment

items.
h. Test documentation showing results of source quality

testing, and equalization. Document final settings for all
non-user devices and controls after completion of
acceptance testing and equalization including raw and
equalized house curves. Document the physical position
of settings as well as input and output signal levels
measured in dBmV (milli Volts).
i. Provide a recommended preventative maintenance

inadequate information is provided by the
manufacturer, provide the information necessary for
proper maintenance.
6. Drawings - Submit Two (2) Sets of Hard Copies

information. Include electronic devices such as switches,
transformers, and terminal blocks. Indicate locations of all
components. Identify cables by types, colors, and wire
numbers.
b. Submit system plans showing all as-installed device

locations and ceiling layouts. Include a full plan view,
front elevation, and side elevation of each item with
corresponding support structure and mounting hardware.
c. Submit conduit riser diagrams showing as-installed

connection of all devices, required conduit sizes along
with types and quantities of cables and cable
identification tags.
d. Submit rack layouts indicating the as-installed

arrangement of mounted equipment including junction
boxes and locations of conduit penetrations.
e. Submit as-installed fully dimensioned construction details

of all panels, plates and other custom fabricated items.
f. Submit electronic copies of all custom programming

including as-installed source codes.
g. Submit as-programmed Touch Panel Layouts for each

area / room.


B. Project drawings will be available to all parties involved in the

provided will be to industry standard scale; however all distances,
clearances, lengths, routes, and equipment placements must be
field verified prior to execution or placement.

a. The contractor must be certified by the manufacturer of

installation and testing procedures, and utilize the
b. All members of the installation team must be certified by

c. All engineers assigned to this project should hold a valid

CTS or equivalent certification with at least one CTS-D or
equivalent certification. The site installation supervisor
should hold a CTS-I or equivalent certification.
d. Contractor must be a registered & certified partner of

the vendor for the project.
e. The Contractor shall be a firm normally employed in the

Audio Visual industry, with at least seven (7) years’
experience in the installation, termination, testing,
commissioning and certification of the Systems, with a
reference list of ten (10) projects which compromise of
high density commercial projects and contact names to
confirm successful completion of projects.
f. The Contractor shall demonstrate QA/QC procedures

D. Equipment and materials supplied shall be a standard product of

manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture and
installation of information backbone technologies and shall be
the manufacturer's latest standard design. Items of the same
classification shall be identical. This requirement includes cable,
equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components.

Electrically powered equipment shall be UL approved. Electronic
equipment shall meet the requirements of EN55011.
E. All hardware, software, firmware, and/or operating system

requirements given are the minimum requirements.
F. Intent of Drawings:

placement.

and do not show all components, materials, and other
specific elements, which may be required for proper
installation. It is the responsibility of the Contractor for
coordinating the final equipment layout and pathway routing
with the completed drawings. If any departure from the
Contract Drawings or the specifications is deemed necessary
on these bases or in the event of conflicts among these
bases, details of such departures or conflicts and the bases
shall be submitted in writing.
G. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up as directed by the Consultant.

Utilize the same materials and installation methods in the mock-
up as intended for the final Work. Schedule the installation so that
the mock-up may be examined, and any necessary adjustments
serve as the standard for materials, workmanship, and
appearance for such Work throughout the project.
H. Maintain a full set of Shop Drawings at the Project site, indicating

installation.
I. Maintain a full set of Shop Drawings at the Project site, indicating

installation.
J. Alternates and Substitutions:



exceed the level of quality, features and capabilities
specified will be considered for installation. The Employer’s
Consultant reserves the right to govern over and proclaim
whether proposed substitutions are equal to the
specifications.



K. Subletting:
L. The Contractor shall coordinate with other system vendors, as

M. Cutting and Patching

limited to:
b. Removal and replacement of defective Work


testing.

e. Routine penetrations of nonstructural surfaces to permit

installation of new construction elements


perform all cutting to the existing surfaces encountered
during the course of the Work of this project to the extent
necessary and required to permit the installation of new Work
and to remove existing Work in place.

penetrations are revealed by demolition procedures
specified herein.



construction, repair wall, ceiling, or floor assembly as
necessary to maintain the required fire rating.


conflicts, or omissions prior to bid opening. Otherwise, correct
these at no additional cost to the Employer.
B. Continue to monitor the project site. If conditions develop

requiring a need to vary from the contract documents, notify the
Consultant immediately in writing. Otherwise, make
recommendations, submit proposed drawings showing how the
Work may be installed, and on approval, proceed with the
necessary changes without additional cost to the Employer.


A. Protect equipment from damage during delivery, handling,
storage and installation.
B. Deliver and store materials in manufacturer’s original packaging

labeled to show name, brand, type, and grade. Do not open
packaging nor remove labels until time for installation.
C. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be

D. Main Contractor shall provide a secured storage provision on site

to store the delivered materials by the ELV contractor in
coordination with the operator.
E. Main Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, storing and

F. Main Contractor shall provide all necessary material stock

management including storage access, material in-out log
register.
G. The associated system specialist contractor shall verify the

provided storage is in accordance with manufacturer guidelines
prior to material delivery on site. The system specialist will ensure
and dust.
H. The Main Contractor shall also provide access and attendance

when required by specialist suppliers and installers.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall provide the manufacturer’s warranty for all
equipment installed at no additional charge for a period of not
less than one (1) year from the date of acceptance certificate.
Provide optional three (3) year warranty from a date of
acceptance certificate. The warranty shall allow for replacement
or repair at the discretion of the Employer and shall include all
upgrades for firmware and/or operating systems.
B. The warranty shall allow for replacement or repair at the

discretion of the Employer and shall include all upgrades for
firmware and/or operating systems.
C. During the system warranty period, answer all service calls and
requests for information within 24 hours. Repair or replace faulty
materials and correct faulty workmanship within 24 hours of all
service calls.

D. Register warranty in the Employer's name for any product.
E. Keys: Submit in triplicate all keys required for access to and

operation of the systems.
F. Software License
1. Required software licenses shall be identified and supplied by

the Contractor. Licenses shall be “Site Licenses” which shall
cover all equipment installed now or in the future.
2. All software licenses and warranties shall be registered in the

name of the Employer. Required software licenses shall be
identified and supplied by the Contractor. Licenses shall be
“Site Licenses” which shall cover all equipment installed now
or in the future.
1.12 MAINTENANCE
A. Base: The Contractor shall provide maintenance and support of
all hardware and software associated with this system for the first
year. The maintenance services to be provided by the
Contractor shall include preventive, routine, and emergency
maintenance services as defined below under optional
maintenance and support.

maintenance and support for two (2) years following the
warranty period. The option pricing shall be given as a
guaranteed maximum annual cost. This service is to include parts,
labor, licenses, software upgrades, and all other contractor costs
required to keep the equipment operational. Pricing shall be
provided for the following two levels of support/response time:



each component. Preventative maintenance services shall
include inspection, test, necessary adjustment, lubrication, parts
cleaning, and software upgrades. Routine maintenance services
shall include scheduled overhauls as recommended by the
equipment and software manufacturer. The Contractor shall
include an Employer technician in maintenance activities during

the warranty period to provide on the job training for Employer

personnel.
D. Emergency Failure: A system failure is considered an emergency

if any the key components are inoperative to the extent the
system cannot function in a normal manner. Emergency services
shall include inspections and necessary tests to determine the
causes of equipment or software malfunction or failure. The
emergency services shall include: the furnishing and installation of
components, parts or software changes required to replace
malfunctioning system elements. The Contractor shall specify a
maximum amount of time to get the system up and operational
in the event of an emergency failure. This time period shall be
subject to Employer approval.
E. Special Equipment: The Contractor shall supply a list of special


certified on all hardware/software applications. These
technicians shall have the appropriate experience to perform
such work, as determined by the Project Engineer. Maintenance
technicians shall be provisioned to attend a one (1) week
manufacturer training class each year. Pre-assigned backup
technicians shall be available to replace onsite technicians who
are on vacation, in training or who are out sick.
G. Hardware Support: The Contractor shall supply hardware support


severity of problem and the associated response time. The use of
this response plan and its details will be negotiated with the
Employer. Repairs are to be made as expeditiously as possible. If
parts are immediately unavailable, the fastest means of shipment
shall be used, including overnight-expedited shipping.
I. Maintenance Log: The Contractor shall maintain a bound

and any extended support period. The Log shall be in an
Employer approved format. The Log shall be available for
inspection by the Employer at any time during the year that it
covers. The Maintenance Log Book shall be turned over at the

completion of maintenance contract. The Log shall be kept on a

component-by-component (equipment number) basis, with
separate sections or volumes, as appropriate, for each
component. The Log shall itemize the history of preventative
maintenance and corrective/repair activities, stating the
character, duration, cause, cure of all malfunctions and the
individual’s name that completed the repair. The Log shall
record all hardware updates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials and products, excepting Owner Furnished
Equipment (OFE) and materials, shall be appropriate for the
intended use and shall meet all applicable UL, EN, BS, ISO and
IEC Regulations
B. All products shall be new, of the latest version at time of

Installation and brought to the job site in original manufacturer's
packaging. Electrical components shall bear the Underwriter's
Laboratories label. This listing requirement applies to the entire
assembly. Only systems and equipment that meet or exceed the
level of quality and capabilities stated within this document will
be considered for acceptance.
C. The contractor is to provide a written statement from all

manufacturers that all installed hardware and software are the
latest models at the time of handover.
D. Cable Lubricants specifically designed for installing

communications cable may be used to reduce pulling tension as
necessary when pulling cable into conduit.
E. Materials shall be listed and approved for the particular

application and permitted by the authority having jurisdiction for
the application.
F. Provide security covers on non-user operated equipment having

front panel controls. Install covers at the conclusion of
Acceptance Testing.
G. Take care during installation to prevent scratches, dents, chips,

etc.; equipment with significant or disfiguring cosmetic flaws will
be rejected.
H. All components will be approved by the Consultant and afford

2. Unobtrusiveness
3. Functionality

I. All workstation termination hardware shall match the existing wall

surface color as closely as possible, to include mounting boxes,
faceplates, and outlets.
K. All software supplied for the project shall be manufacturer

furnished and supported applications. Contractor “custom”
software, written in-house, will not be accepted except in cases
where a suitable application does not exist and only with prior
written approval by the Consultant.
L. Digital video definition of terms:
1. Source – AV equipment connected to the inputs of the AV

switching system.
2. Sink – AV equipment connected to the outputs of the AV

switching system (i.e. displays, audio processors).
3. KSV – commonly called an HDCP “key”. A unique ID for each

HDMI sink that must be sent to HDCP-enabled sources in order
for the sinks to receive content.
4. Video timing – A combination of resolution and refresh rate
M. The contractor shall provide AV source equipment with support

for enough KSV’s so that it can be routed to all sinks
simultaneously.
N. If a particular AV source cannot be found to support enough

KSV’s to route all sinks simultaneously the contractor shall notify
the Consultant.
O. The contractor shall verify the data rate supported by each

shielded twisted pair cable used for AV distribution.
P. The contractor shall provide display equipment that does not

over scan the video signal when full-pixel source are routed.
Q. The installation, programming, demonstration and acceptance

tests shall be done by a manufacturer certified engineer.
2.2 AUDIO - MICROPHONE SYSTEM AND LANGUAGE TRANSALATION

SYSTEM
A. Wireless microphone receiver (WRLS): The wireless receiver shall
operate over a bandwidth of 64MHz and provide more than 60
compatible channels per frequency band with a wide range of
possible frequency settings. Up to 22 compatible systems per
8MHz TV Channel. AES 256-bit encryption for secure wireless

transmission. Up to 60dB of adjustable audio gain. Ethernet

networking provides streamlined set up across multiple receivers.
Networked channel scan configures open frequencies for all
connected receivers. The contractor to ensure that microphones
are set on various frequencies (as approved by the local
regulation) to avoid interference. Compatible with Wireless
control software. Accepted products:
1. Shure
2. Sennheiser
3. Approved equal
B. Wireless handheld microphone: 24 bit digital audio quality and

incredibly efficient RF spectrum usage. Dynamic, Super cardioid
capsule with 50Hz-16 KHz frequency response. Over 100mtrs (330ft.)
operating range. AES 256-bit encryption for secure transmission. All
metal construction ensures durability and a wide selection of
compatible microphone choices. Mic offset range shall be 0 to 21
dB (in 3dB steps), Over 120dB of dynamic range, no transmitter
gain adjustment needed. Selectable RF output power 1mW and
10mW. Up to 9 hours continuous use with 2 x AA alkaline batteries.
Optional Li-Ion battery provides up to 10 hours of continuous use
and reports remaining runtime in hours and minutes. External
charging contacts for docked charging stations. Accepted
products:
1. Shure
4. Sennheiser
5. Approved equal
C. Lavalier microphones: Subminiature lavalier condenser

microphone with cardioid polar pattern. Commshield technology
guards against interference from cellular RF devices. Kevlar
reinforced soft-flex cable design reduces handling noise. Multi
position tie clip allows for a variety of placement options. Sensitivity
of microphone shall be -51.0dBV/Pa (3.0mV). Accepted products:
1. Shure
2. Sennheiser
3. Approved equal
D. Wireless body pack transmitter unit: 24 bit digital audio quality and
incredibly efficient RF spectrum usage. Over 100mtrs (330ft.)
operating range. AES 256-bit encryption for secure transmission.
Cast Aluminum housing ensures durability and a wide selection of

compatible microphone choices. Over 120dB of dynamic range,

no transmitter gain adjustment needed. Selectable RF output
power 1mW and 10mW. Maximum input level 8.5 dBV. Up to 9
hours continuous use with 2 x AA alkaline batteries. Optional Li-Ion
battery provides up to 10 hours of continuous use and reports
remaining runtime in hours and minutes. External charging contacts
for docked charging stations. 4 pin male mini connector
termination for lavaliere microphones. Accepted products:
1. Shure
2. Sennheiser
3. Approved equal
E. Antenna Distribution System: to be used to provide proper signal

coverage in the room. Antenna distribution system must provide RF
signal and power to the wireless microphone receivers. Antenna
Distribution system shall have four way active antenna splitter and
power distribution. Accepted Products:
1. Shure
2. Sennheiser
3. Approved equal
F. Language Translation central unit and Interpreter’s console - An

audio control console designed for simultaneous language
interpretation used in conferences, where a floor and a single relay
language is used. A single audio control console shall allow one or
two interpreters to monitor floor or relay sources, activate
microphone inputs and route the interpretation to one of two
audio output channels or to the relay bus. The audio control
console shall have daisy-chain capability to connect up to 4
consoles using CAT5 cable for the relay bus eliminating the need
for external distribution amplifier. The interpreters console shall
include interpreter headphone and goose neck microphone. The
system shall have a frequency Response:45Hz to 20kHz, +0/−3dB
re:1kHz with flat bass/treble, Distortion at 1kHz : <0.5% THD @ full
power, Signal to Noise Ratio >82dB @ 1kHz , Crosstalk Attenuation:
>63dB @ 1kHz , Tone Controls: Bass: +12dB Boost or −12dB Cut @
100Hz, Treble: +12dB Boost or −12dB Cut @ 10kHz . Contractor to
provide the antenna system. Accepted Products :
1. Sennheiser
2. DIS
3. Beyer dynamics

4. Approved equal
G. Wireless Digital bodypack receiver- The digital RF bodypack

receiver shall work in the frequency range of 863 – 865 MHz and
offers 6 channels in parallel, 8 channels in the conference mode
with a stationary transmitter. Intuitive operating controls make it
easy to use in combination with a stationary transmitter. Intuitive
operating controls make it easy to use. The included lithium
polymer battery offers 16 hours of battery life. The system shall
include audience headphone and receiver charging case.
Accepted Products :
1. Sennheiser
2. DIS
3. Beyer dynamics
4. Approved equal
H. Antenna Array- to be used to provide proper signal coverage in

the room. Antenna distribution system must provide RF signal to the
audience headsets. The frequency range shall range from 450 –
960 MHz, +- 50 degrees. Accepted Products :
1. Sennheiser
2. DIS
3. Beyer dynamics
4. Approved equal
I. Table Mounted Microphone: The Microphone shall be a low profile

boundary layer retractable through table design with a cardioid
polar pattern. The Microphone is push activated for both up and
down positions leaving only 3mm (0.12") protruding above the
surface when in the retracted position. The Microphone shall have
an integral electronic module requiring a 9 - 48 volt phantom
power supply. The module shall be fitted with filters which will
eliminate all GSM frequencies from 800 - 1200MHz .Impedance 200
Ohms Frequency response shall be 50Hz - 18HZ, Sensitivity -37.5 ±
3dB @ 1 KHz (0db = 1V/Pa) THD 120dB is no greater than 1% .
Accepted Products:
1. Clock Audio
2. Audio-Technica
3. Beyer dynamic

4. Approved equal
J. Lectern Gooseneck microphone: The microphone shall be of the

condenser type with a cardioid polar pattern with adjustable
gooseneck.It shall have a shock mount provides over 20 dB
isolation from surface vibration noise. Programmable on/off switch
and LED on/off indicator. The Frequency Response shall be 50 to
17,000 Hz, impedance shall be 180 ohms actual (EIA rated at 150
ohms) and shall require phantom power of 11 to 52 Vdc phantom,
2.0 mA. Accepted Products
1. Clock audio
2. Audio-Technica
3. Beyer dynamic
4. Approved equal
2.3 AUDIO – DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR (DSP)

A. Digital Signal Processor Type-1 (PA/BGM). Furnish the most current
generation, open architecture digital audio signal processor. The
DSP shall support AVB digital audio and control networking.
Computer control includes independent or group adjustment of
levels. Furnish with the maximum capacity and highest
performance RAM, high-speed digital audio buss, passive back
plane architecture, 10/100baseTX Ethernet card and remote
client/server software application. Breakout boxes and digital
signal processors located adjacent to the DSP. Complete
programming shall be done by the audiovisual contractor.
Contractor shall provide the required audio input extender and
necessary input output cards. Provide 12 months of on-site
software updates from the date of final acceptance. Accepted
Products:
1. Biamp
2. BSS London
3. Approved equal
1. Input Interface: The audio input device shall accept mic/line or

Cobra Net audio signals for the use of live audio Paging system. The
frequency response shall be 20 Hz to 20 kHz, (+0, - 1dB), with less
than 0.05% THD+Noise, Dynamic Range: >100Db. Front panel
indicators shall indicate the chassis power, Fault and Status as well
as signal present indication for each input. Signal processing shall
feature a five-band parametric equalization, compression, auto
gain control with speech sense and VOX threshold control. The unit

shall have Control Inputs and Control Outputs with the ability for
one input and one output to be configured as status monitor
indicators to external systems. Full logging of the unit status shall be
reported to the network.
2. Message Server: Shall be a networked message server that supports

advance paging functions like recorded message playback, event
scheduling, VoIP paging interface, logging, and remote access.
The server shall feature a status LED and separate ports for TCP/IP
Control and Cobra net.
3. Life safety Interface: This interface shall provide a networked

emergency interface to third-party emergency and alarm systems.
It shall have redundant power supply and network connections.
The life safety interface shall be powered from a certified 24V DC
power source or over Ethernet (PoE) via either of two network ports.
The life safety interface shall have eight monitored I/O and eight
control inputs and control up to four emergency zones. It shall also
be equipped with a control interface to provide a sounder to
deliver audible notification of alarm, fault or trouble conditions. It
shall provide switches for local sounder silence, system test and
system fault reset and shall provide pass-through interconnections
for connection of the Life Safety Interface to fire detection
equipment, connections for Ethernet fault and power supply fault
signals.
4. Paging stations – The networked paging station shall have a push to

talk button with status indication. The station shall have an
embedded DSP. It features a local storage of configuration data
and thereby making this paging station function as a decentralized
unit which shall eliminates any centralized point of failure.
B. Digital Signal Processor Type-2 (Ballroom, meeting rooms) - The

Audio Visual contractor shall furnish the most current generation,
open architecture digital audio signal processor. The DSP shall be
of a modular configuration and shall support Audio Video Bridging
(AVB) digital audio networking. It shall also have Ethernet
connection for programming and control. The server shall include
General Purpose Input and Output connection (GPIO) channels for
sending or receiving logic signals. The Programming of the GPIO
ports shall be software configurable. The server shall microphone or
line level analog audio. It shall also cater to software-configurable
features like signal routing, mixing, equalization, filtering, dynamics,
delay, monitoring, and diagnostic tools. Accepted Products:
1. Biamp
2. BSS London

3. Approved Equal
B. Surround Processor: The surround sound processor shall

automatically detects and decodes audio content in various
Dolby and DTS formats from DVD, Blu-ray Disc and HDTV
broadcasts. It shall feature coaxial and optical digital inputs, plus
an analog balanced/unbalanced two-channel input. RS-232
serial control and balanced/unbalanced line level outputs. The
included control software offers a user-friendly GUI for setup and
operation. The Frequency response shall be from 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
±0.2 dB and Subwoofer frequency response shall be from 4 Hz to
250 Hz, ±3 dB , THD + Noise : <0.03% @ 1 kHz, at maximum output
level, S/N >100 dB, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, unweighted. Accepted
Products:
1. Extron
2. Denon
3. Crestron
4. Approved Equal
2.4 AUDIO - AMPLIFIERS

A. Power Amplifiers (PA). Power Amplifiers shall be solid state
throughout and located in the Equipment Racks. 70 volt, 8-ohm,
4-ohm operation, control shall be through Ethernet port or RS-232.
Amplifiers to have a frequency response of +1 dB from 20Hz to 20
KHZ with less than 0.01% THD at rated output. The amplifier shall
require no more than 2RU height within a 19" rack. DSP
functionality within the amplifier is not required. Additional
features such as remote monitoring over network, economy
modes, auto-sensing start-up and shut-down, energy star rating,
fault tolerance and reporting to be considered.
Accepted products:
1. QSC
2. Crown
3. Lab Gruppen
4. Approved Equal
a. Two Channels – 400 Watts per Channel @ 4 Ohms, 300

Watts per Channel @ 8 Ohms or Constant Voltage
(70/100V).

b. Four Channels - 200 Watts per Channel @ 4 Ohms, 150

(70/100V).
c. Eight Channels - 130 Watts per Channel @ 4 Ohms, 90

(70/100V).
B. Power Amplifier for Interview Room: Shall be class D mono

70/100V single channel amplifier. Shall have input impedance
>10k ohms unbalanced/balanced, DC coupled; input sensitivity:
+4 dBu (1.23 Vrms) if driven by one input; Output power 80 watts
rms, 70 V, 1 kHz, <0.1% THD; Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz,
±1 dB; THD+Noise <0.1% @ 1 kHz at 3 dB below clipping; S/N 100
dB, 20 Hz - 20 kHz, unweighted. Shall be half rack width and 1 RU
height. Accepted product:
1. Extron
2. RDL
3. Approved Equal
2.5 LOUDSPEAKERS
A. Loudspeaker Type A. 4” Ceiling mounted coaxial loudspeaker.
1 x 100 mm (4”) ICT. Loudspeaker shall have frequency response
of 85Hz – 19kHz (-3dB) frequency response, 80 watts program, 87
dB sensitivity 1W/1M, 6 Ω impedance, 90° conical dispersion, 1 x
100 mm ICT driver, crossover at 2.7 kHz inductively coupled.
Speaker to be mounted flushed in the ceiling; coordinate the
baffle color with the interior designer. Loudspeaker shall have
integral 30 W transformers for 70 V applications and shall be
mounted as shown on the Contract Drawings. Provide back box
to the electrical contractor for installation. Installation of speakers
in the elevators shall be coordinated with the elevator consultant.
Accepted Products:
1. Tannoy
2. Community Distributed Series
3. Approved equal
B. Loudspeaker Type B - 5” Ceiling mounted coaxial loudspeaker, it

shall have minimum efficiency of 89 dB 1W/1M and nominal
dispersion of 90° conical. Loudspeaker to be mounted flushed in
the ceiling and shall have an IP rating 54 suitable for use in wet
areas; coordinate the baffle color with the Consultant.
Loudspeaker shall have integral 30 W transformers for 70 V

applications and shall be mounted and tapped as shown on the

Contract Drawings. Provide back box to the electrical contractor
for installation. Accepted Products:
1. Apart
2. Community Distributed Series
3. Approved equal
C. Loudspeaker Type C - 6.5” Ceiling mounted coaxial loudspeaker:

1 x 165mm (6.5”) coaxial driver. Loudspeaker shall have frequency
response of 75 Hz-30 kHz (-3dB), sensitivity of 91 dB 1W/1M, and
nominal dispersion of 120° conical. Loudspeaker to be mounted
flushed in the ceiling; coordinate the baffle color with the interior
designer. Loudspeaker shall have integral 60 W transformers for 70
V applications and shall be mounted as shown on the contract
drawings. Provide back box to the electrical contractor for
installation. Coordinate with elevator consultant for elevator
installations. Accepted Products:
1. Tannoy
2. Community Distributed Design Series
3. Approved equal
D. Loudspeaker Type D - 8” Ceiling mounted coaxial loudspeaker:

1x 200mm (8”) Dual Concentric, point source, constant directivity.
Loudspeaker shall have frequency response of 75 Hz-30 kHz (-3dB),
minimum efficiency of 92 dB 1W/1M and nominal dispersion of 90°
conical. Loudspeaker to be mounted flushed in the ceiling;
coordinate the baffle color with the interior designer. Loudspeaker
shall have integral 60 W transformers for 70 V applications and shall
be mounted as shown on the contract drawings. Provide back
box to the electrical contractor for installation. Accepted
Products:
1. Tannoy
3. Approved Equal
E. Loudspeaker Type H- In wall loudspeaker enclosure shall feature a

6.5” (165 mm) point source driver and a 1” (25 mm) titanium
transducer with UV/weather resistant OL94V-0 ABS construction for
structural integrity. 1x 200mm (8”) Dual Concentric, point source,
constant directivity. Loudspeaker shall have frequency response of
75 Hz-51 kHz (-3dB), minimum efficiency of 92 dB 1W/1M and
nominal dispersion of 90° conical. It shall have 8 Ω impedance and

program power of 180W. Loudspeaker shall have integral 60 W

transformers for 70 V applications and shall be mounted as shown
on the contract drawings. Coordinate the color and mounting
methods with the interior designer. Provide back box to the
electrical contractor for installation. Accepted Products:
1. Tannoy with steel back can.
2. Community Distributed Design Series with steel back can.
3. Approved Equal
F. Loudspeaker Type K- The surface mounted loudspeaker shall

feature a 4.5 driver unit. Loudspeaker shall have frequency
response of 90 Hz-25 kHz (-3 dB), it shall have a system sensitivity of
88 dB 1W/1M and nominal dispersion of 90° conical. Loudspeaker
shall have integral 30W transformers for 70 V applications and shall
be mounted as shown on the contract drawings. The loudspeaker
shall be weather resistant and shall be capable of handling
extreme outdoor temperatures and water resistant. Coordinate
the color and mounting methods with the interior designer.
Accepted Products:
1. Tannoy
3. Approved Equal
G. Loudspeaker Type L -The surface mounted loudspeaker shall

feature a 6” (150 mm) driver. Loudspeaker shall have frequency
response of 80Hz – 20 kHz (-3dB),120 watts program, 89dB 1W/1M
sensitivity, 8Ω impedance, 90° dispersion. Loudspeaker shall have
integral 60 W transformers for 70 V applications and shall be
mounted as shown on the contract drawings. It shall have an IP
rating of IP 65 .Coordinate the color and mounting methods with
the interior designer. Accepted Products:
1. Tannoy
2. Electro voice
3. Approved equal
H. Loudspeaker Type M - The surface mounted loudspeaker shall

feature an 8” (200 mm) woofer with a 1” (25 mm) titanium driver.
Loudspeaker shall have a frequency response of 65 Hz – 30 kHz (-
3dB), 150 watts program, 91dB 1W/1M sensitivity, 8Ω impedance,
90° dispersion. Loudspeaker shall have integral 60 W transformers
for 70 V applications and shall be mounted as shown on the
contract drawings. The loudspeaker shall be weather resistant and

shall be capable of handling extreme outdoor temperatures and

water resistant. Coordinate the color and mounting methods with
the interior designer. Accepted Products:
1. Tannoy
3. Approved equal
I. Loudspeaker Type Q. Landscape loudspeaker with 60° dispersion.

Loudspeaker shall have a frequency response of 60Hz - 20 kHz
±3db. Mount 50W transformer for 70 Volt applications inside
speaker cavity high enough to ensure that it will not be sub-
merged in standing water. It shall have a non-corrosive enclosure
Refer to and construct all special mounting details as shown on
contract drawings. Contractor shall field coordinate the color and
placement with the Landscape Consultant. Accepted Products:
1. Sonance
2. Bose
3. Approved equal
J. Loudspeaker Type R. Shall be digital beam steering self-powered

loudspeaker. Shall feature 8x4” LF diver, 8x4” LF diver and 8x1” HF
driver. Loudspeaker shall have frequency response of 110Hz – 20
kHz, 120° horizontal dispersion and variable between 10 - 100
degrees vertical dispersion, aiming angle limit +/-70 degrees. It
shall have an amplifier channel of 24x100w RMS @ 4ohms.
Loudspeaker mounting height to be determined from the contract
drawings. Coordinate the color and mounting methods with the
interior designer. Loudspeaker shall be mounted as shown on the
Contract Drawings.
1. Tannoy
2. Renkus Heinz
3. Approved equal
K. Loudspeaker Type S. 12” Ceiling mounted subwoofer with Kevlar-

reinforced 300 mm (12 inch) subwoofer driver woofer with 75 mm
(3 inch) voice-coil. Loudspeaker shall have frequency response of
34Hz – 3.5 kHz (-3dB) frequency response. Loudspeaker shall have
integral 60 W transformers for 70 V applications, 93dB 1W/1M
sensitivity and 8Ω impedance. Speaker to be mounted flushed in
the ceiling; Coordinate the color and mounting methods with the
interior designer. Loudspeaker shall be mounted as shown on the

Contract Drawings. Provide back box to the electrical contractor

for installation. Accepted Products:
1. Tannoy
2. Community
3. Approved equal
L. Control room monitor speaker - Audio monitor loudspeaker shall

be self-powered, shall have 200mm (8”) low/mid frequency driver
and 25mm (1”) soft dome high frequency driver, frequency
response of 42 Hz to 43 kHz, Maximum SPL of 114 dB, Distortion is
less than 0.4 %, crossover frequency 1.8Khz. Power Output shall be
of 100 Watts, LF/Mid-Range: 75 Watts, HF: 25 Watts THD: < 0.4 % EQ
Options, HF EQ Settings: -1.5 dB HF Cut/Neutral / +1.5 dB HF Boost,
Crossover Frequency: 1.8 kHz. Accepted Products:
1. Yamaha
2. Tannoy
3. Approved Equal
M. The hotel guestrooms and Apartments have the below types of

loudspeakers speakers:
1. Sound Bar (Type-1) – This sound bar shall be an

operator/client supplied equipment for the Royal suites,
Presidential and Penthouses. The AV contractor shall be
involved in the system connectivity and configuration. The
contractor shall provide all the necessary cables for system
connectivity. Refer drawings for the locations.
2. Surround Sound (Type-2) - This speaker shall have surround

sound from 7 speakers all built into one cabinet with 8”
subwoofer loudspeaker. This shall have seven powerful Class
D digital amplifiers with a minimum of 600watts total with low-
power consumption. Features like Apple Airplay and
Bluetooth for wireless music streaming (with Ethernet option)
shall also be supported. The speaker system shall also consists
of 2 × 1” tweeters, 4 × 5¼” woofers and 1 × 8” subwoofer. The
system shall have a class D power amplifier with 589 (2x32,
4x100, 1x125) watt output. The frequency range shall be 30 Hz
to 20 kHz (-3dB). Coordinate the colour and mounting
methods with the interior designer. Accepted Products:
a. Geneva
b. Bose 5.1 system

c. Approved Equal
3. Sound Bar (Type-3) –– This sound bar shall be an

operator/client supplied equipment for the hotel guestrooms
and residence apartments. The AV contractor shall be
connectivity. Refer drawings for the locations.
N. Rack mount Audio Monitors - An extremely compact, rack mount

monitor, occupying only 1U of Rackspace. The unit features two
small elliptical loudspeakers driven by two, independent,
balanced-input amplifiers with individual channel volume controls.
These shall be used for checking the presence or content of a
source and shall not be for determining the audio quality. Uses
might include line listening, talkback monitoring during events like
broadcast, video dubbing, multimedia and teleconferencing
applications. Powerful 98dB SPL, blowout-proof speakers.
Headphone output with dedicated volume control, auto speaker
mute when in use. Stereo or dual mono operation is possible.
Accepted Products:
1. Wohler
2. Canford
3. Approved Equal
2.6 CONTROL COMPUTERS

A. Rack Mounted Computers – Rack mounted industrial grade PC
with the most current processor and highest performance RAM at
the time of installation. Two RS-232 ports, RAID 1 HD, high speed,
modem, Ethernet card, remote client/server software
application. 15" LCD monitor, keyboard and mouse in a rack slide
out configuration. (Quantity: 1 for DSP monitoring and control for
PA/BGM and Ballroom systems)
2.7 VIDEO SOURCE EQUIPMENT

A. Blu-ray Player. Multi format playback including Blu-Ray, DVD, CD,
CD-R, CD-RW, VCD, and Device output shall support Composite,
HDMI. Audio output shall be SPDIF, analog audio. Shall have RS232
control port or Ethernet port for control. Provide rack mount kits for
rack installations. Unit shall have infrared remote control
capabilities also. Accepted products:
1. Denon

2. OPPO
3. Approved Equal
B. Wireless Presentation Gateway. This system shall able to wirelessly

present PowerPoint, Excel, Word and PDF documents, as well as
photos, on the room display from mobile device, MacBook and PC
laptops connected. This system shall be connected via the local
Wi-Fi network to start sharing content from a portable device. The
system shall have a moderator mode to ensure only approved
content is displayed. This feature shall be available within all the
meeting room, boardrooms and ballroom. Accepted products:
1. Extron
2. Wow vision
3. Approved Equal
C. HD Video Camera for video Conferencing System. The Cameras

shall support high definition video transmission up to 1080p60 .The
12x zoom capability and wide panning radius. Output formats:
SMPTE 296M 1280 x720p, 50, 60, SMPTE 274M 1920 x 1080, 60/50.
Provide mount kit as shown on the drawings. Accepted Products,
1. Polycom
2. Vaddio
3. Approved equal
2.8 VIDEO – PROCESSING EQUIPMENT

A. Digital Video Matrix Switcher DV-SW TYPE 1 - Provide a
configurable matrix switcher that shall support digital and analog
video and audio signals for distribution and routing of local and
remote sources and destinations. It shall support 32x32, 32x16,
32x8, 16x16, 16x8 configuration. The matrix switcher shall support a
modular, hot swappable input and output board design. The
matrix switcher shall support a mix of digital and analog source
signal types through interchangeable modular input boards.
Audio and video signals may be routed independently (break-
away routing). The matrix shall support the extension of Ethernet
data from a third party network switch and pass-through the
Ethernet data to remote transmitters and / or receivers. The unit
shall be HDCP compliant and shall provide EDID management
between connected devices. The unit shall be rack mountable.
Accepted Products:
1. Extron.

2. Crestron
3. Approved equal.
B. Digital Video Matrix Switcher DV-SW TYPE 2 - Provide a

configurable matrix switcher that shall support digital and analog
video and audio signals for distribution and routing of local and
remote sources and destinations. It shall support 8x8, 8x4
configuration. The matrix switcher shall support a modular, hot
swappable input and output board design. The matrix switcher
shall support a mix of digital and analog source signal types
through interchangeable modular input boards. Audio and video
signals may be routed independently (break-away routing). The
matrix shall support the extension of Ethernet data from a third
party network switch and pass-through the Ethernet data to
remote transmitters and / or receivers. The unit shall be HDCP
compliant and shall provide EDID management between
connected devices. The unit shall be rack mountable. Accepted
Products:
1. Extron
2. Crestron
3. Approved equal.
C. Digital Video Matrix Switcher DV-SW TYPE 3 - Provide a fixed I/O

matrix switcher with an integrated audio DSP unit that shall
support a minimum of up to 5 inputs and 2 outputs for distribution
and routing of HDCP-compliant digital video and embedded
digital audio signals. Rack-mountable digital video matrix for
HDMI video and embedded digital audio. Digital processed
audio and video signals may be routed independently (break-
away routing). The matrix shall support the extension of Ethernet
data from a third party network switch and pass-through the
Ethernet data to remote transmitters and / or receivers. The unit
shall be HDCP compliant and shall provide EDID management
between connected devices. Accepted Products:
1. Extron
2. Crestron
3. Approved equal.
D. Digital Video Presentation Switcher (for Interview Room) – Digital

video presentation switcher shall have matrix switcher, integrated
control system and professional audio DSP with AEC. It Shall have
following minimum specification: HDCP compliant, support EDID,
HDMI data rate 10.2 Gbps, maximum pixel clock 300MHz,

Deep Color up to 12-bit, 3D, and HD lossless audio formats,

integrated audio de-embedding feature, Control COM ports,
Relays and I/O ports for controlling the AV and room
environment. Refer block diagram for inputs / outputs
configuration. Accepted products:
1. Extron
2. Crestron
3. Approved Equal
E. Streaming and recording device (provision for future). Provide an

audio and video media processor that records, streams, and
outputs a digital video signal comprising up to two source
windows of high-resolution computer-video, high-definition video,
or standard video with background image and metadata. Rack
mountable enclosure for recording, streaming, and direct display
of video and audio output shall. Provide one 10/100/1000 BASE-T
RJ-45 network connection for: Live streaming, Transport of
recording to network storage, Access to embedded web
interface, Interfacing with AV control systems. Automatically
manage EDID communication between the display and
connected HDMI sources. Accepted Products:
1. Extron
2. Crestron
3. Approved equal.
F. Camera Video switcher (provision for future) - The switcher shall

feature a minimum of four SDI inputs, one DVI-D input, two SDI
outputs, and one DVI-D output. A Multi Viewer Display function
shall allow to split the screen in eight different ways, and a Frame
Synchronizer ensures easy, high-quality switching. It shall support a
variety of HD/SD formats, including 1080/24PsF, as standard.
System frequency is 59.94 Hz/50 Hz/24 Hz switchable. Accepted
products:
1. Panasonic
2. Sony
3. Approved equal
G. Video Conference Codec - Provide Video Conferencing System

with the following minimum specifications:
1. Video Standards and Protocols: H.261, H.239, H.263 & H.264

Video Error Concealment

4. Video Input : 1-3 HDMI input, HD camera input , VGA
5. Video Output: 2-3 HDMI , VGA
6. Content Video Resolution: Resolutions supported: WUXGA

(1920X1200), HD (1920 x 1080i), HD (1920 x 1080p), WSXGA+
(1680 x 1050), SXGA (1280x 1024), SVGA (800 x 600).
7. Output: WUXGA (1920X1200), HD (1920 x1080), SXGA+ (1400 x

1050), SXGA (1280 x 1024).
8. HD Camera : 1920 x 1080 CMOS imager, 4X- 12X optical

zoom, Horizontal Field of View shall be up to 72°.
9. Audio Input : 2 x microphone arrays supported, 1 x stereo

audio-in (RCA)
10. Audio Standards and Protocols : G.722.1 Annex C, 7 kHz

bandwidth with G.722, G.722.1, 3.4 kHz bandwidth with
G.711, G.728, G.729A, Automatic gain control, Automatic
noise suppression, Keyboard noise reduction, Live music
mode, Instant adaptation echo cancellation, Audio error
concealment
11. Other Supported Standards: H224/H.281,H.323 Annex Q,

H0225,H0245,H.241,H.239 BFCP (RFC 4562), TIP
12. Network
1. IPv4 and IPV6 support
2. RS232 with API support
3. H.323 and /or SIP up to 6 Mbps.
4. Microsoft® Office Communications Server integration,

Microsoft® ICE support, Microsoft® Lync™ Support
Accepted products:
1. Polycom
2. Cisco
3. Approved Equal
2.9 VIDEO – PROJECTORS & MOUNTS

A. Video Projector Type 1- 16:9 Aspect Ratio Video Projector, Native
Resolution: 1920 x 1080 pixels, Light output: minimum 14,000-12,000
ANSI Lumens, 3 Chip DLP and Contrast ratio: 2500:1 or better.
Horizontal and vertical lens shift. Provide HDMI, HDBaseT, HD15 pin,

DVI-D. Unit to have RS 232 / Ethernet port for remote control.

Network (LAN) controllable for content uploading and
management software. Provide appropriate lens and spare lamp.
Contractor to provide mounting bracket as indicated on the
drawings. Accepted Products:
1. Christie
2. Panasonic
3. Approved equal
B. Video Projector Type 2 - 16:9 Aspect Ratio Video Projector, Native

Resolution: 1920 x 1080 pixels, Light output: minimum 10,000-8000
ANSI Lumens, 3 Chip DLP and Contrast ratio: 10,000:1 or better.
management software. Provide appropriate lens, a spare lamp.
Contractor to provide mounting support as indicated on the
drawings. Accepted Products:
1. Christie
2. Panasonic
3. Approved equal
C. Video Projector Type 3 - 16:9 Aspect Ratio Video Projector, Native

Resolution: 1920 x 1080 pixels, Light output: minimum 6500-8000
ANSI Lumens. 1 Chip DLP, Contrast ratio: 2,500:1 or better.
management software. Provide appropriate lens, a spare lamp
and a mounting bracket as indicated on the contract drawings.
Accepted Products:
1. Christie
2. Panasonic
3. Approved equal
D. Video Projector Type 4 - 16:9 Aspect Ratio Video Projector, Native

Resolution: 1920 x 1080 pixels, Light output: minimum 4000-6000
ANSI Lumens. 1 Chip DLP, Contrast ratio: 2,500:1 or better.
management software. Provide appropriate lens, a spare lamp

and a mounting bracket as indicated on the contract drawings.

Accepted Products:
1. Christie
2. Panasonic
3. NEC
4. Approved equal
E. Scissor Lift - Motorized Video Projector Lift with video interface

control option, low voltage control option for third party control.
Verify load, drop extension prior to ordering. Coordinate exact
location on the site. Ceiling trim kit and a panel color shall be
coordinated prior to ordering. Projector pan to be lowered and
raised by three sets of stabilizing scissors positioned on sides and
rear of pan and two 5 mm diameter cables with 4,200 foot-
pounds tensile strength per cable. Mechanism operated by
230VAC, 50 HZ, instantly reversible, thermally protected, lifetime
lubricated, right angle gear motor and chain drive system.
Provide lift with fail-safe inertial safety belt system. Cable
management system: Provide lift with means for attachment of
cables to rear scissor to eliminate cord tangles. Closure panel:
Steel closure panel suspended below projector from rods
attached to projector pan. Closure shall allow mounting of an
acoustical or finished ceiling panel to match the surrounding
areas. Acceptable products:
1. Draper
2. Audi pack
3. Approved equal
2.10 VIDEO - PROJECTION SCREENS

A. Front Projection Screens (Motorized) - Projection Screens to be
16:9 as indicated on contract drawings. Screen Case: Projection
screen case to be recessed in ceiling, case finished white. Back,
top, and front of extruded aluminum. End caps of stamped steel.
Bottom panels form slot for passage of viewing surface, easily
removable for access. Symmetrical case to allow for left or right-
hand motor location, Case may be mounted with 3/8" threaded
rod at ends or along length, with lag screws through brackets, or
with wire in a grid ceiling. Screen Case shall feature an internal
junction box, allowing it to be installed and wired to the adjacent
electrical power outlet wires at an early stage of construction.
The Junction box shall have a plug-in style connector accepting
the mating half of the connector, from the motorized roller/fabric
assembly. Screen: The white diffusing surface, broad light

dispersion and spectral uniformity, Panoramic viewing angle and
true color rendition. Viewing surface securely attached to roller at
top and at bottom to weighted dowel. Provide each side of
viewing surface with black masking borders and tab-guide cable
tensioning system to maintain even lateral tension and to hold
surface flat. Locations and sizes: As scheduled in the drawings.
Provide extra drop length to lower screen within 3.5 feet of
finished floor. Motor: 230 VAC, 50 HZ, [5] wire, instantly reversible,
lifetime lubricated, and equipped with internal thermal overload
protector, electric brake, and pre-set accessible limit switches.
Mount inside screen roller on rubber vibration insulators. Provide a
Low voltage Control station with 3 button switches for up, down
and stop functions and low voltage control interface for third
party control system. Wiring from switches or receivers to low
voltage control unit to be 24 V. Acceptable products:
1. Draper
2. Da-Lite
3. Approved equal
2.11 VIDEO - DISPLAYS:

A. 120” Professional Cinema Display- Professional LCD display with
direct LED backlit display with uniform brightness. Display shall
have ultra HD resolution (3840x2160), Contrast Ratio: 3500:1,
Viewing Angle: 176 Degrees. Inputs: HDMI x4, USBx1. It shall also
support SPDIF Digital Audio 5.1, Analog Stereo Output. Control
shall be RS-232. Install as per manufacturer recommendations.
Provide manufacturer's recommended mounting bracket.
Acceptable products:
1. Sharp
2. Approved equal
B. 80-85” LED backlit LCD. Provide latest technology professional

series LED backlit LCD or full LED or better. Display shall have ultra
HD resolution (3840x2160), Panel Technology: IPS, Built-In speakers,
Built-In Tuner, Contrast Ratio: 1400:1, Viewing Angle: 178 Degrees.
Inputs: HD (DVI, DisplayPort, HDMI, HDBaseT), RGB, Composite,
and audio inputs, Control: Ethernet / RS-232. Install as per
manufacturer recommendations. Provide manufacturer's
recommended mounting bracket. Acceptable products:
1. LG
2. Panasonic
3. Sharp
4. Approved equal
C. 60-65” LED backlit LCD. Provide latest technology professional

series LED backlit LCD or full LED or better. Display device shall
meet the following minimal requirements: Native Display
Resolution: 1920 x 1200 or better, Panel Technology: IPS, Built-In
speakers, Built-In Tuner, Contrast Ratio: 1400:1, Viewing Angle: 178
Degrees. Inputs: HD (DVI, DisplayPort, HDMI, HDBaseT), RGB,
Composite, and audio inputs, Control: Ethernet / RS-232. Install as
per manufacturer recommendations. Provide manufacturer's
1. LG
2. Panasonic
3. Sharp
4. Approved equal
D. 55” LED backlit LCD. Provide latest technology professional series

LED backlit LCD or full LED or better. Display device shall meet the
following minimal requirements: Native Display Resolution: 1920 x
1200 or better, Panel Technology: IPS, Built-In speakers, Built-In
Tuner, Contrast Ratio: 1400:1, Viewing Angle: 178 Degrees. Inputs:
HD (DVI, DisplayPort, HDMI, HDBaseT), RGB, Composite, and
audio inputs, Control: Ethernet / RS-232. Install as per
manufacturer recommendations. Provide manufacturer's
1. LG
2. Panasonic
3. Sharp
4. Approved equal
E. 50-55” Digital Signage Display - Provide latest technology

professional series LED backlit LCD or full LED. Display device shall
speakers, Contrast Ratio: 1300:1, Viewing Angle: 178 Degrees.
and audio inputs, Control: Ethernet / RS-232. For Digital signage
application the screen shall be capable of working 24x7. Install as

1. LG
2. Panasonic
3. Sharp
4. Approved equal
F. 40-45” Digital Signage Display. Provide latest technology

professional series LED backlit LCD or full LED. Display device shall
speakers, Contrast Ratio: 1200:1, Viewing Angle: 178 Degrees.
and audio inputs, Control: Ethernet / RS-232. For Digital signage
application the screen shall be capable of working 24x7. Install as
1. LG
2. Panasonic
3. Sharp
4. Approved equal
G. 10” Digital Signage Displays. Device shall meet the following

minimal requirements Native Display Resolution: 1920 x 1200
(16:9), Color System: PAL, NTSC, SECAM, Video Signals: 480i, 480p,
720p, 1080i, Contrast Ratio: 900:1, Viewing Angle: 175 Degrees,
Built in high quality sound system, Inputs: RGBHV, Component,
Composite, Y/C and audio inputs, Control: RS-232 and IR control.
Digital signage application the screen shall be capable of
working 24x7.Provide manufactures recommended mounting
bracket. Coordinate with elevator consultant for elevator
installations. Acceptable products:
1. LG
2. Samsung
3. Sharp
4. Approved equal
H. Bracket for Flat Panel Displays - (Wall mount) - Device shall consist
of two part assembly, with wall mount (horizontal rails) and display
mount (vertical rail) components. It shall be designed to allow for
horizontal and vertical adjustment post installation. The design shall
feature quick release lock to allow the panel to be removed easily.

It shall be low profile design to fit the panel close to the wall.
Coordinate exact location on the site. These brackets shall be used
in public circulation areas. The design must not allow for tilt. The
bracket shall be painted if required to suit the Flat Panel and not be
visible once panel mounted. The wall mount plate shall allow for
cable management through it for power, signal, data etc. to the
Flat Panel Display. The design is not to be custom fabricated and
must meet accepted standards. Acceptable products:
1. Manufacturer's own brand (to match Flat Panel Display)
2. Chief
3. Vogels
4. Approved equal
I. Bracket for Flat Panel Displays - (Articulated Arm Wall mount) –

Provide the bracket able to carry 47-60” size flat panels. These
brackets shall be used for all the hotel guestrooms and residence
apartments. Contractor to refer layout drawing to determine the
location and quantity of the articulated arm bracket. Shall have
180 degree turn and 20 degree tilt able.
1. Manufacturer's own brand (to match Flat Panel Display)
2. Chief
3. Vogels
4. SMS
5. Approved equal
J. Mirror TV - Shall be integrated into the mirror. TV shall have the

following minimum specification 22” screen, Display type: TFT Thin
Film Transistor, LED backlit, picture format: 16:9, resolution: 1920 x,
viewing angle H 170/V160, brightness: 250 cd/sqm, contrast 1000:1,
video input: HDMI, audio output: 2 x 5W RMS @ 8Ω per channel.
Provide capacitive touch pad with the TV control buttons on the
mirror adjacent to the TV. The mirror shall allow image area of the
screen to appear in the on position and completely vanish when
the TV turned off. The screen surface shall be 100% homogeneous
mirror surface on the front when turned the screen turned off. The
mirror shall have following specification. Transmission of image area
60% +/-, reflection of screen image area 40% +/- 5, refection of
mirror surrounding screen image 40% +/-5. Contractor to coordinate
with ID drawings for the mirror TV location and mirror dimension.

1. ad notam
2. Electric Mirror
3. Approved Equal
K. HITV (Hotel Interactive Television) – The HITV for the hotel

guestrooms and residence apartments shall be an operator/client
supplied equipment. The AV contractor shall be involved in the
system connectivity and configuration. The contractor shall provide
all the necessary cables for system connectivity. Refer drawings for
locations and size.
2.12 AUDIO & VIDEO NETWORK

A. Digital Transmitter DV-TX (Floor Box mount). Provide a two input
twisted pair transmitter designed to mount in a variety of floor
boxes that shall support long haul distribution of video, audio,
control and Ethernet extension over a shielded CAT6 cable. Floor
box mountable transmitter for the long distance transmission of
HDMI, RGBHV, audio, control, and Ethernet extension. The unit
shall automatically switch to the active input and provides
automatic EDID management between connected devices
Accepted Products:
1. Extron
2. Crestron
3. Approved equal
B. Digital Transmitter DV-TX (Wall mount) - Provide a two input

twisted pair transmitter designed to mount in a variety of floor
boxes that shall support long haul distribution of video, audio,
control and Ethernet extension over a shielded CAT6 cable. Floor
box mountable transmitter for the long distance transmission of
HDMI, audio, control, and Ethernet extension. The unit shall
automatically switch to the active input and provides automatic
EDID management between connected devices Accepted
Products:
4. Extron
5. Crestron
6. Approved equal
C. Digital Transmitter DV-RX. Provide a twisted pair receiver that shall

support the distribution of video, audio, control, and Ethernet
extension over a shielded CAT6 cable. Support HDMI
specifications including 1080p/60 Deep Color, 2K, data rates up
to 6.75 Gbps, 3D, and HD lossless audio formats Accepted

Products:
7. Extron
8. Crestron
9. Approved equal
D. Media Hub - This device shall be used by the hotel guests and
tenants to facilitate charging of mobile devices and to stream
content to the HITV system. This shall be an operator/client
supplied equipment, however, the AV contractor shall be
connectivity. The contractor shall also provide wherever
necessary a transmitter and receiver to ensure that proper signal
transmission is established between the media hub and display.
E. HDMI Audio De-embedder: With analog stereo and digital S/PDIF

audio outputs. HDCP compliant. HDMI 1.3 compatible with EDID
minder and automatic input cable equalization. Accepted
products:
1. Extron
2. Hall Research
3. Approved equal
2.13 REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Control System:
1. Utilize a real time, event driven, multi-tasking, multi-threaded

operating system with Operating System having Minimum
Characteristics:
a. Modular architecture supports multiple simultaneous

running programs.
b. Real-time, preemptive multithreaded/multitasking kernel.
c. Vector floating point coprocessor.
2. Control Processor shall support direct communication with the

following devices:
a. Connected Ethernet devices.
b. Devices connected to built-in control ports.

c. Proprietary control network devices.
d. BACnet IP devices.
e. Control processors of same type.
3. The processor shall support a 1 GB RAM with built-in Flash of 4

GB, USB or MMC slot of up to 32 GB and shall have external
storage that supports up to 1 TB .
4. Control processor shall utilize a FAT32 file structure.
5. The network shall support 10/100/1000BaseT Ethernet ports with

one being the primary LAN port with isolated WAN connection
and the other being the subnet port which shall automatically
discover and assign IP addressed to compatible devices.
6. The Built-in SNMP support enables integration with third-party IT

management software, allowing network administrators to
manage and control systems on the network in an IT- friendly
format.
7. Onboard Control Ports The process shall use the Ethernet port,
the COM ports and IR ports to interface directly with all of the
centralized AV sources, video displays and other devices. Eight
programmable relay ports are included for controlling window
shades, projection screens, lifts, power controllers, and other
contact-closure actuated equipment. Eight “Versiport” I/O
ports enable the integration of occupancy sensors, power
sensors, door switches, or anything else that provides a dry
contact closure, low-voltage logic, or 0-10 Volt DC signal.
8. The processor provides three control card expansion slots on its

rear panel which cater to additional control ports.
9. Native support for the BACnet/IP communication protocol

provides a direct interface to third-party building
management systems over Ethernet, simplifying integration
with HVAC, security, fire & life safety, voice & data, lighting,
shades, and other systems. Using BACnet/IP, each system runs
independently with the ability to communicate together on
one platform for a truly smart building.
10. Provide system with all necessary programming software. The

contractor shall provide source code with a competent,
factory trained technician, familiar with the system source
code on site during final checkout and acceptance. Source
code and copyrights shall become the property of the
Employer at final acceptance of the audio visual systems and
shall be forwarded to the Employer with original code and all

programming software and two (2) back-up copies in CD

ROM format.
11. The manufacturer or Contractor shall perform all system

programming prior to delivery to the jobsite. Provide control
system complete with all necessary power supplies,
interconnecting cables and connectors and other accessory
items to insure a complete and working control system
conforming to the design intent and parameters as shown on
Contract Drawings. Control System Integrated Master with
audio/video switching. All control system programming shall
be done under the supervision of the manufacturer’s
representative. All configuration files shall be as per
manufacturer’s recommendations and must be approved by
the client and the consultant. All programming shall be the
responsibility of the contractor. Accepted products:
a. Crestron
b. AMX
c. Approved Equal
B. Mini Control Processor: It shall be a compact and cost-effective

control system designed to provide control and monitoring for a
single display device, a small AV system, lighting and shading. The
POE based mini processor shall have one or two RS-232 / IR / Relay
port. Accepted products:
1. Crestron
2. AMX
3. Approved Equal
2.14 SYSTEM CONTROL TOUCH PANELS

A. 7-8.5” Wireless Touch Panel (TP-1): TFT active matrix LCD shall
support 1008 x 588 resolution or higher. Viewing angle shall be 88
degrees horizontal, 88 degrees vertical with a brightness of 300
cd/m² and a contrast ratio of 700:1 or better. Touch panel shall
include an anti-glare type surface and support 24 bit color depth
or higher. The wall mount dock and touch panel shall be
passcode enabled in order to prevent theft and unauthorized
access. Accepted Products.
1. Crestron
2. AMX
3. Approved equal
B. 5-7” Wireless Wall mount Touch Panel (TP-2): TFT active matrix LCD
shall support 640x480 resolution or higher. Viewing angle shall be
80 degrees horizontal, 70 degrees vertical with a brightness of 350
include an anti-glare type surface and support 18bit color depth
or higher. The unit shall include a wall mount dock station in
addition to the table dock. The wall mount dock and touch
panel shall be passcode enabled in order to prevent theft and
unauthorized access. Accepted Products.
1. Crestron
2. AMX
3. Approved equal
C. 2.5 -3.5” Touch Panel (TP-3): This POE based TFT active matrix LCD
shall support 240x320 resolution or higher. Viewing angle shall be
75 degrees horizontal, 55 degrees vertical with a brightness of 350
include an anti-glare type surface and support 16 bit color depth
or higher. The wall mount dock and touch panel shall be
passcode enabled in order to prevent theft and unauthorized
access. The unit shall include a wall mount dock station.
Accepted Products.
1. Crestron
2. AMX
3. Approved equal
D. 7” Wired Touch Panel Type 4 (TP-4): Color active matrix LCD shall
support 800x480 resolution or higher. Aspect ratio 15:9.
Capacitive touch screen technology. Viewing angle shall be 60
degrees horizontal, 55 degrees up and 65 degrees down from
center, with a brightness of 200 cd/m² or higher and a contrast
ratio of 350:1 or better. Touch panel shall include an anti-glare
type surface and support 18bit color depth and 8-bit alpha
transparency or higher. Shall support PoE. Acceptable Products.
1. Crestron
2. AMX
3. Approved equal
E. 12-15” Control Room Touch Panel: TFT active matrix LCD shall
support 800x480 resolution or higher. Viewing angle shall be 60
degrees horizontal, 60 degrees vertical, with a brightness of 400

cd/m² or higher and a contrast ratio of 600:1 or better. Touch

panel shall be desk mount. Accepted Products.
1. Crestron
2. AMX
3. Approved equal
2.15 DIGITAL SIGNAGE SYSTEM

A. Digital signage shall be used for entertainment, information and
advertisement within the project. The system shall be used to
show simple text, still images and full-motion video on displays
provided throughout the project. The system shall be able to
deliver specific messages to specific audiences in specific
location and can update content for an up-to-the-minute
information service. The system shall be able to display welcome
messages to visitors, way finding, conference information,
emergency exit information, Display weather information etc.
B. A central IP Based Digital signage system shall be provided for

the building and shall consist of the following:
1. Designer Software & Workstation
2. Content Manager Software & Server
3. Digital Signage - Set Top Box (STB) for each Display
C. General notes
1. Digital Signage System head-end equipment including

Content Manager and Designer Software and Server shall be
located in the Facility server room.
2. The Digital Signage System shall allow distributed IP video,

multimedia messages and graphics to groups of displays or
any specific displays by using the Local Area Network.
3. The Digital Signage System software shall allow the user to

create graphic productions by utilizing motion video, color,
graphics, text, animation, sound design and special effects.
4. The Digital Signage System shall allow for media broadcast

distribution, scheduling and management. All media should
be organized, scheduled, delivered and updated.
5. Each Digital Signage STB shall route the TV feed to the video
display by using the IP streaming feature of the Digital
Signage System.

6. The contractor shall coordinate and refer with the signage

consultant for providing digital signage display with audio
feeds inside the information beacon/totem located at
different location within the project.
7. The Digital signage system shall be integrated with the ticker

display. All flat panel displays provided for digital signage
shall be commercial grade intended for digital signage
application and meant to work 24/7.
D. Content Creation and Designer
1. The content creation system shall be utilized to manage both

the Interactive and the Advertising screens.
2. Create truly dynamic content for both Way finding and

Advertising Networks.
3. Easy to use interface with context sensitive menus.
4. Selectable Pull-down menus in Main and Design screens
5. Right-click menus on objects
6. Multiple Tabs for multiple scripts
7. Snap to guides on design page
8. Export function to different file formats
9. Collect Files feature to simplify gathering up a script and its

media and placing it together in one location
10. Any content element can be “global” (survives page

changes) - even with opacity
11. Content elements (including videos) can play over

background movies
12. Design in portrait-mode and auto rotate on playback
13. Save within Design menu
14. Publish to Content Manager
15. Publish via HTTP/HTTPS, HTML or video in addition to FTP and

UNC
16. Supports 4:3 and 16:9 content creation
17. Real-time image processing and rendering
18. Template creation facility

19. Media support for the following formats:
a. Still image Graphic formats: BMP, GIF, JPEG, PNG, WMF,

etc.
b. Animation: SWF, Animation GIF
c. Sound: WAV, MP3
d. Video: MPEG 1 & 2, AVI, WMV
e. Fonts: OpenType, TrueType
20. Timeslot schedule type to specify a range of time for content

playback
21. Smooth scaling (no “pixilation”)
22. Elements to play over background movies
23. Unlimited mixing of transitions, video & layers
24. Elements keep playing while the next element is transitioning
25. Page keep playing while the next page is transitioning while
keeping element the same
26. Consistent timing
27. Template Creation: Bind the contents of a text element to a

data field or bind a filename of a clip, movie, a background
to a data field
28. Play and Preview in Designer to use the placeholder values

and when publishing to Content Manager, it should
automatically recognize the script as a template.
29. Scaling: Dynamically scale content during playback (e.g.

800x600 at 1024x768, or vice-versa, without having to resort to
external file formats such as flash, or mpeg)
E. Designer Workstation
1. The Designer workstation shall have the configuration as

recommended by the Digital signage manufacturer.
F. Content Testing System
1. The content testing system shall have (1) 32" LED display
comply to the latest and highest resolution available at the
time of installation appear in the international production with
a touch screen overlay.

2. These displays shall be wall mounted on the wall adjacent to

the designer workstation.
3. The content testing system shall have a dedicated (2)

channel player so as to allow pre-testing for the interactive
directories.
G. Content Manager System
1. The Content manager system shall be a server-based

application that schedules and manages the transmissions of
multimedia content to all of the digital signage displays from
any internet connected computer. Advertising, news, training
or other visual communication must be easily distributed to
the multimedia Players via any standard Windows-based
network.
2. Content created using the designer workstation, template

composer, or industry standard applications should be
capable of either been routed to the intended players
automatically or per plan.
3. Content manager system shall be located in the main A/V

room on GF. This system must be capable of remotely
scheduling the power on and power off for all displays so as
to prolong their usable life.
4. The system must be capable of receiving display status

alarms.
5. The control system should have both auditory and visual

alarm indication. The system requires the ability to play live HD
video feeds, playback of HD content, real-time weather and
data.
H. Content Management Application features
1. Content Management Application features shall allow the

necessary control and data storage for all displays. The
system shall have the capacity/bandwidth to provide the
functions described herein and work on the principal of fast
Ethernet network. Processor speeds shall be selected to
ensure steady, continuous picture flow on all screens with no
hangs or buffering.
2. Extensive use of latest programming technologies (Java, J2EE,

Ajax).

3. Media broadcast distribution, scheduling and management.

Utilizing an interface built-in SQL Database back-end for
management of content & player databases
4. Direct creation of playlists in the Content Manager
5. Supports both passive and interactive digital signs
6. Scripts and media to be organized, scheduled, delivered and

updated
7. Easy content creation from templates
8. Create & plan content “channels” & assign to 1 or more

players or group of players
9. Timetable-based scheduling thru rich, browser-based

graphical interface
10. New powerful browser-based interface for creating &

managing Playlists
11. Network monitoring, including Player “health” status etc.
12. Player Health and log views
13. Billing log viewer and reporter with SQL back-end
14. Remote software updates
15. Central management of Player and optional features licenses
16. Role-based user access rights
17. Intelligent file transfer
18. FTP or HTTP/HTTPS Transmission
19. Terrestrial & (multicast) IP-based communication carriers are

supported
20. Auto Scale content to any resolution (resolution independent

of playlists/scripts)
21. Import standard graphics and video
22. Flexible data integration & user customization using Visual

Basic Script, JavaScript or Python
23. Plan-based transmission scheme
24. Group Players by criteria (geography, demographics, etc.)

I. Content Manager Server
1. The content Manager server shall have the configuration as

recommended by the Digital signage manufacturer.
J. Digital Signage Set Top Box
1. The Digital signage set top box shall be small form factor and
shall comply with the latest and highest resolution applicable
at the time of installation from international products and shall
support resolution including 1080p Full HD (25 to 60 Hz) and
shall have no moving parts to wear out, shall have built in
watchdog with automatic failsafe
2. The set top box shall support Dynamic content: RSS feeds,
widgets (weather, clocks, effects), animations, instant
messaging, queue management
3. The system shall be Open platform and shall support

specialized applications like interactive kiosks, video walls
4. The set top box shall support
a. Aspect ratio of 16:9, 16:10, 4:3, custom (horizontal &

vertical)
b. Video output resolution comply to the latest and highest

resolution applicable at the time of installation from
international production including 1080p (1920x1080),
720p (1280x720), XGA (1024x768), WSVGA (1024x640),
WVGA (768x480), 576p (720x576), 480p (720x480), SVGA
(800x600), VGA (640x480)
c. Video connectors: HDMI (incl. digital audio), DVI via

adapter. VGA (DB15 HD connector). Simultaneous use of
HDMI and VGA
d. Still image formats JPEG, PNG, GIF, SVG
e. Supported video codecs MPEG-2, H.264(MPEG-4 AVC)

(resolution up to 1080p; dual stream capable) MPEG-4
ASP, MJPEG (resolution up to 720p) Windows Media 9
(resolution up to D1/SD)
f. Supported audio codecs MPEG audio layer 1/2/3 (MP3),

ITU G.711, G.726, PCM, Microsoft WMA, AAC
g. Media container formats AVI, WMV/WMA, VOB, AIFF,

WAV, MPEG4, MOV (QuickTime)

h. Streaming media protocol MMS, RTSP, RTP, SDP, HTTP; Uni-

& multicast
i. Scripting language JavaScript / ECMAScript, PHP 5.2
K. Accepted Brands:
1. Four winds
2. Symons
3. Scala
4. Approved Equal
2.16 IPTV SYSTEM AND SATELLITE DISHES

A. The IPTV package shall consists of satellite dishes, servers,
hardware’s, software’s and satellite farms. This shall be an
operator supplied equipment however the AV contractor shall be
involved in the system connectivity and configuration.
2.17 GUESTROOM MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS (GRMS)
A. The system shall provide a seamlessly integrated solution for:
1. The advanced energy saving in the guestrooms.
2. The online access control to the guestrooms.
3. The advanced control of the HVAC according to the room

status.
4. The automation of the guestroom lighting.
5. The integration to the Property Management System.
6. The centralized room status monitoring and override control.
7. The report generation on various room status.
8. All components of the system shall be online, controlled by a

central server and monitored by multiple workstation
clients.
9. Guestroom AV system to ‘mute’ in a fire evacuation mode of

the building.
B. Description of the Room Management System

1. The system shall be an integrated solution that combines

access control with guest room management (lighting
control, thermoregulation control, curtain control and room
services) in one system. The system should make it possible
to improve customer service by providing a complete and
varied range of functions for monitoring and optimizing
services to ensure the highest levels of comfort and safety.
At the same time, it should help to save energy and
considerably reduce operating costs.
2. The Room Management System registers all room events

centrally in the front office system, and can distinguish
whether a guest or a member of the service staff or hotel
management entered the room.
3. The Room Management System shall provide extensive

supervisory functions to increase the security of the guest in
the room. Unauthorized door opening, and an emergency
assistance alarm in the room shall be connected to the
Room Management System.
4. The various Room Management System functions shall be

merged with the hotel room data in the front office software
and shall be processed in the background. All functions of
the Room Management System shall be operated via the
front office system and can be evaluated offline at a later
time if required.
5. Each component of the system shall be based on the

concept of distributed intelligence, giving management the
possibility of managing the complex problems of a hotel
from one central control station.
6. Parameters shall be modifiable and information received

concerning any malfunction has to be clearly indicated and
stored for future analysis.
7. The system proposed shall consist of a server that will be

accessed through separate workstations. The server shall
host the core of the application with the database and
communication engine, while the workstations shall run as
thin-clients, accessing the server through any standard web
browser. The proposed system shall be seamlessly integrated
to the PMS (property management system) preferred by the
operator.
8. The Room Management System has to use the existing TCP/IP

infrastructure to network the room control devices. The
system shall be based on MODBUS over IP protocol with a

build in Ethernet port in each room controller. IP Gateways

or converter at the room level or floor level shall not be
acceptable. On a field level the devices should be
networked through a CAT6 connection, in order to make
the most efficient use of the network.
C. Central RMS Server
1. This unit which is equipped with redundant hardware will

serve the following features:
a. Communication engine for all the room hardware.

Through this communication real-time monitoring and
control of all room features will be done.
b. Central logging database for long-term storage of

records. All events occurring in the field are recorded as
they come in chronological order. For ideal scalability
and stability the RMS server system should be based on a
SQL database.
c. Analysis engine for table-based and graphical evaluation

of staff and guests behavior. Reporting tool with
predefined reports to analyze staff efficiency and
workflows of back of house departments.
d. The system must present standard interfaces to allow third

party systems (e.g. Property Management System, VOIP
telephone system, interactive TV system, fire alarm,
emergency power supplies) to interface to it.
e. The server application does not require the client

software to be installed on operator stations. Furthermore,
operators and their teams can access server application
through their mobile phones to retrieve real time data
from every room. The System shall provide a
customizable application for android and tablet PC users,
both for guest an internal use.
D. The Cabling
1. The in-room cabling will adopt 3 Bus star topology in which all
cables will go from the Room Control Unit (RCU) to all the
other field devices (i.e. card reader, card holder, thermostat,
bedside control panel). The type of cable to be used is CAT/6.
All RCUs will then be connected to the building’s structured
cabling system to render the system online.
E. Room Access Control

1. The door lock shall have a room level integration with the
Room management system controller via ZigBee protocol.
Refer security package for door lock specifications.
F. GRMS Room control unit
1. To provide an efficient room management an electronic

room control unit should be installed in each room. This unit
has the task of supervising all room operations. It should
remain constantly in contact with the central server from
which it receives all its operational data. It is crucial that it be
endowed with a backup battery pack to ensure all critical
systems (access control, HVAC and lighting systems) function
normally, without affecting the guest experience, even in the
case of a power outage. The room control unit should be
expandable in order to fit the requirement of different typical
rooms, in case the required features differ from one room to
the other. Room to Server connectivity must be IP based
Room Control Units (RCUs) for fast communication with
monitoring server. Each Room Control Unit (RCU) shall have a
built in Ethernet port (POE) for direct communication with the
floor/Edge switch. Systems requiring room to room cabling
shall not be acceptable. System using Ethernet/IP gateway at
the room level shall not be acceptable. Features to be
supported by the room control unit:
a. Outputs for lighting control of switching circuits
b. Outputs for dimming control
c. Inputs for low voltage light switches
d. Inputs for monitoring of several room statuses (window

contact, door contact, bathroom alarm
e. Outputs for curtain control
f. Outputs for FCU fan speed control
g. Outputs for FCU valve actuator control
h. Support RF communication for wireless bedside panels
i. Ethernet connection (POE) for centralized real time

monitoring and reporting of room status
j. ZigBee antenna for Access Control room level integration.

2. Each unit shall have its dedicated power supply &

independent of the other. Once all the cables have been
connected, the external cover should make all the
connectors inaccessible. The connectors should be
numbered and printed on the metal housing to simplify
cabling operations. The room unit should give a potential free
contact to open any kind of electric lock or door strike that
will be installed on the doors, depending on security
requirement of project.
G. Air Condition Control
1. The thermostat shall be tampered Glass with capacitive

touch buttons. The temperature control module (thermostat)
should include a display to show the temperature measured
by the sensor. The sensor should be integrated in the
thermostat in order to sense the real room temperature.
Operation of the thermostat should be intuitive and user
friendly. The thermostat shall have the following touch
buttons:
a. Button C/F : Celsius /Fahrenheit
b. Button to display External temperature.
c. Button (Freely configurable)
d. Button + /- : Temperature Up/Down
e. Button 1,2,3: Fan speed Low, Medium, High
f. Buttons Auto, Off, ECO
2. It should be possible to adjust the display brightness of the

thermostat, from 0% to 100% in steps of 10, in order to ensure
an undisturbed rest of each individual guest. The brightness of
the thermostat should increase by pressing a button and
decrease again after a programmable time in order not to
disturb the guest during the night.
3. The operator should have the option of controlling the

brightness from the central server, as well as basing it on pre-
programmed time frames (e.g. night/day).
4. The thermostat unit should work with minimum four

temperature set points: “welcome temperature”, “comfort
temperature”, “maintenance temperature”, “room vacant”
temperature. The thermostat unit should have a digital input
for a window contact as well and should be able to stop the
fan coil in case of an open window. The fan coil should start

again once the window is closed. The grace periods within

which the fan coil stops and starts should be adjustable
centrally. The thermostat shall also be endowed with an ECO
button for energy saving settings.
5. The thermostat shall be fitted with an ECO Comfort icon,

which implements an energy saving algorithm on
thermoregulation control and lighting dimming, customizable
by the operator.
6. Each room shall be able to control up to 4 thermostats in

case of multi-bedroom suites or apartments. The RMS supplier
should provide the fan coil unit controllers (FCC) in order to
provide full standalone functionality of the rooms even in
case of fault. The RMS has to integrate at a server head-end
level to the BMS through a standard protocol gateway, in
order to pass all relevant variables of the thermoregulation in
the single rooms. Preferred protocols are Modbus and Bacnet.
Integration to the Building Management System (BMS) at a
room level is not necessary.
H. Glass Touch Switches – Control panels and bedside panels
1. Where ever mentioned, wall mounted glass touch switches

with capacitive touch buttons shall be provided. These units
shall be customizable with option to customize the design and
color. Glass thickness shall not be less than 4 mm. Backlit
Capacitive Touch Buttons shall be provided with the following
control functions
a. On/Off Lighting Control
b. Light Dimming
c. Lighting Scenes
d. Curtain control
e. Room Services (DND, MUR, Laundry Pickup)
2. Design shall be implemented on a range of 2G, 4G, 6G, 8G,

and 10G up to 12Gang Glass Switches with a backlit white
icons on a single back box.
3. The installation shall be simple through Extractable clamps for

3 x 3 BS box. Switches requiring bigger BS boxes or non-
standard installation boxes shall not be acceptable
I. Presence detection

1. Shall be done through a combined logic of door contact

and distributed motion sensor.
a. Keycard occupancy readers shall not be acceptable.
b. Motion sensors shall be built in the glass switches and run

on the same glass switches Bus cable.
c. Motion Sensors shall have a horizontal coverage of at

least 90 degrees.
d. Ceiling mounted motion sensor in the balcony shall be

linked to the GRMS system such that it turns off the
balcony lights in the absence of motion. The motion
sensor shall have an 11m diameter coverage pattern with
360° look-down capability. The sensor shall be weather
resistant and suitable for outdoor application. It shall be
resistant to extreme high temperatures, water sprays, dust
and humidity.
e. Balcony/Door Motion sensor- The Magnetic Contact

sensor shall be recessed for the balcony doors to set the
HVAC to a set point. It shall be used not only on surfaces
such as wood or plastic, but also on metal frames as long
as they contain non-ferrous metals, such as aluminum.
These magnetic sensors shall be endowed with NC
contact and protection line.
2. After opening the door the guest the following shall occur
automatically:
a. Power supply to all the equipment will be turned on

(power supply to some of the equipment, which is
normally off as part of the energy management shall also
be turned on)
b. The system shall cool the room to a temperature that was

set by the guest before he/she left the room, within a few
minutes.
3. After leaving the room (cut off time to be set by the operator
up to a maximum of 30 minutes), the following shall occur
automatically:
a. Power supply to all the power outlets expect to

those of Mini Bar, Computer/Fax, FCU shall be turned off
b. All lights shall be turned off
c. System will automatically regulate the room temperature

to the hotel preset temperature.

J. Bell Chime
1. Bell sound shall be equally distributed all over the room or

suite.
a. Bells shall be built in the glass switches
b. Bells shall run on the same bus of the glass outdoor

switches
K. Functional description of RMS operational Software
1. The server and server application should allow a minimum of

100 contemporary connections from client applications like:
reception, housekeeping, maintenance, management,
security, engineering, administration, HR, accounting etc.
L. RMS server hardware and software requirements
1. The RMS operating software should run on the following

system configuration:
a. Enterprise server typical hardware configuration (single or

multiple Quad core CPU), 8GB RAM, RAID10 hard drive
configuration with battery backup RAID controller and
redundant power supplies.
b. Windows Server 2003 (or higher) as server operating

system.
c. Windows XP (or higher) as client operating system.
d. Microsoft SQL 2005 (or higher) as database engine
M. RMS workstation hardware and software requirements
1. Workstation typical hardware configuration (single Dual or

Quad core
2. CPU), 4GB RAM, 160GB RAM
3. Windows XP or higher
N. Workstation software clients
1. The system software shall be based on the WINDOWS

standards for user interface design. Help texts guide the user
through the program. The GUI has to be accessible
exclusively through standard web-browser from the remote

client workstations. Installed RMS software on the reception,

housekeeping or any other back of house workstation should
not be acceptable. The access to the RMS operating
software should be protected by the integrated Windows
security inbuilt in the Microsoft Active Directory. An option for
SSO (single sign-on should be available). The authorization
level of each user defines the features of the RMS operation
software that will be accessible. A record of major system
entries, indicating the respective user's identification, as well
as all activities of each user should be logged in the main
RMS database and accessible anytime for verifications.
O. Interface with Property Management System
1. The Room Management System software shall provide

interfaces to commercially available Front Office/Hotel
Operating Software (HOS) packages. The relevant data for
Room Management System can be transferred from the front
office system into the room management system via this
interface and processed there. This connection is used, for
example, to assign room numbers and guests' names.
P. Functional requirements of the GRMS panels shall indicate the
following:
2. Door panel: DP - The panel shall be just outside the rooms on
the corridor side and shall indicate Door bell, DND (do not
disturb). It shall also have a please wait indicator.
3. Control panel: CP1- The panel shall feature master on/off,

DND and MUR.
4. Control panel: CP2 - The panel shall feature master on/off,

dim up/down, curtain control, balcony light on/off, scene1,
scene2, a/c control c/w built in motion sensor.
5. Control panel: CP3 - The panel shall feature bathroom light

on/off, night light on/off, dim up/down, scene1, scene2 with
built in motion sensor.
6. Control panel: CP4 - The panel shall feature please wait

button.
7. Control panel: CP5 - The panel shall feature for walk in closet /
powder room or w/c with scene1, scene2.
8. Control panel: CP6 - The panel shall feature living room lights
dim up/down, curtain control, balcony light on/off, scene1,
scene2, a/c control c/w built in motion sensor.

9. Control panel: CP7 - The panel shall feature dining room lights
dim up/down, scene1, scene2.
10. Control panel: CP8 - The panel shall feature dining dim
up/down, scene1, scene2.
11. Control panel: CP9 - The panel shall feature laundry room /
hallway dim up/down.
12. Control panel: CP10 - The panel shall feature light control in
the residence study / Maids room for dim up/down.
13. Control panel: CP11 - The panel shall feature light control for
gym in the super penthouse.
14. Control panel: CP12 - The panel shall feature lights on/off,
scene1, scene2, curtain control, a/c on/off for the
teens/cinema/kids room in the super penthouse.
15. Control panel: CP13 - The panel shall feature lights on/off in
the terrace in the super penthouse.
16. Control panel: CP14 – Control panel for kids play area for
scene 1, scene 2, dim up / down, AC control & built in motion
sensor.
17. Volume control: VC- The panel shall feature volume up/down
c/w motion sensor. The panel shall be suitable for bathroom
application and it shall be protected from water jets and
steam.
18. Keypad shall support passive presence back lighting as this

provides the guests with the ability to locate and find keypad
locations during night time conditions.
19. Contractor shall refer the lighting package for lighting types,
control requirements, zoning and circuiting. The GRMS panel
configuration shall be based on this. The above lighting
requirements are to read in conjunction with the lighting
drawing package. The panel finish and colour shall be
coordinated with the ID contractor.
Q. Accepted Brands:
20. Interel
21. ABB
22. Approved Equal

2.18 WIRE AND CABLE

A. Loudspeaker Cable: Commercial Audio Cable, Rated-CL3, 2-
10/14/16 AWG, highly flexible stranded bare copper conductors
with PVC jacket. Shall comply with AES-EBU-3 specification. Cable
to be LSZH.
B. Microphone and Line level cable: Commercial Audio Cable, 2, 4,

8, 16 pair snake cables with 22, 24, 26 AWG. Low capacitance
cable with resistance of 110 ohms. Capable of transmission of
analogue and digital audio signals and designed to to meet the
requirements of the AES/EBU specification.
C. Control Cable: Ethernet control protocol cable with a Category 6

cable. Cable to be LSZH.
D. HDMI Cable (for cable lengths less than 12 feet): Supports signals
up to 1920 x 1200 @60Hz and 1080p/60. 24 AWG copper wire
construction. Male Type A HDMI to male type A HDMI gold
plated. Supports 10.2 Gbps data rate and deep color. 1080p/60
verified. UL CM compliant.
E. HDMI Cable (for cable lengths more than 25 feet): Supports

signals up to 1920 x 1200 @60Hz and 1080p/60. 22 AWG copper
wire construction. Male Type A HDMI to male type A HDMI gold
plated. Supports 4.95 Gbps data rate. 1080p/60 verified. . UL CM
compliant.
F. HDBaseT, Digital Media Cable (As required): Shall be latest type

shielded twisted pair Category 5e/6/7 cable or video switcher
manufactures recommended cable.
G. Category Transmission Cable: ANSI/EIA/TIA 568B.2 Category 6

enhanced performance, consisting of four, 23-AWG solid twisted-
pairs. Cable to be LSZH.
H. Wireless Microphone Antenna Cable: (As Required). 50 Ohm RG-

58 type cable. Cable to be UL CMR listed. SUBMIT TERMINATED
SAMPLES FOR APPROVAL.
I. Travelling speaker cables audio, video, cat5 and power cables

shall also be provided for the elevators.
2.19 CONNECTORS, PLATES, AND PANELS

A. Table Pop-Up Box (TB) – Motorized table mount boxes shall
open/close by pressing top panel or remote contact closure,
Input connectors including HDMI, Computer Video, Computer
audio, Network and Power outlet with switch. Coordinate top

cover color prior to ordering; provide a sample to the conference

table manufacturer for exact cutouts. Accepted Products.
1. Extron
2. AMX
3. Approved equal
B. Custom rack panels shall be milled 3/16" (4mm) thick 6061-T6

aluminum; brushed black hard anodized finish unless otherwise
noted. Brush in direction of aluminum grain only, with grain
running parallel to the long dimension of the panel or box.
Surface-mount panels to have beveled or chamfered edges.
Install connectors, controls, and other parts and engrave
legends, as shown on Contract Drawings. Panels typically
employ sub-panels for actual device mounting. Drill and tap
panel or sub-panel for connector mounting screws; do not use
nuts. Employ natural stainless steel or black oxide fasteners to
match appearance. Some connectors may require milling the
backside of the panel to reduce panel thickness at the
connector. Unless otherwise noted, engraving on panels shall be
0.125" (3mm) block.
C. Colors and engraving of the custom wall plates shall follow

interior design schedules. Materials shall be brushed aluminum,
brushed in direction of aluminum grain. Plates to beveled or
chamfered edges. Install connectors, controls, and engrave
legends, as shown on Contract Drawings. Some connectors may
require milling the backside of the panel to reduce panel
thickness at the connector.
2.20 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Equipment rack assemblies - Free standing equipment rack
assembly, 600mm wide, and 600mm deep with 42U/38U/27U, 19"
wide and painted non-gloss black. Provide with base, top and side
panels, locking rear doors, rear-mounting rails, fans, and equipment
shelves as required. Fill unused mounting spaces with vent panels or
blank panels painted non-gloss black. Verify vent panel
requirements to ensure in-rack temperatures of less than 100
degrees F. Install all rack mounted panels and equipment with
stainless steel 10-32, button head machine screws with plastic f
washers. Install PDU with 240-volt, 13/16-amp power outlets as
required by equipment spacing. Distribute the electrical circuits
within the rack per manufacturers load requirements. Provide a
minimum of two addition outlets in each rack for service use. Install
a copper ground buss of substantial cross sectional area (#4 AWG
minimum) from top to bottom in each rack section. Provide a light

source in the top rear of each rack section. Refer drawings for
locations. Accepted products.
1. Middle Atlantic
2. Chief
3. Approved equal
B. Millwork Rack - Free standing equipment rack assembly, 600mm

wide, 600 mm deep, 19" wide and painted non-gloss black. Provide
with base, rear-mounting rails, fans, and equipment shelves as
required. Fill unused mounting spaces with vent panels or blank
panels painted non-gloss black. Verify vent panel requirements to
ensure in-rack temperatures of less than 100 degrees F. Install all
rack mounted panels and equipment with stainless steel 10-32,
button head machine screws with plastic flat washers. Install Wire
mold raceway with 230-volt, 10 / 20-amp power outlets as required
by equipment spacing. Distribute the electrical circuits within the
rack per manufacturers load requirements. Rack-mount power
distribution with lights. Rack mounted power conditioner with 8 rear
power outlets and 2 telescopic dimmable front panel lights. Refer
drawings for locations. Accepted products.
1. Middle Atlantic
2. Chief
3. Approved equal
C. Surge Eliminator and Power Conditioners: Provide power

conditioners per rack for maintenance free protection from surges
and spikes. The Linear Filtering Technology rids systems of AC line
noise for consistent audio/video clarity. Automatic Extreme Voltage
Shutdown powers down equipment during a prolonged or extreme
over-voltage, Zero ground contamination circuitry assures the
delivery of pure AC. Accepted products.
1. Furman
2. Surgex
3. Approved Equal
D. Portable DJ unit. The rack shall have a portable 16U Mixer Rack
with table for DJ mixer, space for laptop, slide tray for mixer unit.
The rack shall also include an audio processor and DJ headphones.
The portable unit shall also have two 150 watt portable powered
speakers and a subwoofer.

D. Portable Video Conference unit - This shall include a pedestal-

mount package that features a single displays of 55” or dual
display options of 42 inches. Other configurations within this unit
shall include the audio system with microphones and two speakers
.Provision to mount the HD camera shall also be available on the
portable device. A spacious 19-inch rack inside the base shall allow
for storage of the video codec and other A/V accessories. Setup
shall be accomplished quickly with easy installation. Accepted
products
1. Polycom
2. Cisco
3. Approved equal
E. Mobile Display on rack with Blu-ray player - This unit shall include a
pedestal-mount package that features a single display of 60”. A
spacious 19-inch rack inside the base shall allow for storage of the
Blu-ray and other A/V equipment like speakers and subwoofers.
Setup shall be accomplished quickly with easy installation.
(Quantity- 2)
F. CD player/AM-FM tuner- This device shall feature a five CD

changer and AM/FM tuner. The unit shall a FM Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
95 db. Playable formats: CD-DA (CD-TEXT), CD-ROM (ISO9660), CD-
R, MP3-CD, USB: FAT16 / FAT32, SD/SDHC: FAT16 / FAT32. Number of
channels, 2 (stereo), 1 (mono), Audio frequency characteristics, 10
Hz - 20 kHz (± 1.0dB), S/N ratio: More than 95 dB (A-Weighted), Total
harmonic distortion: Less than 0.01%. Accepted products
1. Denon
2. Yamaha
3. Approved equal
G. Microphone Boom stand - This stand shall be a heavy-duty

stand/boom combination consisting of the tripod floor stand and
telescopic boom. It shall have rock-solid T-bar locking and a high-
quality clutch which holds the stand's height. The height shall be
adjustable between 35" to 63". Matte black finish. (Quantity-5).
Accepted products
4. Koing and Meyer
5. Approved equal
H. Microphone table stand - The unit shall be a T-handle adjustment

for secure boom positioning. Square boom clamp design with large
clamping area. Black powder coated, die cast base table top, kick

drum or conference table mic stand. Matte black finish. (Quantity-

4). Accepted products
6. Koing and Meyer
7. Approved equal
I. Motorized podium - The Wooden Motorized Adjustable Lectern

shall have the ability to travel 16" from its lowest point of 38" to its
highest point 54" at the touch of a button, accommodating
speakers of various heights. It shall come equipped with tilt back
casters, a rear utility access panel. The unit shall have plug in
panels on the top of the lectern with a wide range of connection
options including any combination of network, audio, video, power
and computer in double and triple gang configurations. The finish
of the unit is to be coordinated with ID. (Quantity-4). Accepted
products
8. Dalite
9. Podium Pros
10. Approved equal
J. Skyhook/ Bus port- The retractable platform shall provide mounting

support, power, and connections for audio, video, wireless internet
and lighting equipment. The unit shall be recessed into the ceiling
when not in use. The Retractable power and support receptacle
shall be furnished with up to 6 receptacles for 230 volts as required.
The unit shall come with two integral wiring compartments,
accessible while in the down position, eliminating the need for
ceiling access. The unit shall be capable of supporting up to
2500lbs [1130kg] with pipe, electrified bus or truss which can be
mounted in two positions. It shall be equipped with ceiling flange
detail for drywall or T-Bar ceiling. The bus port shall have data and
power points. Contractor to coordinate with IT and electrical
contractor respectively. Accepted products
11. Lab lite
12. Approved Equal
K. Loose Inventory
1. Microphone / Line Level interconnect cable 10 feet (Quantity

–5)

– 5)


– 5)
4. Microphone / Line Level interconnect cable 100 feet

(Quantity – 5)
5. Speaker interconnect cable (14 AWG) 10 feet (Quantity – 5)
9. Misc. Interface cables – 6 feet each
a. Mini Stereo Audio to Male XLR (Quantity – 5)
b. Mini Stereo Audio to Female XLR (Quantity – 5)
c. RCA Stereo Audio to Male XLR (Quantity – 5)
d. RCA Stereo Audio to Female XLR (Quantity – 5)
e. BNC to Coaxial (Quantity – 10)
f. Digital Audio Optical Cables (Quantity – 10)
g. Digital Audio Coaxial Cables (Quantity – 10)
2.21 TERMINATIONS
A. Low-level (microphone, line level, control system) signal wiring.
Wago 280 series quick connect blocks with Wago 210 mounting
rail and Wago 216 series ferrules crimped with a Wago 260 series
crimp tool.
B. High-level (speaker, DC power) signal wiring. Wago 280 series

quick connect blocks with Wago 210 mounting rail and Wago
216 series ferrules crimped with a Wago 260 series crimp tool.
C. Category 6: Refer to Section 16710.
D. Cable Markers. Permanent labels corresponding to the Contract

Drawings affixed to all cables.
E. Indicator Lamps. Provide lamps rated at 115% of service voltage

(i.e. use 28 volt lamps in 24 volt circuits). Provide 100% spare lamps
of each type.
F. Fuses. Provide 100% spares of each type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION


C. After assembly of rack systems in the shop, measure, and record
the DC resistance between the racks ground bus bar and the
chassis of all rack-mounted components. Also measure and
record the DC resistance between the rack ground bus bar and
the signal common for all components.
D. Use a sine-wave signal generator, dual trace oscilloscope and

dBm meter to measure and document the level, which produces
clipping at each component input used in the system.
E. Using a +4 dBm sine-wave input, set controls of each component

to produce a +4 dBm sine-wave output. Under these operating
conditions (unity gain); note the presence of any waveform
distortion, interference, or oscillations. Take corrective action to
eliminate the anomalies and document the corrective measures.
F. Verification of Performance
G. In the shop, photograph the interconnect wiring within racks

including patch panels and grounding to show the quality of
workmanship and compliance with the specified grounding
procedures.
H. Submit the test reports and photographs to the Consultant before

delivery of racks to project site.
3.3 EXAMINATION
I. Examine the areas to receive the Work and the conditions under
3.4 INSTALLATION
J. Install components in accordance with contract drawings,

K. System installation and construction methods shall conform to the

L. The Contractor shall install all system components including

Employer Furnished Equipment, and appurtenances in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and
adjustments required to deliver a complete and operable system.
M. Earthing and Bonding shall be installed as necessary to preclude

operation.
N. The contractor shall adhere to the installation schedule of the

O. Mount all equipment to be installed over public areas in a

manner adequate to support the equipment loads with a
minimum safety factor of five. Do not use formed eyebolts or lag
screws for support of suspended equipment.
P. Firmly and permanently, attach electrical boxes, enclosures, and

permanent equipment to the building. Rigidly mounted
equipment and devices shall be plumb and square.
Q. Choose colors and finishes of all exposed and custom fabricated

R. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers'

recommendations. Ensure that levels and impedances are
properly matched between components. Verify that projector
distances and lenses are appropriate for the corresponding
screen sizes.
S. Provide shaft locks or security covers on all non-user equipment

as directed by the Consultant during acceptance testing and
equalization.
T. Labeling

corresponding to the Contract Drawings using wording,
format, style, color, and arrangement of text approved by
the Consultant.
2. Label all panels and wall plates using 1/8" engraved lettering.
On dark panels and plates, fill engraving with white paint,
and on aluminum or stainless steel panels and plates, fill
engraving with black paint.

3. Provide engraved plastic labels similar to Lamicoid, squarely

and permanently attached, to label patch panels, barrier
strips, terminals, transformers, switches, relays and similar
devices as well as the front and rear of all signal processing
equipment (e.g., Power Amplifier (PA), Limiters (LIM), and
Equalizers (EQ)) and amplifiers. Label all controls on
distribution amplifiers, mixers, etc. as to the function of each.
4. Label push button switches with engraved lettering filled with

contrasting color paint.
5. Label all permanent wiring on both ends with approved

permanent clip on type or sleeve type markers. Wrap around
adhesive labels will not be accepted unless completely
covered with clear heat shrink tubing.
U. Engraving
1. Refer to drawings for plate engraving and construction

details.
V. Equipment Racks and Equipment Furniture
1. All equipment with equipment racks and equipment furniture

shall follow manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Provide adequate ventilation or fans to maintain an optimum

temperature.
3. Floor racks located in equipment rooms to be mounted on

wood riser-minimum of 2 inches high.
4. Provide unused panel space with blank or vent panels,

painted to match housing.
5. Provide rear support for housing mounted equipment greater

than 350mm deep.
6. Locate user equipment at convenient height.
7. Provide locking doors
8. From the rear, Install AC power and ground cabling on the

left; audio and video cabling on the right.
9. Provide service lights with the rack for maintenance.
10. Do not mount panels or equipment on the rear housing rails.
W. Patch Panels

1. Provide unique colored identification strips for each major

connector grouping (e.g. video tie lines, microphone inputs,
line inputs, console inputs, console outputs, inserts, etc.).
2. Locate inputs from facility panels on top row and connection

to the equipment on the bottom row. Similarly outputs from
the equipment on the top row and connections to facility
panels on the bottom row.
3. Patch bay configuration (e.g. full normal, half normal, shield

lifted etc.) shall be as per the block diagram.
X. Wireless Systems:
1. Ensure that all wireless systems operate on different

frequencies from each other and from any other transmitters
in the area.
2. Coordinate frequency selection for compatibility with local

RF environment.
Y. Grounding and Shielding
1. Mount and enclose all electrical and electronic equipment in

metal enclosures or equipment racks.

isolation from the building structure and electrical raceways.
Use flexible conduits and PVC fittings to provide insulated
connections between equipment racks and the building
electrical raceways.
3. Ground the chassis of all rack mounted components in

accordance with the Contract Drawings and verify a D.C.
resistance between each chassis and the rack ground bus of
no more than 0.01 ohms.
4. Ground the shields of interconnecting wires on one end only

in accordance with the contact drawings and treat the
unused opposite ends as described below under Wiring
Practices. Shield drain wires shall be insulated in all instances
by use of appropriately sized black heat shrink tubing equal
to Alpha FIT-221 series.
Z. Wiring Practices
1. Where specific instructions are not given, perform all wiring in

strict adherence to standard broadcast and sound
engineering practices as described in the referenced
Broadcast Audio Equipment for AM, FM, Television and in
Sound System Engineering.

2. Group all wiring into the following classifications by power

level or signal type:
a. Microphone Level: less than 20 dBm.
b. Line Level Audio and DC Control Circuits: 20 dBm to +30

dBm.
c. Speaker Level: greater than +30 dBm.
d. Video/RF Circuits
e. AC Power Circuits
3. Maintain a minimum six-inch separation between wiring of

different level classifications wherever possible. Otherwise,
cross them perpendicular to each other. Where wiring of
different level classifications share a common enclosure or
junction box, provide metallic isolation barriers to completely
electrically separate wiring groups.
4. Neatly harness wires together within racks by power level

classification using horizontal and vertical wiring supports as
required. Rigidly support all wires within twelve inches of
connection points.
5. Observe consistent polarity throughout the audio systems as

follows:
6. XLR Type Connectors
a. Positive = Pin 2
b. Negative = Pin 3
c. Common = Pin 1
7. Tip Ring Shield (TRS) Type Connectors
a. Positive = Tip
b. Negative = Ring
c. Common = Sleeve
8. Use only balanced differential inputs throughout all sound

systems unless noted otherwise. Use approved transformers to
convert all unbalanced inputs to balanced inputs. Output
signals may be unbalanced if inputs of subsequent devices
are within the same rack. Otherwise use approved
transformers to balance the outputs.

9. Exercise care in wiring to avoid damaging the cables and

equipment. Use grommets around cut outs and knock outs
where conduit or chase nipples are not installed.
10. Cut off unused wire ends approximately one-half inch (½")
past the wire jacket. Fold them back over the jacket, and
secure in place with heat shrink tubing.
11. Make connections using rosin core solder or approved

mechanical connectors.
12. Do not splice cables of any signal category under any

circumstances without prior approval of the Consultant.
13. All cables shall originate and terminate at active or passive

devices; cables shall not be spliced. Where several devices
are in close proximity, utilize approved housing to housing
connectors and adapters.
14. All cables terminated in a connection plate mounted in an

enclosure shall be dressed to allow removal from the
enclosure and sufficient cable length for service or re-
termination. Plate shall set on floor or freely swing clear.
15. All coaxial video or RF connections to plates or panels in

boxes, pedestals, racks or any similar location with limited
clearance, that would prevent that the associated cable
manufacturer's minimum bend radius from being strictly
observed shall be provided with the appropriate right angle
or similar adapter as appropriate.
16. All cable installed under this specification which is to be

terminated by others for “future” or Employer Furnished
Equipment (EFE) in racks, shall be provided with ten (10) feet
of slack when dressed to the location of future or EFE
equipment. All cable installed under this specification which is
to be terminated by others, shall be provided with twenty (20)
feet of slack when ending in a rack enclosure. All cable
provided under this specifications, to be terminated by
others, shall be provided with fifty (50) feet of slack when
terminating in an equipment room without a clear point of
demarcation, or in a group of racks where the destination is
not known.
17. All coaxial connectors shall be crimped with the appropriate

hexagonal die crimp tool correct for the combination of
cable and connector. Non-ratcheting type crimping tools are
not Representative; the presence of such tools on the job site
shall be interpreted as evidence of mechanical connections

incorrectly made, and provide sufficient grounds for rejection

of all mechanical connections in the system.
18. Cable Installation in Conduit and Duct Banks
19. Pull mandrel one size smaller than the conduit, through entire
length of all underground conduits.
20. Cable pulling lubrication shall be utilized when pulling cable.
21. A dynamometer shall be used to measure pulling tension

during long or difficult runs. The dynamometer is to be
placed between the cable puller and the pull line to monitor
pulling tension. The manufacturer's pulling tension maximum
range shall not be exceeded.
22. Pulling grips suitable for use with fiber cables shall be applied
to the ends of the cable. Consult cable manufacturer to
determine appropriate pulling grip and method of
attachment. Breakaway or fuse links shall be used at the
pulling grip. Insure that the correct “fuse pin” is installed in the
fuse link.
23. Cable caps (heat-shrinking type) shall be used to seal the

ends of the cable to protect the cable ends prior to
terminating.
24. Use of cable blocks shall facilitate the bending of cable. For
bends between 5 degrees and 45 degrees, a 45 degree
cable block shall be utilized. For 45 degree to 90 degree
bends, utilize a 90 degree cable block.
25. The bend radius for all cables shall conform to manufacturer’s
specifications.
26. Provide spare cables between terminal cabinets equal to 10%

of the installed cables or a minimum of 2 cables of each type
cable installed. Provide spare cables between terminal
cabinets and equipment racks/consoles equal to 15% of the
installed cables or a minimum of 5 cables of each type cable
installed. Label all spare cables as spares with unique
identifiers. Do not use any spare cables without prior approval
from the Consultant.

A. General Testing
1. Maintain a competent supervisor and supporting technical

installation. Change of supervisor during the project shall not
be acceptable without prior written approval from the

Employer.
2. Before connecting any equipment to electrical power outlets,

measure and record the A.C. voltages between hot, neutral,
and ground and verify correct outlet polarity. Verify test and
document correct and safe function of isolated ground
power systems.
3. Determine the best sequence of energizing systems to

minimize the risk of damage.
4. After successfully energizing the systems, make preliminary

adjustments and document the settings of all controls,
parameters of corrective networks, voltages at key
interconnection points, gains and losses as applicable.
Replicate the unity gain tests performed at the shop and
document the absence of any waveform distortion,
interference signals, or oscillations.
5. The Contractor shall develop and execute an onsite

acceptance-testing program/plan.
6. The plan shall address all requirements identified in this

specification and test all Contractor supplied cabling and
hardware components. The plan shall follow accepted
industry testing practices.
7. Any specified item that does not satisfy the requirements of

this specification shall be replaced, upgraded, or added by
the Contractor as necessary to correct the noted
deficiencies. After correction of a noted deficiency, re-
testing shall be performed to verify the effectiveness of the
corrective action.
8. Upon completion of the system installation, it shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor to perform the necessary
adjustments and balancing of all signals, amplifier gain, and
other level controls to ensure proper system operation. The
system shall be physically inspected by the Employer to
assure that all equipment is installed in a neat and
workmanlike manner as called for by the plans and
specifications.
9. Verify the performance parameters of the individual systems

following established professional procedures, in addition to
those specified herein. Document all acceptance testing,
calibration and correction procedures described herein,
being careful to include the following information:

a. Performance date of the given procedure.
b. Condition of performance of procedure.
c. Type of procedure, and description.
d. Parameters measured and their values, including values

measured prior to calibration or correction, as
applicable.
e. Parameters associated with calibration or corrective

networks, components, or devices.
f. The names of personnel conducting the procedure.
g. The equipment used to conduct the procedure
B. Audio Testing
1. Before connecting loudspeaker lines to power amplifiers,

measure and record the impedance curves of all lines using a
sweep test or impedance bridge at least six frequencies from
125 Hz through 8,000 Hz.
2. Test all low level audio cables and connections for continuity
and ground faults and correct polarity.
3. Apply a sine wave sweep signal to each loudspeaker system,

sweeping from 50 Hz to 5,000 Hz at a sound pressure level that
is 10 dB below the loudspeaker's rated electrical input power.
Listen for rattles or objectionable noise and correct if
apparent.
4. Check for proper polarity of loudspeakers by applying music

program or pink noise to each system and walking through
the transition areas of coverage from one loudspeaker to the
next. Transition should be smooth with no apparent shifting of
source back and forth from one loudspeaker to the next.
5. Achieve uniform distribution of sound from each loudspeaker

system after all interior furnishings are in place. Drive each
system with one full octave of noise centered at 4000 Hz at a
level of 85 to 90 dB. Use a sound level meter that meets “ANSI
S1.4 1983: Specifications for Sound Level Meters” set for slow
meter damping and “A” weighting. Take all readings at
seated ear height. Adjust speaker angles as necessary to
achieve +3 dB over entire seating area. Provide plan of
achieved sound distribution from each system, plotted with 4
kHz pink noise levels as measured on a 10 foot square grid
pattern. The process of equalizing and testing the Sound
Systems may necessitate moving and adjusting certain

component parts, e.g., loudspeakers. This shall be done

without claim for additional payment.
6. Provide a list showing all build out, termination, and pad

resistor calculations. List to include measured line and source
impedances used in calculations and results of tests after
installation, and impedance of all inputs to equipment
brought up on patch bay. Impedances in ohms are to be
within +10% of design value. Levels in dB are to be within
+1dB of design value.
7. Test all low level audio cables and connections for continuity
and ground faults and correct polarity.
8. Using a sine wave signal source, send a 1 kHz sine wave signal
out of the mixing console at a level just below clipping as
observed on an oscilloscope. Increase the input and then
the output gain in turn on each device downstream in the
signal path until the oscilloscope indicates the level in and
out of each device is just below clipping. Be sure that the
clipping threshold of the input attenuator, if the device under
test has one, is found before adjusting its output attenuator. If
the input attenuator on any device lacks sufficient padding
to prevent input clipping, insert the minimum value pad
required to prevent input clipping. Adjust the input
attenuator on all amplifiers by first disconnecting any
loudspeaker.
9. Upon completion of initial tests and adjustments, submit

written results of tests to Consultant. In addition, submit
written notification that the installation has been completed
in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, and is ready for equalization and inspection by
representatives of the Consultant and Employer.
10. Refer to InfoComm Standards for audio testing procedures.
C. Video Testing
1. Test all video projectors and displays for proper image

geometry. Calibrate all video images for brightness, contrast,
color, tint and sharpness according to the parameters
described in Manufacturer’s document.
2. Refer to InfoComm and SMTE Standards for video cabling

testing procedures.
3. Refer to InfoComm and SMTE Standards for HDMI, Display port

and DVI cabling testing procedures.

4. Refer to InfoComm and SMTE Standards for testing and

calibrating video display devices.
5. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations for testing and

calibrating their video displays, monitors, video walls and
projectors. Use manufacturer’s testing tools and software as
recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Final Testing
1. Upon completion of initial tests and adjustments, submit written

results of tests to Consultant. In addition, submit written
notification that the installation has been completed in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, and is ready for final inspection by representatives
of the Consultant and Employer.
3.6 TRAINING
provide 5 Days of training sessions. Duration of each training
session shall be at-least four hours long. Contractor to video
record each session and provide six soft copies of the recording
as part of the Close-Out Submittals.

C. Manuals, drawings and technical documentation must be used

in training and shall be left with the Employer, or its designated
representative at the completion of training for Employer use in
the future.
D. The use of proprietary equipment does not justify failure to

provide technical documentation, such as programming
information, electronic schematic drawings and technical
description, as part of training and documentation. It shall be the
responsibility of the contractor to ensure this documentation can
be obtained prior to acceptance, as listed in this document.

3.7 INSPECTION
the Consultant.
B. Schedule a time for the Consultant to perform system

acceptance testing and equalization with at least 14 days
advance notice.
C. Furnish a technician who is familiar with the system to assist the

Consultant during the acceptance testing and equalization for
the duration of time it takes to complete the adjustments (regular
time or overtime as required). A minimum of 24 hours, as required
to complete the adjustments.
D. Each cable shall be inspected for proper termination.
E. Under the direction of the Consultant, adjust signal levels and

loudspeaker aiming as required to achieve the uniform sound
distribution within a tolerance of +2dB.
F. System flatness test shall employ an approved sweep transmitter

receiver pair. Sweep measurements shall be taken at the
termination of every cable termination in the system. Where
possible, record sweep results by photographic means.
G. Record final settings on all equipment and submit with contract

closeout documents.
H. Heat shrinking tubing shall be shrunk to cover the external

connection to amplifier/passive components only after system
alignment and acceptance has been completed.
I. Upon completion of initial tests and adjustments, submit written

report of tests to the Employer along with all documents,
diagrams, and record drawings required herein.
J. If the system does not meet criteria or if additional trips to the job
site for testing or equalization are required, the Contractor shall
reimburse the employer for all expenses and professional time
encountered by the Consultant.
3.8 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish the following equipment. Equipment to be available for
the entire test period through final system testing.
1. Laptop with all software installed within the project and Smart
Live Software.

2. All Source Code related to the project on CD-Rom.
3. Sound Level Meter: Sound level meter shall meet “ANSI S1.4
1983: Specifications for Sound Level Meters” with digital or
analog display. Meter to provide ranges of 40 to 120 dBA.
4. Impedance Meter - Capable of testing audio lines at three

frequencies, minimum, between 250 Hz and 4k Hz.
Measurement Range: 1 ohm to 100 Kohms.
5. Multimeter-Measurement range, DC to 20 kHz, 100 mV to

300V, 10 ma to 10 A.
6. Audio Oscillator: bandwidth 20 Hz to 20k Hz ±1 dB at 0 dBm

output. Output to be balanced. Oscillator to include
adjustable output level.
7. 50, 100, 200 & 500 Feet Microphone cables with connectors
8. 50, 100, 200 & 500 Feet Line Level cables with connectors
9. 50, 100, 200 & 500 Feet Speaker cables with connectors
10. 50 &100 Feet Video cables with connectors
11. 50 &100 Feet Broadband cables with connectors
12. Two Hand-held Microphones
13. Miscellaneous adapters including Stereo to Mono, 2 RCA to

mini Stereo, 2 RCA to mono, S-VHA to 2 BNC, VGA to 5 BNC
etc.
14. Portable 200 Watt Powered Amplified Speaker on stand
15. Ladders and scaffolding necessary to inspect all speakers.
16. Six portable radios for communication during testing and

commissioning.
3.9 ADJUSTING
directed.
1. System and components have been installed and inspected

in accordance with the manufacturer's installation
instructions.




indicated.
5. The Employer Information Technology Staff and Consultant

have approved the installation.
C. Satisfaction of the above requirements shall not relieve the

equipment items, or collateral damage as a result of Contractor’s
deficient work/defective equipment.
D. The Employer reserves the right to direct changes to the control

system software and programming for a period of three months
after final acceptance. Such changes shall be made without
3.10 CLEANING
debris.
3.11 PROTECTION
acceptance.
END OF SECTION


or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X
Handover 0 X
Procurement (RFQ) X
3
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Access Control X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X
Handover X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X
Handover X
ISA Server X
Procurement (RFQ) X
7
Training X
Handover X
Deployment Server X
Procurement (RFQ) X
8
Training X
Handover X

by FRHI X
9
Training X
Handover 0 X
1 PMK International
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
GPON by FRHI
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X
Handover 0 X
Procurement (RFQ) X
system equipment.
Training X
Handover X
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Security Network -
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
13
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Retail Network -
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
14
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Servers X
Procurement (RFQ) X
15
Training X
Handover X
Desktops X
Procurement (RFQ) X
16
Training X
Handover X
Laptops X
Procurement (RFQ) X
17
Training X
Handover X
Printer X
Procurement (RFQ) X
18
Training X
Handover X
2 PMK International
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
Procurement (RFQ) X
19
Training X
Handover X
Point of Sale X
Procurement (RFQ) X
20
Training X
Handover X
Procurement (RFQ) X
21
Training X
Handover X
Passport Scanning X
Procurement (RFQ) X
22
Training X
Handover X
Procurement (RFQ) X
23
Training X
Handover 0 X
Procurement (RFQ) X
24
Training X
Handover X
Procurement (RFQ) X
25
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Procurement (RFQ) X
26
Training X
Handover 0 X
Procurement (RFQ) X
27
Training X
Handover 0 X
Media Panel X
Procurement (RFQ) X
28
Training X
Handover 0 X
3 PMK International
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
Digital Signage X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
CCTV System X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
GRMS X
Procurement (RFQ) X
documents.
Training X 0
Handover X 0
4 PMK International
12128
DIVISION 04 – ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
REV. E
17 NOVEMBER 2016

01

DWG № Rev:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1 SUMMARY ............................................................................................................................................................ 2
1.2 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................................ 3
1.3 SUBMITTALS .......................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.4 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS.................................................................................................................................... 7
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING........................................................................................................ 12
1.7 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS......................................................................................................................... 12
1.8 WARRANTY ........................................................................................................................................................ 13
1.9 MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................................................. 13
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ............................................................................................................................................................ 15
2.1 MATERIALS ......................................................................................................................................................... 15
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................................................... 16
2.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE CAMERAS ................................................................................................................. 17
2.4 FIXED DOME IP CAMERA: .............................................................................................................................. 18
2.5 FIXED BOX ENCLOSED IP CAMERA: ............................................................................................................. 19
2.6 PTZ DOME IP CAMERA .................................................................................................................................... 19
2.7 POWER SUPPLIES .............................................................................................................................................. 21
2.8 CAMERA-SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................ 21
2.9 iSCSI VIDEO STORAGE AREA NETWORK ..................................................................................................... 23
2.10 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ..................................................................................................................... 24
2.11 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................................................................................... 26
2.12 APPLICATION SOFTWARE ............................................................................................................................... 29
2.13 CONTROLLERS .................................................................................................................................................. 41
2.14 GUEST ROOM CARD READER AND LOCKS ................................................................................................ 43
2.15 OFFLINE CARD READER WITH LOCK ............................................................................................................ 46
2.16 RFID CARDS ....................................................................................................................................................... 47
2.17 ENROLLMENT CENTER ..................................................................................................................................... 47
2.18 PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES ................................................................................................................................. 49
2.19 DOOR AND GATE HARDWARE INTERFACE ................................................................................................ 50
2.20 INTERCOM SYSTEM........................................................................................................................................... 50
2.21 RS-232 ASCII INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................. 52
2.22 VIDEO AND CAMERA CONTROL ................................................................................................................. 53
2.23 EMERGENCY PULL ALARM ............................................................................................................................. 53
2.24 PANIC BUTTON .................................................................................................................................................. 53
2.25 BAGGAGE SCANNER...................................................................................................................................... 54
2.26 METAL DETECTOR ............................................................................................................................................. 54
2.27 GATE BARRIER ................................................................................................................................................... 55
2.28 RISING BOLLARDS ............................................................................................................................................ 56
2.29 SECURITY MONITORING VIDEO WALL AND CONSOLES ......................................................................... 57
2.30 TIME AND ATTENDANCE SOFTWARE ............................................................................................................ 58
2.31 ATTIC STOCK...................................................................................................................................................... 59
PART 3 - EXECUTION ........................................................................................................................................................... 61
3.1 FABRICATION .................................................................................................................................................... 61
3.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ......................................................................................................................... 61
3.3 EXAMINATION ................................................................................................................................................... 61
3.4 INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................................... 61
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ............................................................................................................................... 65
3.6 TEST EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................................... 66
3.7 TRAINING............................................................................................................................................................ 67
3.8 INSPECTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 67
3.9 ADJUSTING ........................................................................................................................................................ 68
3.10 CLEANING ......................................................................................................................................................... 68
3.11 PROTECTION...................................................................................................................................................... 68
28 0000 Electronic Security System - Rev. E Page 1 of 68

SECTION 28 00 00
ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
engineering design, and testing, and shall provide all products required
in order to ensure a fully operative system and proper installation of
equipment. System operability and proper installation shall be verified
via completion of the acceptance test plan.
B. Contractor shall coordinate all installation activities and details with the
Employer’s Information Technology Provider including final
configurations.

specified.

F. Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, and equipment.
Pay required tax, gross receipts, and other taxes.
G. Contractor shall secure and pay for plan check fees, permits, fees, and
licenses necessary for execution of Work as applicable for the project.
I. Contractor shall perform pre-delivery testing, site testing, and adjustment

of the completed installation. The Contractor shall provide all personnel,
equipment, instrumentation, and supplies necessary to perform all
testing.
J. Contractor shall comply with all codes, ordinances, regulations, and

other legal requirements of public authorities that bear on performance
of Work.
K. Contractor to provide alternate price for installation, configuration, and

testing of equipment provided by the Employer
L. Employer reserves the right to procure the required equipment directly

and provide it to the Contractor for installation, configuration, and
testing.
M. The Contractor shall verify space, power and cooling requirements

associated with this section.

1. “SEC” Series Drawings.
2. “ITE & ITS” Series Drawings
1. Refer to Electrical Containment Drawings for major containment

for the ELV / SCS systems.
2. Refer to Electrical Drawings for power associated with the ELV /

SCS systems.
3. Refer to Architectural, landscape & ID drawings for locations,

mounting heights and finishes.
4. Coordination and interface with other trades.
5. Coordination with authorities having jurisdiction.
6. FRHI Raffles standards
7. KSA MOI Requirements.
8. KSA Police Requirements.
9. Hardscape Drawings
10. Door Hardware
P. Contractor to refer to Appendix A “AV/IT/Security Responsibility Matrix” and

comply with the scope responsibility.
1.2 REFERENCES
D. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI)

Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) standards.
E. American National Standards Institute (A.N.S.I.), Electronics Industries

Association (E.I.A), Telecommunications Industries Association (T.I.A.)
standards
F. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) standards
G. ISO/IEC Standards
H. Underwriters Laboratory (UL)
I. National Electric Code (N.E.C.).
J. National Electric Safety Code (N.E.S.C.).

K. National Fire Protection Association (N.F.P.A.).
L. American Society for Testing Materials (A.S.T.M.).
M. Building Seismic Safety Council (B.S.S.C.)
N. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
O. Structured Cabling Section for fiber/copper/wireless installation and

testing procedures.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
1. The Contractor shall provide a time scaled Construction Schedule

indicating general project deadlines with specific dates relating to
the installation of the system. At a minimum, this Construction
Schedule shall include the following milestones per floor:
a. Cabling Procurement Date
b. Equipment Procurement Date
e. Equipment Installation Start Date
f. Equipment Installation Completion Date
g. Equipment Testing Start Date
h. Equipment Testing Completion Date
i. Potential Slippage Periods
j. Contingent Tasks
k. Concurrent Tasks
l. Completion of Documentation
1. The Contractor shall provide a detailed system map to be utilized

as a road map during the implementation of the Security System.
This map shall show all segments, all interconnects between
segments and all active network devices and shall have the
modules, interfaces, protocols, addresses and other identifying
features.
D. Product Data (Refer to Contract Document for number of copies,

minimum three (3) sets to be provided):


verified materials, quantities, field measurements, and construction
criteria related herein. It also represents that the Contractor has
checked, coordinated and verified that information contained
within project drawings, product data sheets and samples
conform to the requirements of the work and of these
specifications. The Contractor shall notify in writing of any
irregularity or discrepancies to the Consultant and provide the
Consultant with possible solutions that will rectify any situations.

corresponding specification paragraph numbers or equipment
title. Indicate all accepted substitutions.
3. Submit a schedule of finishes indicating proposed materials and

color selections for all exposed items such as cameras subject to
Consultant selection.
4. Submit a list showing coordination of selected frequencies for the

wireless system.
E. Shop Drawings (Refer to Contract Document for number of copies,


practices.

identifying every connection for information. Include locations for
all devices. Identify cables by types, colors, and wire numbers.
3. Submit network block diagram and security system block diagram.
4. Submit security systems riser diagram indicating the exact

quantities of security devices in each floor and its connection to
the network.
5. Submit Interface block diagram of the security system with all

building systems.
6. Submit Power and cooling requirements for each equipment rack

/ room.
7. Submit Security management integration diagram listing the

sequences of actions that will operate incase of an alarm
notification, emergency, fire etc.
8.
9. Submit security room enlargement layout and sections showing

detail interconnection between different devices including

security workstations, videowall components etc.

Provide viewing angle for the security workstation.
10. Submit CCTV camera recording storage calculation and

bandwidth requirement in coordination with image complexity,
GOP, frame rate, image resolution etc.
11. Submit equipment rack layouts, rack elevation drawings indicating

the proposed arrangement of mounted security equipment
including cable management and patching in relationship to the
Structured Cabling System.
12. Submit electronic copies of any custom programming including

source codes.
F. Samples:
1. Submit for Consultant’s action. Label samples to indicate product,

characteristics, and locations in the Work. Samples will be
reviewed for color, appearance, and workmanship. Compliance
with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of the
Contractor. Furnish samples of the following:
a. Camera each type – Quantity 1 for each type
b. Card reader type – Quantity 1 for each type
c. Door release button – Quantity 1 for each type
d. Emergency Pull chord – Quantity 1 for each type
e. Locks – Quantity 1 for each type
G. Submit Electronic copies of Shop Drawings & Product Data. (Refer to

Contract Document for number of copies, minimum three (3) sets to be
provided):
2. A Master File List in text format shall be placed on each DVD disc
with a short description of files in the submittal.

acceptable. All XREFs, fonts, and other drawing parts necessary
shall be bound and included.

necessary for the reproduction of the submittals shall be included
in the files, and shall be included in JPEG (.JPG) file format.

documentation provided by the Manufacturers to the Contractor
or documents that are similarly not otherwise available to the

Contractor in electronic format shall be excluded

from this requirement.

A. Upon completion of the installation, Contractor shall prepare as built
documentation of the entire installation. This documentation shall
include:
1. Electronic Copies (Refer to Contract Document for number of

copies, minimum three (3) sets to be provided).
2. Source Code (Refer to Contract Document for number of copies,

minimum three (3) sets to be provided).
3. Operation Manual (Refer to Contract Document for number of

copies, minimum three (3) sets to be provided):
a. The Operational Manual should be submitted in a recognized

format/template in coordination with other disciplines.
b. Neatly bind each with tabbed dividers between sections and

include a title page with space for submittal stamps.
c. Table of Contents
d. Typed description of each system including key features and

operational concepts.
e. Single-line block-diagrams showing all major system

components.
f. Two sets of reduced size drawings showing the components

and wiring in each individual rack. One drawing of each rack
shall be mounted in a plastic jacket to the rear door of the
associated rack. The other complete drawing set shall be
included in the manual.
g. Manufacturer's operation manuals for equipment intended for

operation by system users.
h. A properly licensed working copy of the latest version of any

and all software required to operate or configure the systems
specified herein shall be a part of the system supplied. This
includes, but is not limited to, all software, firmware and
hardware required for configuration, adjustment, diagnosis
and repair.
i. Software shall be included in its “installable” state on industry

standard DVD-Disc, or other appropriate format. Back-up of
the working software may be provided as an additional
inclusion. Disk images are unacceptable.
j. Any and all user definable software configurations and/or

programming shall become the sole property of the employer.

This includes all source code, source code

k. Key schedule cross referencing all keys to their respective

functions.
4. Maintenance Data Manual (Refer to Contract Document for

number of copies, minimum three (3) sets to be provided):
a. The Maintenance Manual should be submitted in a recognized

format/template in coordination with other disciplines.
a. Neatly bind each with tabbed dividers between sections and

include a title page with space for submittal stamps.
c. Company name, address, telephone number and contact

name for system service or maintenance.



g. Manufacturers' service manuals for all major equipment items.
h. Test documentation showing results of source quality control

tests, field quality control tests, acceptance testing, and
equalization.
i. Provide a recommended preventative maintenance schedule

with reference to the applicable pages in the manufacturer’s
maintenance manuals. Where inadequate information is
provided by the manufacturer, provide the information
necessary for proper maintenance.
5. Drawings (Refer to Contract Document for number of copies,

a. Submit as-installed point-to-point wiring diagrams and typed

wire lists identifying every connection for information. Include
locations for all devices. Identify cables by types, colors, and
wire numbers.
b. Submit as-installed network block diagram and security system

block diagram.
c. Submit as-installed Interface block diagram of the security

system with all building systems.

d. Submit as-installed Power and cooling allocations for each

e. Submit as-installed equipment rack layouts indicating the

arrangement of mounted security equipment including cable
management and patching in relationship to the as-installed
Structured Cabling System.
f. Submit electronic copies of any custom programming

including source codes.

B. Project drawings will be available to all parties involved in the work as

the basis for construction and installation. Drawings provided will be to
industry standard scale; however all distances, clearances, lengths,
routes, and equipment placements shall be field verified prior to
execution or placement.
C. The contractor shall inspect the site prior to installation shall provide all
necessary interfaces, cabling, equipment needed for the security
system.
D. The contractor shall refer all design document related to Security system
including the drawings, specification, security report, MOI guidelines to
provide complete intended solution as described in the documents.
E. The contractor shall refer to FRHI standards and shall comply with their
requirement.
F. The contractor shall refer to Saudi MOI and Police requirements and shall
comply with the authorities’ requirement.
G. The contractor shall coordinate with interior designer for the location of
Security equipment including CCTV cameras, card readers, panic
button, emergency pull chord etc.
H. The contractor shall coordinate with IT contractor/designer for the all

data outlets required for Security System including lift car cameras,
access control Panels, etc.
I. The contractor shall coordinate with electrical contractor/designer for all

the power and cabling requirement needed for the security equipment.
J. The contractor shall coordinate with elevator contractors/designer for

installation of CCTV cameras and card readers within lift cars.
K. The contractor shall coordinate with Fire Alarm contractor for signal
cable from fire alarm control panel to each Access control Panel.
L. The contractor shall provide separate low voltage power cable from the
nearest IDF to door locks, cameras where required. The power shall be
backed by the IDF UPS/battery.

M. The contractor shall coordinate with landscape contractor/designer for

the installation of rising bollards, gate barriers, intercoms, outdoor card
readers and pole mounted cameras.
N. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of security equipment:
O. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in

cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components
as they are constructed.
P. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the requirements for

and verifying space, power and cooling requirements associated with
this Section and coordinate with the relevant trades.
Q. Contractor Qualifications:
1. In addition to the requirements of the Contract Documents furnish a

list of all management, supervision and engineering personnel
assigned to this project along with supporting documentation of the
following qualifications:
a. The contractor shall be certified by the manufacturer of the

products to be installed adhere to the engineering, installation,
programming and testing procedures, and utilize the
b. All members of the installation team shall be certified by the

manufacturer(s) as having completed the necessary training
to complete their part of the installation.
c. Contractor shall be a registered & certified partner of the

vendor for the project.

Commercial Electronic Security systems, with at least seven (7)
years experience in the installation, programming, testing,
commissioning and certification of the Systems, with a
reference list of ten (10) completed projects of similar size and
scope including contact names and telephone numbers to
confirm successful completion of projects.
e. The Contractor shall demonstrate QA/QC procedures and any

industry accepted certifications (ISO, Bureau Veritas, BSI or
equivalent), providing methodologies for ensuring continuous
and consistent quality.
R. Intent of Drawings:
1. Project drawings will be available to all parties involved in the work

be to industry standard scales; however all distances, clearances,
lengths, routes, and equipment placements shall be field verified
prior to execution or placement.

2. The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and conceptual and do

not show all components, materials, and other specific elements,
which may be required for proper installation. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor for coordinating the final equipment layout and
pathway routing. If any departure from the Contract Drawings or
the specifications is deemed necessary, details of such departures
or conflicts shall be submitted in writing.
S. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up as directed by the Consultant. Utilize the

same materials and installation methods in the mock-up as intended for
the final Work. Schedule the installation so that the mock-up may be
examined, and any necessary adjustments made, prior to commencing
fabrication of the Work. Replace unsatisfactory items as directed. When
accepted, mock-up shall serve as the standard for materials,
workmanship, and appearance for such Work throughout the project.
T. Maintain a full set of Shop Drawings at the Project site, indicating actual
locations, routing and, in general, the true state of the installation.
U. Alternates and Substitutions:
2. Specific part numbers may be identified within these specifications

to relay the level of quality and capabilities desired and establish a
baseline for operation, function and performance. Only material or
equipment that meet or exceed the level of quality, features and
capabilities specified will be considered for installation. The
Employer’s Consultant reserves the right to govern over and
proclaim whether proposed substitutions are equal to the
specifications.
3. The Employer Consultant may approve or disapprove the request

for substitution or alteration. The Contractor shall not procure any
substitute material until the Employer’s Consultant’s representative
has approved the request for substitution. Any procurement or work
performed prior to approval is at the risk of the Contractor.

approved substitution shall be borne by the Contractor without
additional expense to the Employer. Such additional costs shall
include necessary modifications and alterations to structural
equipment, raceways and furnishings of all additional materials
required to affect the substitution.
5. Contractor shall submit separate pricing for recommended spares

package, which lists each recommended component and a
description of its function.
V. Subletting:

W. The Contractor shall coordinate with other system vendors, as identified

elsewhere in this document, where appropriate, to facilitate equipment
installation, scheduling, protection of equipment, and access to the
project site in order to provide the Employer a complete project in a
timely manner.

A. Protect equipment from damage during delivery, handling, storage and
installation.
B. Deliver and store materials in manufacturer’s original packaging labeled

to show name, brand, type, and grade. Store materials in protected dry
location off ground in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Do
not open packaging nor remove labels until time for installation.
C. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at

no cost to the Employer.
D. Main contractor shall provide secured storage provision on site to store

the delivered materials by the Electronic security contractor in
coordination with the Operator.
E. The main contractor shall be responsible for receiving, storing and

F. The main contractor shall provide all necessary material stock

management including storage access, material in-out logs register and
the protection.
G. The associated system specialist contractor shall verify the provided

storage is in accordance with manufacturer guidelines before delivering
the materials to the site. The system specialist will ensure the storage has
adequate light, ventilation and is free from water and dust.
H. The Main Contractor shall also provide access and attendance when
required by specialist suppliers and installers.

A. Verify all project site conditions applicable to the Work of this Section.
Notify the Consultant in writing of any discrepancies, conflicts, or
omissions prior to tender opening. Otherwise, correct these at no
additional cost to the Consultant or Owner.
B. Continue to monitor the project site. If conditions develop requiring a

need to vary from the Specifications or Drawings, notify the Consultant
immediately in writing. Make recommendations, submit drawings
showing how the Work may be installed, and on approval, proceed with
the necessary changes without additional cost to the Owner.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall provide the manufacturer’s warranty for all
equipment installed at no additional charge for a period of not less one
(1) year from the date of acceptance certificate. Provide optional three
(3) year warranty from the date of acceptance certificate. The warranty
shall allow for replacement or repair at the discretion of the Employer
and shall include all upgrades for firmware and/or operating systems.
B. Software License
1. Required software licenses shall be identified and supplied by the

Contractor. Licenses shall be "Site Licenses" which shall cover all
equipment installed now or in the future.
2. All software licenses and warranties shall be registered in the name

of the Employer. Required software licenses shall be identified and
supplied by the Contractor. Licenses shall be "Site Licenses" which
shall cover all equipment installed now or in the future.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
A. Base: The Contractor shall provide maintenance and support of all
hardware and software associated with this system for the first year. The
maintenance services to be provided by the Contractor shall include
preventive, routine, and emergency maintenance services as defined
below under optional maintenance and support.
B. Optional: The Contractor shall provide optional pricing for maintenance

and support for two (2) years following the warranty period. The option
pricing shall be given as a guaranteed maximum annual cost. This
service is to include parts, labor, licenses, software upgrades, and all
other contractor costs required to keep the equipment operational.
Pricing shall be provided for the following two levels of support:



provisions of the maintenance manual the Contractor issues for each
component. Preventative maintenance services shall include
inspection, test, necessary adjustment, lubrication, parts cleaning, and
software upgrades. Routine maintenance services shall include
scheduled overhauls as recommended by the equipment and software
manufacturer. The Contractor shall include an Employer technician in
maintenance activities during the warranty period to provide on the job
training for Employer personnel.

D. Emergency Failure: A system failure is considered an emergency if any

the key components are inoperative to the extent the system cannot
function in a normal manner. Emergency services shall include
inspections and necessary tests to determine the causes of equipment
or software malfunction or failure. The emergency services shall include:
the furnishing and installation of components, parts or software changes
required to replace malfunctioning system elements. The Contractor
shall specify a maximum amount of time to get the system up and
operational in the event of an emergency failure. This time period shall
be subject to Employer approval.
E. Special Equipment: The Contractor shall supply a list of special tools, test
equipment, and outside inventory required for this project. The
Contractor may recommend specific items to facilitate long-term
support of the system.

maintenance on the proposed system shall be manufacturer certified on
all hardware/software applications.
G. Hardware Support: The Contractor shall supply hardware support directly

or by a subcontractor. Support shall cover all equipment and systems
referenced in this specification.

severity of problem and the associated response time. The use of this
response plan and its details will be negotiated with the Employer.
Repairs are to be made as expeditiously as possible. If parts are
immediately unavailable, the fastest means of shipment shall be used,
including overnight-expedited shipping.
I. Maintenance Log: The Contractor shall maintain a bound Maintenance

Log Book of all preventative maintenance and corrective/repair services
performed during the warranty period and any extended support
period. The Log shall be in an Employer approved format. The Log shall
be available for inspection by the Employer at any time during the year
that it covers. The Maintenance Log Book shall be turned over at the
completion of maintenance contract. The Log shall be kept on a
component-by-component (equipment number) basis, with separate
sections or volumes, as appropriate, for each component. The Log shall
itemize the history of preventative maintenance and corrective/repair
activities, stating the character, duration, cause, cure of all malfunctions
and the individual’s name that completed the repair. The Log shall
record all software and hardware updates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials and products, excepting Owner Furnished Equipment (OFE),
and materials, shall be appropriate for the intended use and shall meet
all applicable UL, EN, BS, ISO and IEC Regulations.
B. All system components shall be manufactured by ISO 9001:2000 certified

companies and all packaging shall carry clear product identification
(catalogue number, quality control number, etc.)
C. All products shall be new, of the latest version at time of Installation, and
brought to the job site in original manufacturer's packaging. Electrical
components shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories label. This listing
requirement applies to the entire assembly. Only systems and equipment
that meet or exceed the level of quality and capabilities stated within this
document will be considered for acceptance.
D. The contractor is to provide a written statement from all manufacturers

that all installed hardware and software are the latest models at the time
of handover.
E. Materials shall be listed and approved for the particular application and
permitted by the authority having jurisdiction for the application.
F. All equipment provided shall be suitable with KSA Power outlet provided
by Authority and shall be coordinated with electrical designer/contractor
prior to order placement.
G. All components will be approved by the Consultant and afford the most
aesthetic value possible while maintaining specified functionality.
Hardware will adhere to the following guidelines:
2. Unobtrusiveness
3. Functionality
H. All workstation termination hardware shall match the existing wall surface
color as closely as possible, to include mounting boxes, faceplates, and
outlets.
I. Provide security covers on non user-operated equipment having front

panel controls. Install covers at the conclusion of Acceptance Testing.
K. All lighting conditions shall be verified prior to the procurement and

installation of cameras. Cameras in areas requiring backlight
compensation, or other open or proprietary video lighting enhancement

technology shall be provided. The use of light

enhancement technology shall not degrade or reduce the quality of the
camera images.
L. All Security Management System hardware, software and system

components shall be provided in complete with compatible and
seamlessly integrated, with a single manufacturer or partnership of
manufacturers. All equipment shall be in current production, and the
latest model or version of all equipment shall be utilized.
M. All outdoor equipment shall be suitable for the weather condition of the
region it is installed.
N. The installation, programming, demonstration and acceptance tests shall

be done by a manufacturer certified engineer.

A. The electronic security system shall consist of the complete integration of
security system not limited to the following:
1. Video surveillance system consisting of an IP based video CCTV
cameras, network recording media, and software for controlling
and managing site video.
2. Access Control and Alarm System consisting of Access Control card
readers, panic buttons, card badging system including hardware,
software, wiring, and associated integration with the Security Video
Management System.
3. Security Management system to seamlessly integrate video
surveillance and access control system from a single video
B. The Hotel electronic system shall be on independent Physical LAN. All
security video management system and access control management
system including servers & cameras, access control panels, servers and
workstations will be running on independent physical security LAN. The
security LAN and corresponding cabling shall be provided by the IT.
C. Retail space shall be provided with independent video surveillance

system running on retail facility IT network with independent monitoring
room as shown in the drawings. All the CCTV cameras in the retail area
shall be connected to Network Video Recorder provided in the retail
server room.
D. The access control for guestrooms and Public Areas as well as all other
protected areas should be managed by the same access control system
in order to guarantee a seamless operational access of staff and guests,
as well as the guaranteed use of the same access cards throughout the
premise.
E. Card readers have to be available for all purposes like indoor, outdoor,
elevator control, gate barriers and other back of house locations that
have to be protected by access control.
F. Besides the daily operations with guests, card readers can be configured
to grant access to a group of staff members or guests. This function is

required for common areas such as boardroom,

conference rooms, SPA area, swimming pool, car park and hotel doors
that may be used by all hotel guests or by a defined group.
G. Core switches and servers shall reside in the security equipment room as
shown in the IT and security drawings.
H. Security monitoring room shall be provided with video walls and security
workstation, master intercoms for monitoring and control of security
equipment.
I. The contractor shall provide door contacts to all final exit doors and
should be monitored and alarmed from the security monitoring room.
J. The contractor shall provide surveillance cameras at all entry and exit
doors.
K. The contractor shall provide Panic alarm buttons at all areas where cash
is handled in coordination with the operator at the time of installation.
L. Emergency Pull chords shall be provided for Gym, Pool, steam and Sauna
Rooms. The Emergency pull chords shall be interfaced with access control
system for alarming the security monitoring room. The Emergency pull
chord shall be also connected to Audible Alarm placed at the respective
reception for local alarming.
M. Staff entry shall be provided with Card reader at both sides for time and
attendance. The card readers shall be used for sign in and sign out.
N. Surge Protection: Protect components from voltage surges originating

external to equipment housing and entering through power,
communication, signal, control, or sensing leads. Include surge
protection for external wiring of each conductor entry connection to
components.
O. Tamper Protection: Tamper switches on enclosures, control units, pull

boxes, junction boxes, cabinets, and other system components shall
initiate a tamper-alarm signal when unit is opened or partially
disassembled. Control-station, control-unit alarm display shall identify
tamper alarms and indicate locations.
2.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE CAMERAS

A. All interior camera locations, unless otherwise noted on the drawings, shall
be ceiling mounted, fixed position dome type. Security drawings denote
general location of cameras only, exact mounting location and field of
views shall be approved by the Owner and Architect prior to installation.
The Contractor shall assist the Owner in identifying the best field-of-view
through field investigation and testing.
B. All fixed cameras shall be designed for Day/Night/Low Light functionality

with varifocal lens and shall be WDR capable where required.

C. The outdoor camera shall be vandal resistant complying with IP66

weatherproofing standards, can operate in KSA weather condition and
shall have IR lights in assist in low light conditions.
D. The PTZ cameras shall have a 3-axis gimbal with 360° pan 90° tilt and 180°
Z-rotation for easy and accurate positioning.
E. All cameras shall have dual standard compression support with

simultaneous streaming of both H.264 and MJPEG formats
with Controllable frame rate and bandwidth.
F. The camera shall provide 5 level settings for quality of H.264 compression.
G. The camera shall support a HTTP and RTSP/RTP network protocols.
H. The cameras shall feature motion detection with a minimum of 500

independent detection zones.
I. The camera’s primary power source shall be Power over Ethernet (PoE)
complying with the IEEE 802.3af standard.
J. The camera shall have the alternative option to be powered from

between a 12V DC or 24V AC power source providing at least 5W of
power.
K. The camera’s operating ambient temperature shall be -40°C (-40°F) to

50ºC (122ºF) for warm start conditions (for outdoor fixed dome and bullet
models).
L. The camera shall be FCC Part 15, Class A and CE compliant.
M. The camera shall have the ability to directly export snapshot images in
JPEG form and video clips via email, FTP, Network storage and on board
SDHC card.
N. The camera shall be able to store and utilize the user name and password
of the SMTP server to enable protected email export.
O. The camera shall have at least one alarm output and one alarm input.
P. All box cameras shall be enclosed with protective housing.
Q. The Video surveillance Cameras shall be from
1. Honeywell.
2. Panasonic
3. Pelco
4. Or approved equivalent.
2.4 FIXED DOME IP CAMERA:

A. Fixed dome and box cameras shall have an integrated 3.3-12mm IR
corrected varifocal lens.

B. The dome cameras shall be surface mountable with optional pendant

mount or wall mount.
C. 1/2.7” 1.3/720p MP image sensor
D. High-performance DSP
E. H.264/MJEPG video compression and JPEG image capture
F. Support dual-stream encoding
G. Minimum 25fps@1.3MP/720 (1280×720) or higher
H. Support ICR true Day/Night
I. Built-in 3~12mm/F1.6 CS Auto Iris lens
J. Support Alarm I/O
K. Support DC12V/AC24V dual power supply, PoE
L. IK10-rated Vandal-proof or IP66 Water-proof
M. Built-in Web server, NVR, CMS(PVMS/DVMS) & MSS
2.5 FIXED BOX ENCLOSED IP CAMERA:

A. 1/2.7” 1.3/720p MP image sensor
B. High-performance DSP
C. H.264/MJEPG video compression and JPEG image capture
D. Support Dual-stream encoding
E. Minimum resolution 25fps@1.3MP / 720p (1280×720) or higher
F. Support ICR true Day/Night
G. Support C/CS Auto Iris lens
H. Support Alarm I/O, RS485 and RS232 interface
I. PoE(IEEE802.3af)
J. Support DC12V/AC24V dual power supply
K. Built-in Web server, NVR, CMS(PVMS/DVMS) & MSS
L. WDR Capable
2.6 PTZ DOME IP CAMERA

A. The dome cameras shall be surface mountable with optional pendant
mount or wall mount.

B. Image: 1/2.8” Progressive CMOS Exmor™, 2 mega-pixel,

solid state Progressive
C. Wide Dynamic Range
D. True day nigh with mechanical cut filter removal mechanism
E. Auto Tracing White Balance Adjustable
F. Automatic Gain Control Selectable AGC On/off and limit
G. Freeze frame When moving to preset position, selectable
H. Shutter Speed 1/2 - 1/30,000 sec (Auto)
I. Lens 20X optical zoom
J. Horizontal Field of View 55.2° (wide); 2.9° (telephoto)
K. Vertical Field of View 31.8° (wide); 1.8° (telephoto)
L. Aperture (Aspherical Design) F1.6~F3.5 (wide~telephoto)
M. Focal Length 4.7mm~94mm (wide~telephoto)
N. Minimum Scene Illumination 0.4 Lux Color, AGC on, 1/8s
O. Supported Codecs H.264 and MJPEG up to 1080p 30ips
P. IP Video Streams 4 maximum including codec sharing

duplicate streams
Q. Resolutions Shall Support a minimum of(1920 x 1080)

1080p
R. GOP: 1-150
S. Rate Control CBR, VBR
T. Frame Skip: With CBR
U. Bit Rate (CBR): Selectable: 16 kbps to 10 Mbps
V. Quality (VBR): Highest, High, Medium, Low, Lowest
W. Manual Pan/Tilt Speed: 0.25° to 100° per second scaled in

proportion to zoom position.
X. Preset Pan/Tilt Speed: 512° per Second Maximum.
Y. Pan Travel: 360° continuous, no end stop.
Z. Tilt Travel: 105°; 210° with the Tilt auto flip feature
AA. Tilt and Pan Accuracy: +/- 0. 25°
BB. Zoom and Focus Accuracy: +/- 0.5%

CC. Preset access Time: Less than 1 second to position.
DD. Full zoom position in < 4 seconds.
EE. Alarm Inputs: 4
FF. Auxiliary Output: One form 1-C relay
GG. Streaming: Shall Support Multicast and Unicast.
HH. Standards ONVIF/PSIA Standards.
II. WDR Capable
JJ. Support 24VAC and PoE+
2.7 POWER SUPPLIES

A. Power Supplies: Low-voltage power supplies matched for voltage and
current requirements of cameras and accessories, type as recommended
by camera, infrared illuminator, and lens manufacturer.
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, 3 or 4X.
2.8 CAMERA-SUPPORTING EQUIPMENT

A. Minimum Load Rating: Rated for load in excess of the total weight
supported times a minimum safety factor of two.
B. Pan Units: Motorized automatic-scanning units arranged to provide

remote-controlled manual and automatic camera panning action and
equipped with matching mounting brackets.
1. Scanning Operation: Silent, smooth, and positive.
2. Stops: Adjustable without disassembly, to limit the scanning arc.
C. Pan-and-Tilt Units: Motorized units arranged to provide remote-controlled

aiming of cameras with smooth and silent operation and equipped with
matching mounting brackets.
1. Panning Rotation: 0 to 355 degrees, with adjustable stops.
2. Tilt Movement: 90 degrees, plus or minus 5 degrees, with adjustable

stops.
3. Speed: 12 degrees per second in both horizontal and vertical

planes.
4. Wiring: Factory prewired for camera and zoom lens functions and
pan-and-tilt power and control.
5. Built-in encoders or potentiometers for position feedback, and

thermostat-controlled heater.

6. Pan-and-tilt unit shall be available with preset positioning capability

to recall the position of a specific scene.
D. Mounting Brackets for Fixed Cameras: Type matched to items supported

and mounting conditions. Include manual pan-and-tilt adjustment.
E. Camera Poles: The Poles shall be fit for purpose with heights 10ft and 15ft
with no welding used. The Poles shall have high wind rating and rigid to
minimize camera shakes during high winds.
1. Wind rating upto 120MPH
2. The Poles shall have gasketed hand hole opening for making
connections to cables.
3. Poles/fasteners shall be salt spray tested and shall be able to handle

harshest environment.
4. 4” square poles with flat faces for easy mounting of camera
F. Protective Housings for Fixed and Movable Cameras: Steel or 6061 T6

aluminum enclosures with internal camera mounting and connecting
provisions that are matched to camera/lens combination and mounting
and installing arrangement of camera to be housed.
1. Tamper switch on access cover sounds an alarm signal when unit is

opened or partially disassembled. Central-control unit shall identify
tamper alarms and indicate location in alarm display. Tamper
switches and central-control unit are specified in Division 28 Section
"Intrusion Detection."
2. Camera Viewing Window: Polycarbonate window, aligned with

camera lens.
3. Duplex Receptacle: Internally mounted.
4. Alignment Provisions: Camera mounting shall provide for field

aiming of camera and permit removal and reinstallation of camera
lens without disturbing camera alignment.
5. Built-in thermostat-activated heater and blower units. Units shall be

automatically controlled so the environmental limits of the camera
equipment are not exceeded.
6. With sun shield that does not interfere with normal airflow around the
housing.
7. Mounting bracket and hardware for wall or ceiling mounting of the

housing. Bracket shall be of same material as the housing; mounting
hardware shall be stainless steel.
8. Finish: Housing and mounting bracket shall be factory finished using

manufacturer's standard finishing process suitable for the
environment.

9. Enclosure Rating: NEMA 250, Type 3R IEC 60529, IP 52.
2.9 ISCSI VIDEO STORAGE AREA NETWORK

A. The Contractor shall provide an iSCSI Storage Area Network (SAN) as best
suited and recommended by the manufacturer for the project. The
solution that shall record incoming IP video streams directly through an
embedded/Windows™ or other operating based server. The SAN system
shall be capable, without additional software or licensing, to support the
camera quantity denoted on the security riser drawings, with an
additional 25% expansion.
B. The system shall follow FRHI guidelines for resolution and frame rate for
recording of cameras and calculation of storage. Requirement from KSA
MOI or Police shall be provided apart from the guidelines. The following
based on the provide the following recording requirements for all video
signals:
1. Resolution:
a. All cameras : 1280 x 720
2. Frame rate:
a. Fire Exits – 25 frames per second
b. Cameras at Vehicles entrances -25 frames per second
c. PTZ cameras – 25 frames per second
d. Main Entrances – 12 frames per second
e. Reception - 6 frames per second
f. Public and BOH areas – 3 frames per second
3. 31 days of retention
4. H.264 compression
5. Additional Storage for expansion up to 25%
C. The Contractor shall be required to provide calculations based on

camera use, frame file size, complexity of Image and other industry
practices to ensure that the minimum recording retention is met. Once
commissioned, the Contractor will provide written verification that 31
days of retention have been met. If the system fails to meet the 31 day
requirement, the Contractor shall provide additional storage disks, at
Contractor’s cost, to achieve the requirement, with 25% additional
storage for expansion purposes.
D. All recorded video shall be stored on hard disks(s) to allow immediate

access to viewing during this period and shall be First In, First out (FIFO).

1. Video recording rates (frames per second) shall be selectable by

camera, time, date, or motion detection.
2. The video management servers and storage shall be located within

a security rack.
3. The SAN shall operate over a local area network (LAN) that shall
allow multiple operators simultaneous access to video data.
E. The SAN shall utilize a fault tolerant recording solution with the following
requirements:
1. Level 5 iSCSI RAID, hot swappable, equal to the data being stored
with an additional 25% capacity than what is required. The RAID unit
shall provide data striping at the byte level and also stripe error
correction information with excellent performance and good fault
tolerance. The Contractor shall supply hard drives in SCSI format.
2. The system shall support a redundant array of multiple independent

hard disk drives RAID that provide high performance and fault
tolerance. The RAID array shall appear to the host computer as a
single storage unit.
3. RAID level 5 includes disk striping at the block level and parity. The
administrator shall be able to replace the failed drive without taking
the security system down. The array software shall rebuild the lost
data from parity information stored on the other drives in the array.
Array rebuilding shall not affect the performance of any Video
Management System components.
4. Provide RAID management software for physical and logical

supervision of the RAID Subsystem. The RAID management software
shall, at a minimum, report: Logical disk errors, physical disk errors,
power supply failures, over temperature, SCSI interface failure.
2.10 VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. The Contractor shall provide a completely digital, IP based Video
management system, which shall include any and all equipment as
required to facilitate the functionality and operation desired. This shall
include, but is not limited to:
1. IP Cameras
2. IP Encoders/Decoders
3. Open, non-proprietary computer servers and workstations
4. Video Management Software
5. Video Analytics Package
6. Open/non-proprietary data storage

B. Video Management Software shall provide full user interface for the
viewing of streaming video images, recall and review of recorded video
images, and real-time video analytics capabilities.
C. The VMS shall support open protocol like ONVIF/PSIA and shall have a fully
functional, tested and reliable Application Program Interface (API) to the
Storage Area Network and Access control management system ensuring
functional operation.
D. The VMS shall be based on one-time licensing per camera. VMS/Camera

devices that require annual licensing/costs shall not be used.
E. Each instance of VMS client shall support up to 4 connected LED monitors
F. VMS client installed on a hardware platform meeting the recommended

specification shall support the simultaneous display of up to 64 video
streams across all connected monitors.
G. Each instance of VMS client shall support the simultaneous connection of

up to 2 supported CCTV keyboards
H. VMS client shall support the completion of a motion search over 1 week
of available recorded analog or IP video of a scene containing an
average level of motion throughout, regardless of codec or resolution of
the recorded video, within 2 minutes.
I. VMS client shall ensure constant audio / video synchronization to within ½ a

second for all supported video and audio devices.
J. VMS shall support event and message volumes up to a maximum of 5

transactions per second
K. The VMS shall show the corresponding Cameras on the videowall based
on the alarm notification received.
L. VMS shall support a maximum total database size of 10 GB when running

SQL 2008 Express (approximately 10 million records).
M. VMS shall support a maximum total database size of 524,272 TB when

running SQL 2008 Standard Edition (approximately 525,000,000 million
records).
N. The video management system shall be from
1. Honeywell.
2. Siemens
3. Milestone

2.11 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

A. The access control to the guestrooms and the public should be managed
by the same access control system in order to guarantee a seamless
logging of staff and guest activities into the same database, as well as
the guaranteed use of the same access cards throughout the premise.
B. Provide access control Panel in IDF room along with I/O Module to
monitor/control field devices such as door contacts, Emergency Pull
Alarm, Panic Buttons, etc.
C. System shall consist of a PC-based Central Station, one or more

networked PC-based workstations, and IP based field-installed Controllers
with I/O Modules to monitor/ control field devices, Card Reader with IP
controllers for Public and BOH access controlled doors, Guest room card
readers and locked with ZigBee transmitter, field devices such as door
contacts, Panic Alarm buttons, Emergency pull alarm systems, Gate
barriers, Rising bollards.
1. System Software: Based on 32-bit, Microsoft Windows or Microsoft

Windows NT central-station, workstation operating system, server
operating system, and application software. Software shall have
the following capabilities:
a. Multiuser multitasking to allow for independent activities and

monitoring to occur simultaneously at different workstations.
b. Graphical user interface to show pull-down menus and a

menu tree format that complies with interface guidelines of
Microsoft Windows operating system.
c. System license shall be for the entire system and shall include
capability for future additions that are within the indicated
system size limits specified in this Section.
d. System shall have open architecture that allows importing and

exporting of data and interfacing with other systems that are
compatible with Microsoft Windows operating system.
e. Password-protected operator login and access.
2. Network connecting the Central Station and workstations shall be a

LAN or WAN using Microsoft Windows-based TCP/IP with a capacity
of connecting up to 150 workstations. Dedicated LAN shall be
provided for the security system which can be shared among the
CCTV system and the access control system.
3. Provide Time Attendance system at the staff entry and shall utilize
the same staff access cards to enroll-in and enroll out. The access
control system shall be integrated with the time and attendance
software.
4. Security access system shall use a single database for access-

control and credential-creation functions.

5. Data Capacity:
a. 130 different card-reader formats.
b. 999 comments.
c. 16 graphic file types for importing maps.

6. Location Capacity:
a. 128 reader-controlled doors.
b. 50,000 total access credentials.
c. 2048 supervised alarm inputs.
d. 2048 programmable outputs.
e. 32,000 custom action messages per Location to instruct

operator on action required when alarm is received.
7. System Network Requirements:
a. Interconnect system components and provide automatic
communication of status changes, commands, field-initiated
interrupts, and other communications required for proper
system operation.
b. Communication shall not require operator initiation or

response, and shall return to normal after partial or total
network interruption such as power loss or transient upset.
c. System shall automatically annunciate communication failures

to the operator and identify the communication link that has
experienced a partial or total failure.
d. Communications Controller may be used as an interface

between the Central Station display systems and the field
device network. Communications Controller shall provide
functions required to attain the specified network
communications performance.
1. Central Station shall provide operator interface, interaction, display,

control, and dynamic and real-time monitoring. Central Station
shall control system networks to interconnect all system
components, including workstations and field-installed Controllers.
2. Field equipment shall include Controllers, sensors, and controls.

Controllers shall serve as an interface between the Central Station
and sensors and controls. Data exchange between the Central
Station and the Controllers shall include down-line transmission of
commands, software, and databases to Controllers. The up-line
data exchange from the Controller to the Central Station shall
include status data such as intrusion alarms, status reports, and
entry-control records. Controllers are classified as alarm-
annunciation or entry-control type.

3. System Response to Alarms: Field device network shall provide a

system end-to-end response time of 1 second(s) or less for every
device connected to the system. Alarms shall be annunciated at
the Central Station within 1 second of the alarm occurring at a
Controller or device controlled by a local Controller, and within 100
ms if the alarm occurs at the Central Station. Alarm and status
changes shall be displayed within 100 ms after receipt of data by
the Central Station. All graphics shall be displayed, including
graphics-generated map displays, on the console monitor within 5
seconds of alarm receipt at the security console. This response time
shall be maintained during system heavy load.
4. False Alarm Reduction: The design of Central Station and

Controllers shall contain features to reduce false alarms. Equipment
and software shall comply with SIA CP-01.
5. Error Detection: A cyclic code error detection method shall be used

between Controllers and the Central Station, which shall detect
single- and double-bit errors, burst errors of eight bits or less, and at
least 99 percent of all other multibit and burst error conditions.
Interactive or product error detection codes alone will not be
acceptable. A message shall be in error if one bit is received
incorrectly. System shall retransmit messages with detected errors.
A two-digit decimal number shall be operator assignable to each
communication link representing the number of retransmission
attempts. When the number of consecutive retransmission attempts
equals the assigned quantity, the Central Station shall print a
communication failure alarm message. System shall monitor the
frequency of data transmission failure for display and logging.
6. Data Line Supervision: System shall initiate an alarm in response to

opening, closing, shorting, or grounding of data transmission lines.
7. Door Hardware Interface: Coordinate with Division 08 Sections that

specify door hardware required to be monitored or controlled by
the security access system. The Controllers in this Section shall have
electrical characteristics that match the signal and power
requirements of door hardware. Integrate door hardware specified
in Division 08 Sections to function with the controls and PC-based
software and hardware in this Section.
D. The system can handle multiple access levels for the guest.
E. The system shall be capable of downloading all events by portable

device and/or readout cards also.
F. The system shall be able to register (latest 2000 events) each access and
access attempt in the reader itself and is able to archive the data on a
long term basis.
G. The system shall provide Reports for subsequent evidence of access

according to various criteria. The user shall be able to produce individual
reports via a standard report generator.

H. System shall have an auto validation option for staff cards.
2.12 APPLICATION SOFTWARE

A. System Software: Based on 32-bit, Microsoft Windows central-station and
workstation operating system and application software. Software shall
have the following features:
1. Multiuser multitasking to allow independent activities and monitoring

to occur simultaneously at different workstations.
2. Graphical user interface to show pull-down menus and a menu tree

format.
3. Capability for future additions within the indicated system size limits.
4. Open architecture that allows importing and exporting of data and

interfacing with other systems that are compatible with operating
system.
5. Password-protected operator login and access.
B. Application Software: Interface between the alarm annunciation and

entry-control Controllers, to monitor sensors and DTS links, operate
displays, report alarms, generate reports, and help train system operators.
Security workstations shall be provided at security control room and HR
room. Software shall have the following functions:
1. Resides at the Central Station, workstations, and Controllers as

required to perform specified functions.
2. Operate and manage peripheral devices.
3. Manage files for disk I/O, including creating, deleting, and copying
files; and automatically maintain a directory of all files, including size
and location of each sequential and random-ordered record.
4. Import custom icons into graphics views to represent alarms and I/O
devices.
5. Globally link I/O so that any I/O can link to any other I/O within the
same Location, without requiring interaction with the host PC. This
operation shall be at the Controller.
6. Globally code I/O links so that any access-granted event can link to
any I/O with the same Location without requiring interaction with
the host PC. This operation shall be at the Controller.
7. Messages from PC to Controllers and Controllers to Controllers shall

be on a polled network that utilizes check summing and
acknowledgment of each message. Communication shall be
automatically verified, buffered, and retransmitted if message is not
acknowledged.

8. Selectable poll frequency and message time-out settings shall

handle bandwidth and latency issues for TCP/IP, RF, and other PC-
to-Controller communications methods by changing the polling
frequency and the amount of time the system waits for a response.
9. Automatic and encrypted backups for database and history

backups shall be automatically stored at the central control PC and
encrypted with a nine-character alphanumeric password, which
must be used to restore or read data contained in backup.
10. Operator audit trail for recording and reporting all changes made to
database and system software.
C. Controller Software:
1. Controllers shall operate as an autonomous intelligent processing

unit. Controllers shall make decisions about access control, alarm
monitoring, linking functions, and door locking schedules for its
operation, independent of other system components. Controllers
shall be part of a fully distributed processing control network. The
portion of the database associated with a Controller and consisting
of parameters, constraints, and the latest value or status of points
connected to that Controller, shall be maintained in the Controller.
2. Functions: The following functions shall be fully implemented and

operational within each Controller:
a. Monitoring inputs.
b. Controlling outputs.
c. Automatically reporting alarms to the Central Station.
d. Reporting of sensor and output status to Central Station on

request.
e. Maintaining real time, automatically updated by the Central

Station at least once a day.
f. Communicating with the Central Station.
g. Executing Controller resident programs.
h. Diagnosing.
i. Downloading and uploading data to and from the Central

Station.
3. Individual Controller Operation:
a. Controllers shall transmit alarms, status changes, and other

data to the Central Station when communications circuits are
operable. If communications are not available, Controllers
shall function in a stand-alone mode and operational data,
including the status and alarm data normally transmitted to

the Central Station, shall be stored for later

transmission to the Central Station. Storage capacity for the
latest 1024 events shall be provided at each Controller.
4. Communications Monitoring:
a. Communication status window shall display which Controllers

are currently communicating, a total count of missed polls
since midnight, and which Controller last missed a poll.
5. Operating systems shall include a real-time clock function that

maintains seconds, minutes, hours, day, date, and month. The real-
time clock shall be automatically synchronized with the Central
Station at least once a day to plus or minus 10 seconds. The time
synchronization shall be automatic, without operator action and
without requiring system shutdown.
D. Database Downloads:
1. All data transmissions from PCs to a Location, and between

Controllers at a Location, shall include a complete database
checksum to check the integrity of the transmission. If the data
checksum does not match, a full data download shall be
automatically retransmitted.
2. If a Controller is reset for any reason, it shall automatically request

and receive a database download from the PC. The download
shall restore data stored at the Controller to their normal working
state and shall take place with no operator intervention.
3. Software shall provide for setting downloads via dial-up connection

to once per 24-hour period, with time selected by the operator.
4. Software shall provide for setting delays of database downloads for

dial-up connections. Delays change the download from
immediately to a delay ranging from 1 to 999 minutes.
E. Operator Interface:
1. Inputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the
normal state and one for the abnormal state.
2. When viewing and controlling inputs, displayed icons shall

automatically change to the proper icon to display the current
system state in real time. Icons shall also display the input's state,
whether armed or bypassed, and if the input is in the armed or
bypassed state due to a time zone or a manual command.
3. Outputs in system shall have two icon representations, one for the
secure (locked) state and one for the open (unlocked) state.
4. Icons displaying status of the I/O points shall be constantly updated

to show their current real-time condition without prompting by the
operator.

5. The operator shall be able to scroll the list of I/Os and press the
appropriate toolbar button, or right click, to command the system
to perform the desired function.
6. Graphic maps or drawings containing inputs, outputs, and override

groups shall include the following:
a. Database to import and store full-color maps or drawings and

allow for input, output, and override group icons to be placed
on maps.
b. Maps to provide real-time display animation and allow for

control of points assigned to them.
c. System to allow inputs, outputs, and override groups to be

placed on different maps.
d. Software to allow changing the order or priority in which maps

will be displayed.
1. Override Groups Containing I/Os:
a. System shall incorporate override groups that provide the
operator with the status and control over user-defined "sets" of
I/Os with a single icon.
b. Icon shall change automatically to show the live summary

status of points in that group.
c. Override group icon shall provide a method to manually

control or set to time zone points in the group.
d. Override group icon shall allow the expanding of the group to

show icons representing the live status for each point in the
group, individual control over each point, and the ability to
compress the individual icons back into one summary icon.
2. Schedule Overrides of I/Os and Override Groups:
a. To accommodate temporary schedule changes that do not
fall within the holiday parameters, the operator shall have the
ability to override schedules individually for each input, output,
or override group.
b. Each schedule shall be composed of a minimum of two dates

with separate times for each date.
c. The first time and date shall be assigned the override state that
the point shall advance to, when the time and date become
current.
d. The second time and date shall be assigned the state that the
point shall return to, when the time and date become current.
3. Copy command in database shall allow for like data to be copied
and then edited for specific requirements, to reduce redundant
data entry.

F. Operator Access Control:
1. Control operator access to system controls through three password-

protected operator levels. System operators and managers with
appropriate password clearances shall be able to change operator
levels for operators.
2. Three successive attempts by an operator to execute functions

beyond their defined level during a 24-hour period shall initiate a
software tamper alarm.
3. A minimum of 32 passwords shall be available with the system

software. System shall display the operator's name or initials in the
console's first field. System shall print the operator's name or initials,
action, date, and time on the system printer at login and logoff.
4. The password shall not be displayed or printed.
5. Each password shall be definable and assignable for the following:
a. Commands usable.
b. Access to system software.
c. Access to application software.
d. Individual zones that are to be accessed.
e. Access to database.
G. Operator Commands:
1. Command Input: Plain-language words and acronyms shall allow

operators to use the system without extensive training or data-
processing backgrounds. System prompts shall be a word, a phrase,
or an acronym.
2. Command inputs shall be acknowledged and processing shall start

in not less than 1 second(s).
3. Tasks that are executed by operator's commands shall include the

following:
a. Acknowledge Alarms: Used to acknowledge that the

operator has observed the alarm message.
b. Place Zone in Access: Used to remotely disable intrusion alarm

circuits emanating from a specific zone. System shall be
structured so that console operator cannot disable tamper
circuits.
c. Place Zone in Secure: Used to remotely activate intrusion

alarm circuits emanating from a specific zone.
d. System Test: Allows the operator to initiate a system-wide

operational test.

e. Zone Test: Allows the operator to initiate an operational test for

a specific zone.
f. Print reports.
g. Change Operator: Used for changing operators.
h. Security Lighting Controls: Allows the operator to remotely turn

on/off security lights.
i. Display Graphics: Used to display any graphic displays

implemented in the system. Graphic displays shall be
completed within 20 seconds from time of operator
command.
j. Run system tests.
k. Generate and format reports.
l. Request help with the system operation.
m. Include in main menus.
n. Provide unique, descriptive, context-sensitive help for

selections and functions with the press of one function key.
o. Provide navigation to specific topic from within the first help

window.
p. Help shall be accessible outside the applications program.
q. Entry-Control Commands:
r. Lock (secure) or unlock (open) each controlled entry and exit

up to four times a day through time-zone programming.
s. Arm or disarm each monitored input up to four times a day

through time-zone programming.
t. Enable or disable readers or keypads up to twice a day

through time-zone programming.
u. Enable or disable cards or codes up to four times per day per

entry point through access-level programming.
4. Command Input Errors: Show operator input assistance when a

command cannot be executed because of operator input errors.
Assistance screen shall use plain-language words and phrases to
explain why the command cannot be executed. Error responses
that require an operator to look up a code in a manual or other
document are not acceptable. Conditions causing operator
assistance messages include the following:
a. Command entered is incorrect or incomplete.
b. Operator is restricted from using that command.

c. Command addresses a point that is disabled or out of service.
d. Command addresses a point that does not exist.
e. Command is outside the system's capacity.
H. Alarms:
1. System Setup:
a. Assign manual and automatic responses to incoming point

status change or alarms.
b. Automatically respond to input with a link to other inputs,

outputs, operator-response plans, unique sound with use of
WAV files, and maps or images that graphically represent the
point location.
c. 60-character message field for each alarm.
d. Operator-response-action messages shall allow message

length of at least 65,000 characters, with database storage
capacity of up to 32,000 messages. Setup shall assign
messages to access point zone sensor.
e. Secondary messages shall be assignable by the operator for

printing to provide further information and shall be editable by
the operator.
f. Allow 25 secondary messages with a field of 4 lines of 60

characters each.
g. Store the most recent 1000 alarms for recall by the operator
using the report generator.
2. Software Tamper:
a. Annunciate a tamper alarm when unauthorized changes to

system database files are attempted. Three consecutive
unsuccessful attempts to log onto system shall generate a
software tamper alarm.
b. Annunciate a software tamper alarm when an operator or

other individual makes three consecutive unsuccessful
attempts to invoke functions beyond their authorization level.
c. Maintain a transcript file of the last 5000 commands entered at

the each Central Station to serve as an audit trail. System shall
not allow write access to system transcript files by any person,
regardless of their authorization level.
d. Allow only acknowledgment of software tamper alarms.
3. Read access to system transcript files shall be reserved for operators

with the highest password authorization level available in system.

4. Animated Response Graphics: Highlight alarms with flashing icons

on graphic maps; display and constantly update the current status
of alarm inputs and outputs in real time through animated icons.
5. Multimedia Alarm Annunciation: WAV files to be associated with

alarm events for audio annunciation or instructions.
6. Alarm Handling: Each input may be configured so that an alarm

cannot be cleared unless it has returned to normal, with options of
requiring the operator to enter a comment about disposition of
alarm. Allow operator to silence alarm sound when alarm is
acknowledged.
7. Alarm Automation Interface: High-level interface to Central Station

alarm automation software systems. Allows input alarms to be
passed to and handled by automation systems in same manner as
burglar alarms, using an RS-232 ASCII interface.
8. CCTV Alarm Interface: Allow commands to be sent to CCTV

systems during alarms (or input change of state) through serial ports.
9. Camera Control: Provides operator ability to select and control

cameras from graphic maps.
I. Alarm Monitoring: Monitor sensors, Controllers, and DTS circuits and notify
operators of an alarm condition. Display higher-priority alarms first and,
within alarm priorities, display the oldest unacknowledged alarm first.
Operator acknowledgment of one alarm shall not be considered
acknowledgment of other alarms nor shall it inhibit reporting of
subsequent alarms.
1. Displayed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm,

and secondary alarm messages.
2. Printed alarm data shall include type of alarm, location of alarm,

date and time (to nearest second) of occurrence, and operator
responses.
3. Maps shall automatically display the alarm condition for each input
assigned to that map, if that option is selected for that input
location.
4. Alarms initiate a status of "pending" and require the following two

handling steps by operators:
a. First Operator Step: "Acknowledged." This action shall silence

sounds associated with the alarm. The alarm remains in the
system "Acknowledged" but "Un-Resolved."
b. Second Operator Step: Operators enter the resolution or

operator comment, giving the disposition of the alarm event.
The alarm shall then clear.

1. Alarms shall be displayed and managed from a minimum of four

different windows.
a. Input Status Window: Overlay status icon with a large red

blinking icon. Selecting the icon will acknowledge the alarm.
b. History Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date

in red text. Selecting red text will acknowledge the alarm.
c. Alarm Log Transaction Window: Display name, time, and date

in red. Selecting red text will acknowledge the alarm.
d. Graphic Map Display: Display a steady colored icon

representing each alarm input location. Change icon to
flashing red when the alarm occurs. Change icon from
flashing red to steady red when the alarm is acknowledged.
1. Once an alarm is acknowledged, the operator shall be prompted

to enter comments about the nature of the alarm and actions
taken. Operator's comments may be manually entered or selected
from a programmed predefined list, or a combination of both.
2. For locations where there are regular alarm occurrences, provide

programmed comments. Selecting that comment shall clear the
alarm.
3. The time and name of the operator who acknowledged and

resolved the alarm shall be recorded in the database.
4. Identical alarms from same alarm point shall be acknowledged at

same time the operator acknowledges the first alarm. Identical
alarms shall be resolved when the first alarm is resolved.
5. Alarm functions shall have priority over downloading, retrieving, and

updating database from workstations and Controllers.
6. When a reader-controlled output (relay) is opened, the

corresponding alarm point shall be automatically bypassed.
J. Monitor Display: Display text and graphic maps that include zone status
integrated into the display. Colors are used for the various components
and current data. Colors shall be uniform throughout the system.
1. Color Code:
a. FLASHING RED: Alerts operator that a zone has gone into an

alarm or that primary power has failed.
b. STEADY RED: Alerts operator that a zone is in alarm and alarm

has been acknowledged.
c. YELLOW: Advises operator that a zone is in access.
d. GREEN: Indicates that a zone is secure and that power is on.

K. System test software enables operators to initiate a test of the entire

system or of a particular portion of the system.
1. Test Report: The results of each test shall be stored for future display
or printout. The report shall document the operational status of
system components.
L. Report Generator Software: Include commands to generate reports for

displaying, printing, and storing on disk and tape. Reports shall be stored
by type, date, and time. Report printing shall be the lowest priority
activity. Report generation mode shall be operator selectable but set up
initially as periodic, automatic, or on request. Include time and date
printed and the name of operator generating the report. Report formats
may be configured by operators.
1. Printing on Requests: An operator may request a printout of any

report.
2. Alarm Reports: Reporting shall be automatic as initially set up.

Include alarms recorded by system over the selected time and
information about the type of alarm (such as door alarm, intrusion
alarm, tamper alarm, etc.), the type of sensor, the location, the
time, and the action taken.
3. Access and Secure Reports: Document zones placed in access, the

time placed in access, and the time placed in secure mode.
4. Automatic History Reports: Named, saved, and scheduled for

automatic generation.
5. Cardholder Reports: Include data, or selected parts of the data, as

well as the ability to be sorted by name, card number, imprinted
number, or by any of the user-defined fields.
6. Cardholder by Reader Reports: Based on who has access to a

specific reader or group of readers by selecting the readers from a
list.
7. Cardholder by Access-Level Reports: Display everyone that has

been assigned to the specified access level.
8. Panel Labels Reports: Printout of control-panel field documentation

including the actual location of equipment, programming
parameters, and wiring identification. Maintain system installation
data within system database so that they are available on-site at all
times.
9. Activity and Alarm On-Line Printing: Activity printers for use at

workstations; prints all events or alarms only.
a. "Alarms," the total shall reflect how many alarms occurred

during that period.
10. Reports shall have the following four options:

a. View on screen.
b. Print to system printer. Include automatic print spooling and

"Print To" options if more than one printer is connected to
system.
c. "Save to File" with full path statement.
d. System shall have the ability to produce a report indicating

status of system inputs and outputs or of inputs and outputs
that are abnormal, out of time zone, manually overridden, not
reporting, or in alarm.
11. Custom Code List Subroutine: Allow the access codes of system to
be sorted and printed according to the following criteria:
a. Active, inactive, or future activate or deactivate.
b. Code number, name, or imprinted card number.
c. Group, Location, access levels.
d. Start and stop code range.
e. Codes that have not been used since a selectable number of

days.
f. In, out, or either status.
g. Codes with trace designation.
12. The reports of system database shall allow options so that every
data field may be printed.
13. The reports of system database shall be constructed so that the

actual position of the printed data shall closely match the position
of the data on the data-entry windows.
M. Time and Attendance:
1. Time and attendance reporting shall be provided to match IN and

OUT reads and display cumulative time in for each day and
cumulative time in for length of the report.
2. Shall be provided to match IN and OUT reads and display

cumulative time in for each day and cumulative time in for length of
the report.
3. System software setup shall allow designation of selected access-

control readers as time and attendance hardware to gather the
clock-in and clock-out times of the users at these readers.
a. Reports shall show in and out times for each day, total in time
for each day, and a total in time for period specified by the
user.

b. Allow the operator to view and print the reports, or save the
report to a file.
c. Alphabetically sort reports on the person's last name, by

Location or location group. Include all credential holders or
optionally select individual credential holders for the report.
N. SYSTEM DATABASE
1. Database and database management software shall define and

modify each point in database using operator commands.
Definition shall include parameters and constraints associated with
each system device.
a. Operators shall use a user name and password to log on to

system. This user name and password is used to access
database areas and programs as determined by the
associated profile.
b. Make provision to allow the operator to log off without fully

exiting program. User may be logged off but program will
remain running while displaying the login window for the next
operator.
2. Access Card/Code Operation and Management: Access

authorization shall be by card, by a manually entered code (PIN), or
by a combination of both (card plus PIN).
a. Access authorization shall verify the facility code first, the card
or card-and-PIN validation second, and the access level (time
of day, day of week, date), anti-passback status, and number
of uses last.
b. Allow assignment of up to four access levels for each Location

to a cardholder. Each access level may contain any
combination of doors.
c. Allow each cardholder to be given either an unlimited number

of uses or a number from 1 to 9998 that regulates the number
of times the card can be used before it is automatically
deactivated.
d. Provide for cards and codes to be activated and deactivated

manually or automatically by date. Provide for multiple
deactivate dates to be preprogrammed.
3. Key control and tracking shall be an integrated function of

cardholder data.
a. Provide the ability to store information about which

conventional metal keys are issued and to whom, along with
key construction information.

b. Reports shall be designed to list everyone that has possession

of a specified key
O. FIXED MAP DISPLAY
1. A fixed map display shall show layout of the protected facilities.

Zones corresponding to those monitored by system shall be
highlighted on the display. Status of each zone shall be displayed
using LEDs as required within each designated zone. An LED test
switch shall be provided on the map display.
P. The Access control management system shall be from
1. Honeywell.
2. Lenel
2.13 CONTROLLERS
A. Controllers: Intelligent peripheral control unit, complying with UL 294, that
stores time, date, valid codes, access levels, and similar data
downloaded from the Central Station or workstation for controlling its
operation.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements in this Article, manufacturers

may use multipurpose Controllers.
C. Battery Backup: Sealed, lead acid; sized to provide run time during a
power outage of 90 minutes, complying with UL 924.
D. Alarm Annunciation Controller:
1. The Controller shall automatically restore communication within 10

seconds after an interruption with the field device network with dc
line supervision on each of its alarm inputs.
a. Inputs: Monitor dry contacts for changes of state that reflect

alarm conditions. Provides at least eight alarm inputs, which
are suitable for wiring as normally open or normally closed
contacts for alarm conditions.
b. Alarm-Line Supervision: Supervise the alarm lines by monitoring

each circuit for changes or disturbances in the signal, and for
conditions as described in UL 1076 for line security equipment
using dc change measurements. System shall initiate an alarm
in response to an abnormal current, which is a dc change of 5
percent or more for longer than 500 ms.
c. Transmit alarm-line-supervision alarm to the Central Station

during the next interrogation cycle after the abnormal current
condition.
d. Outputs: Managed by Central Station software.

2. Auxiliary Equipment Power: A GFI service outlet inside the Controller

enclosure.
3. Approved Manufacturer:
a. Honeywell
b. Lenel
c. Or Approved Equal
E. Entry-Control Controller with Card reader (Public and BOH areas):
1. Controller Power: NFPA 70, Class II power supply transformer, with

12- or 24-V ac secondary, backup battery and charger.
2. The access control to the guestrooms and the public should be

managed by the same access control system in order to guarantee
a seamless logging of staff and guest activities into the same
database, as well as the guaranteed use of the same access cards
throughout the premise.
3. The RAR using for indoor and out door application shall have a card
reader with built-in controller installed on wall and interfaced with
suitable locking mechanism such as Maglock or Shear Lock or Door
Sensor (for revolving door) or any such locking mechanism depends
on the type and design of the door.
4. RAR shall be whether protected for outdoor installation.
5. RAR shall be standalone independent system and single door

controlling device to keep the redundancy of the system.
6. RAR shall be interfaced with fire alarm and the door lock shall be
released at the time of fire signal.
7. RAR for outdoor installation shall be powered via a UPS back up

power supply.
8. Fire Interface module shall be provided by the fire alarm contractor

for each door independently.
9. RAR for indoor installation shall be flush mounted with Glass/Acrylic

surface panel and shall be powered with a UPS backed up Power
supply or Powered through a Power Over Ethernet (POE) switch.
10. RAR for indoor & out door shall be interfaced with Egrees switch,
Break Glass Egress and Fire Alarm system.
11. The system has to support a minimum of 28 user roles (common

doors)
12. The System has to support a minimum of 256 user groups and
maximum of unlimited total rooms in the property.

13. Card readers have to be available for all purposes like indoor,
outdoor, elevator control, gate barriers and other back of house
locations that have to be protected by access control. Besides the
daily operations with guests, card readers can be configured to
grant access to a group of staff members or guests. This function is
required for common areas such as conference rooms, SPA area,
swimming pool, car park and hotel doors that may be used by all
hotel guests or by a defined group.
14. The system can handle multiple access levels for the guest. The
system has a capability of interfacing with fire alarm system.
15. The reader has a capability of reading readout card for download
the events.
16. The system registers latest 2000 events each access and access
attempt and is able to archive the data on a long term basis.
17. Reports are included to provide subsequent evidence of access

according to various criteria.
18. The user can produce individual reports via a standard report
generator.
19. Approved Manufacturer
a. Vingcard Remote controllers
b. Saflok Remote Access Controller/ Saflok Multifloor controller
c. Or Approved Equal
2.14 GUEST ROOM CARD READER AND LOCKS

A. Guest room Electronics locks shall be Standalone Electronic lock with RFID
technology and shall be powered by 3AA batteries.
B. Electronics lock shall be ADA compliant (guests with physical disabilities).
C. Electronics lock shall have future proof re-programmable FLASH RAM lock
memory.
D. Lock batteries shall be located or concealed inside the door.
E. Shall support Read out card function and shall have the capability of
2000 event audit trail in lock itself.
F. Card reader shall be integrated with the mortised electronic lock case
and shall be installed in the door.
G. Card reader and complete electronics shall be concealed inside the

door and only LED indication and reader symbol shall be visible on the
door from outside. ( Invisible)

H. Only Status indication LED, Reader Symbol, Handle with handle Rose and
Grand Master Key Cylinder shall be visible from outside the room and,
Handle with handle rose and Thumb turn Escutcheon shall be visible from
inside the room.
I. No screws shall be visible or available on the handle from outside the

room for security reason and both inside and outside handles shall be
fixed together using same screws from inside the room to outside.
J. Necessary provision shall be provided on the door to install the electronics

locks on the door.
K. Card Reader shall be compatible with NFC & BLE technology which
enables RFID communication between the Electronic locks with NFC
ready or BLE supports last generation Cell phones.
L. Card Reader shall be compatible with ISO 14.443 A, 14.113 B, 15.693,

iClass as well other than NFC and BLE technology.
M. Card Reader shall be a Mifare reader and shall read the card at a
maximum distance of 5cm to prevent by reading a master card from
long distance to open the door.
N. High security mortises lock case available in ANSI version and also CE,
FCC approved.
O. Electronics Lock Handle shall be Solid brass handles matching

architectural finishes, BHMA, ANSI and EURO standards with self
lubricating long life bearings and integral part of the lock and shall match
security standards.
P. Electronics Lock case shall have 3 point steel latch construction with an
antifriction mechanism and have Case hardened full 1-inch (ANSI) throw
deadbolt.
Q. It shall have Panic release function – the deadbolt and latch are Fire
listed for usage on fire doors. (UL, EN, BS) and automatically retracted by
inside handle for easy egress.
R. Electronic locks shall be with a 4.5v, 4 switch lock case to record all type
of mechanical openings and shall be with Electro-mechanical locking
mechanism located in the lock case.
S. Guestroom Lock shall include a Reader with sealed Electronics, an

Electrified Mortise Lock Case, Handle, cover plates, latch strikes, edge
have an “anti-friction” latch absorbing force when locking the door to
prevent noise.
T. The lock case shall be a heavy duty double locking mortise type with 60
minutes Fire Rating on Wooden door.
U. The lock case shall have an auxiliary latch blocking the latch bolt when
the door is shut in the frame

V. The Lock shall include a Mechanical Key Override with canceling cover.
The cylinder usage must be recorded in the audit trail, and the cylinder
must be recode-able to at least 5 levels including 2 construction levels
without removing from door.
W. The override Mechanical Master Cylinder shall NOT be able to be

duplicated.
X. Locks shall be available with split trim and full escutcheon as required, all
decorative or retrofit cover plates shall match finishes and designs.
Y. Mortise locks cases shall support the use of custom designed levers and
handles.
Z. No clutch mechanism with card reader shall be accepted.
AA. No Electric strike system shall be accepted for guest room access.
BB. No screws shall be visible on the handle from outside to prevent security
breach.
CC. Door lock handle shall be integral part of the electronics locking
mechanism and should match all security standards.
DD. Handle shall be equipped with handle rose and heavy duty retainer
mechanism and fixed with 2 screws through the door from back side
handle Rose with retainer.
EE. The lock audit trail shall have a mechanism that protects it against
attempts to “wipe out” information by repeated actions/inserts by a card.
FF. Lock shall be capable of receiving software upgrade by downloading

new program into the Flash Memory.
GG. The Locks shall be tamper resistant and have no accessible parts from
corridor side when the door is closed. All handles shall attach without
visible set screws.
HH. All guest rooms’ locks shall have an Automatic Deadbolt Function as an
option to use if required by the operator.
II. The Guest Room Management system shall be interfaced with electronics
locking system in room level via RF ZigBee communication by using a RF
End Node connected with the locking system.
JJ. A server level communication shall be in place between GRMS and

Guest Room Electronics Locking system in addition to room level
communication.
KK. GRMS vendor shall be responsible for electronics locking system’s online
communication with server through RMS network.
LL. Interface between RMS and Electronics locking system shall be proven
one in Hotel Industry for couple of years

MM. All audit trial reports from the electronics locks shall be transferred to
electronics locking system server through RMS network and RMS server.
NN. Doors without RMS interface, then the electronics locking system shall be
online via a ZigBee wireless network. ZigBee Network shall have either only
ZigBee Gateway or combination of ZigBee Gateway and ZigBee Router
depending on the building floor layout and site requirement.
OO. Electronics lock shall have an RF End Node to communicate with ZigBee
Network.
PP. Approved Manufacturer:
1. Vingcard Essence
2. Kaba Saflok Concierge 3 and SR series RFID
3. Or Approved Equivalent
2.15 OFFLINE CARD READER WITH LOCK

A. The Offline card reader lock shall be economical lock with Standalone
electronic lock with RFID technology and can be used on Wooden and
Metal doors.
B. The locks shall be Fire listed for usage on fire doors. (UL, EN, BS).
C. High security mortise lockcase available in ANSI, JPN, AUS and EURO
versions.
D. CE, FCC approved.
E. Solid brass handle with self lubricating long life bearings.
F. 3 point steel latch construction with an antifriction mechanism.
G. Case hardened full 1-inch (ANSI) throw deadbolt.
H. Panic release function – deadbolt and latch are automatically retracted

by inside handle for easy egress in emergency situations.
I. Future proof re-programmable FLASH RAM lock memory.
J. Powered by 3AA batteries that provide up to 3 years normal life time.
K. 600 event audit trail.
L. Approved Manufacturer
1. Vingcard Sigma
2. Kaba Saflok RT
3. Or Approved Equal

2.16 RFID CARDS

A. Contact less RFID cards meets ISO 14.443 A/B shall be provided with the
system.
B. Each electronic card shall have a unique pre-programmed code. The

code shall be set at the time of manufacture and must not be capable of
being reproduced.
C. The card shall be a credit card sized flat card. The card shall allow the
printing of a photo ID directly on to the surface of the card and shall be
able to contain the card holder’s biometric details (if required). The cards
supplied shall all have a prefix or initial number of digits in the unique
code, which will hereafter be assigned only to the Hotel. It shall be
possible to program the system into zones and to allow cards to operate
in any combination of zones.
D. Programming shall be via the Card Encoding System.
E. If the system uses “Master” or “Editor” then these cards shall not be
different from any of the other cards. Any card shall be able to be
selected and used as a Master or Editor card. If a Master or Editor card is
lost then the system must accept a new master or editor from any of the
existing cards and allow the old cards to be deleted.
F. All cards shall be programmed and issued at the front desks and Security
office room of the hotel.
G. Cards shall be of MIFARE cards using a transmission frequency of 13.56

MHz and providing a read range of 0-5cm from card readers. The read
distances anticipated by the reader shall be achieved without the need
for integral batteries
H. Cards shall be with an “anti-cloning” technology to making it impossible

to “clone” a key by copying information from one key card onto another.
I. Guest Cards: Guest Cards shall be Mifare Ultralight.
J. Staff Cards: Staff cards shall be Mifare Classic 4k.
2.17 ENROLLMENT CENTER

A. Equipment for enrolling personnel into, and removing personnel from,
system database, using dedicated workstation PC or central-station
equipment.
1. Include equipment to enroll selected biometric credentials.
B. Enrollment equipment shall support encoding of credential cards

including cryptographic and other internal security checks as required for
system.
1. Allow only authorized entry-control enrollment personnel to access

the enrollment equipment using passwords.

2. Include enrollment subsystem configuration controls and electronic

diagnostic aids for subsystem setup and troubleshooting with the
Central Station.
3. Enrollment station records printer shall meet requirements of the

report printer.
C. Card Encoders
1. The card encoder, connected to the encoding system Unit, it shall

enable RFID card reading and encoding.
2. The Card Encoder shall have an Ethernet interface.
3. The Card Encoder shall be with ISO 14443 A&B read/write standard.
4. The Card Encoder shall read Mifare Classic 1K, Mifare Classic 4k,
Mifare Ultralight and key fobs.
5. The Card Encoder shall have an LED indicator for power.
6. The Card Encoder shall have a Beeper indicator for identifying

correct Encoding / Error Encoding.
7. The Card Encoder shall read the card from a distance up to 40mm.
8. The Card Encoder shall be capable of encoding with an operation

frequency of 13.5 MHz ± 5%.
9. The Card Encoder shall support Anti-Collision procedure.
10. The Card Encoder shall be operated with a volt DC 9 ~ 12V ± 5%.
11. The Card Encoder shall communicate in the Network via TCP/IP or
10/100 or Base-T auto detection protocol.
12. The Card Encoder shall be able to carry out the following
operations:
a. Identification of cards
b. Card encoding.
13. Verification of Cards by reading following information:
a. Room number(s)
b. Check In date/time
c. Check Out date/time
d. User Group
e. Whether the guest has access to Common doors
f. Issue area

D. Extended Card History.
1. The Card Encoder shall be with following Environmental conditions:
a. Operation: 5 - 50ºC, 20 -90% RH (without dew forming)
b. Storage: -20 - 70ºC, 0 - 95% RH (without dew forming)
E. Accessories:
1. Steel desk-type console, swivel chair on casters, and equipment

racks.
2. Console and Equipment Racks: Comply with EIA-310-D.
3. Equipment, with the exception of the printers, shall be rack mounted

in the console and equipment racks.
4. Storage Cabinet: Locking cabinet approximately 1830 mm high,

915 mm wide, and 610 mm deep, with 3 adjustable shelves and 2
storage racks for storage of disks, tapes, printouts, printer paper,
ribbons, manuals, and other documentation.
F. System Capacity: Number of badges shall be limited only by hard disk

space. Badge templates and images shall be in color, supporting the
maximum color capability of Microsoft Windows operating system.
2.18 PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES

A. Available Manufacturers: As per the list of approved manufacture
B. Push-Button Switches: Momentary-contact back-lighted push buttons,

with stainless-steel switch enclosures.
1. Electrical Ratings:
a. Minimum continuous current rating of 10 A at 120 V ac or 5 A

at 240-V ac.
b. Contacts that will make 720 VA at 60 A and that will break at

720 VA at 10 A.
2. Enclosures: Flush or surface mounting. Push buttons shall be suitable

for flush mounting in the switch enclosures.
3. Enclosures shall additionally be suitable for installation in the

following locations:
a. Indoors, controlled environment.
b. Indoors, uncontrolled environment.
c. Outdoors.
4. Power: Push-button switches shall be powered from their associated

Controller, using dc control.

2.19 DOOR AND GATE HARDWARE INTERFACE

A. Exit Device with Alarm: Operation of the exit device shall generate an
alarm and annunciate a local alarm. Exit device and alarm contacts are
specified in Section "Door Hardware." Final Exit door alarms shall be
interfaced with respective CCTV camera focusing the door to pop-up on
security video wall.
B. Exit Alarm: Operation of a monitored door shall generate an alarm. Exit

devices and alarm contacts are specified in Division 08 Section "Door
Hardware."
C. Electric Door Strikes: Use end-of-line resistors to provide power line

supervision. Signal switches shall transmit data to Controller to indicate
when the bolt is not engaged and the strike mechanism is unlocked, and
shall report a forced entry. Power and signal shall be from the Controller.
Electric strikes are specified in Division 08 "Door Hardware."
D. Electromagnetic Locks: End-of-line resistors shall provide power line

supervision. Lock status sensing signal shall positively indicate door is
secure. Power and signal shall be from the Controller. The magnetic
locks shall have a minimum of 1200lbs holding force."
E. Vehicle Gate Operator: Interface electrical operation of gate with

controls of this Section. Vehicle gate operators shall be connected,
monitored, and controlled, by the security access Controllers. Vehicle
gate and accessories are specified in Division 32 Section "Chain Link
Fences and Gates."
2.20 INTERCOM SYSTEM

A. Provide a complete microprocessor controlled, "duplex" voice intercom
as shown in the drawings connected to a Master intercom station at
CCTV Room. The Intercom system(s) shall be rated for the environment
they are being installed at and shall be vandal resistant and ADA-
compliant, hands-free speakerphone communications device with a
stainless steel faceplate and metal buttons.
B. The IP intercom system shall support Group call & public address calls with
priority levels
1. Alarm broadcast (used for emergency broadcast)
2. High priority (used for alarm tones)
3. Normal (used for normal PA announcements)
4. Low (used for entertainment & music distribution)
C. The intercom system shall support Two way calls including

D. The intercom system shall support Recording and audio surveillance
E. The Intercom system shall support Class of service and service profiles in
order to ensure that user only get access to features he is authorized to
use.
F. The intercom system shall support integration with security and video
management system
1. The system shall have a SDK (software development kit) to integrate

with 3rd party systems
2. The system shall have integrations with CCTV systems
3. The system shall have integration with alarm systems
G. All interfaces, as required, shall be provided to allow remote unlocking of

doors/Gate barriers equipped with an initiating Intercom from the
Intercom Master Station.
H. Intercom Stations
1. The intercom unit shall be dirt, dust and water resistant. They must be
tested according to IEC/EN 60529 with a minimum grade of IP 66
2. The Intercom shall use shall have a digital MEMS (micro-electro-

mechanical-system) microphone.
I. Intercom Master station
1. The Intercom Desktop Master Station shall have a 3.5” LCD

touchscreen display with the capability of displaying pictures from
an IP video camera.
2. The unit shall store 48 video sources in the onboard directory and
readily available even when not in conversation.
3. The unit shall have handset to allow the user to switch from private
conversation to open discussion in handsfree mode.
4. The unit shall have Four touchscreen Navigation Keys and ten Direct
Access Keys (DAK) provide single-touch access to stations, group
calls, audio monitoring, public address zones, radio channels and/or
the opening of doors and gates.

5. The unit shall be designed for critical communication features such

as group call, call priority, and speaker volume override.
J. Approved Manufacturer
1. Stentofon
2.21 RS-232 ASCII INTERFACE SPECIFICATIONS

A. ASCII interface shall allow RS-232 connections to be made between the
control station operating as the host PC and any equipment that will
accept RS-232 ASCII command strings, such as CCTV switchers, intercoms,
and paging systems.
1. Each alarm input in system shall allow for individual programming to

output up to four unique ASCII character strings through two
different COM ports on the host PC.
2. Each input shall have the ability to be defined to transmit a unique

ASCII string for alarm and one for restore through one COM port,
and a unique ASCII string for a nonalarm abnormal condition and
one for a normal condition through the same or different COM port.
3. The predefined ASCII character strings shall have the ability to be up

to 420 characters long with full use of all the ASCII control
characters, such as return or line feed. The character strings shall be
defined in database of system and then assigned to the
appropriate inputs.
4. The COM ports of the host PC used to interface with external

equipment shall be defined in the setup portion of the software. The
COM port's baud rate, word length, stop bits, and parity shall be
definable in the software to match that of the external equipment.
B. Alarm System Interface:
1. RS-232 output shall be capable of transmitting alarms from other

monitoring and alarm systems to central-station automation
software.
2. Alternatively, alarms that are received by this access control system

are to be transferred to alarm automation system as if they were
sent through a digital alarm receiver.
3. System shall be able to transmit an individual message from any

alarm input to a burglar alarm automation monitoring system.
4. System shall be able to append to each message a predefined set

of character strings as a prefix and suffix.

2.22 VIDEO AND CAMERA CONTROL

A. Control station or designated workstation displays live video from a CCTV
source.
1. Control Buttons: On the display window, with separate control

buttons to represent Left, Right, Up, Down, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Scan,
and a minimum of two custom command auxiliary controls.
2. Provide at least seven icons to represent different types of cameras,

with ability to import custom icons. Provide option for display of
icons on graphic maps to represent their physical location.
3. Provide the alarm-handling window with a command button that

will display the camera associated with the alarm point.
B. Approved Manufacturers
1. Honeywell
2. Pelco
2.23 EMERGENCY PULL ALARM

A. Provide emergency pull alarm system in the poolside, SPA, gym, disabled
toilets, disabled guestrooms and disabled guestroom bathrooms in the
hotel. Provide alarm notification and acknowledgement in security
monitoring room. Poolside, SPA and Gym shall have local audible alarm
at respective reception along with alarm notification at security
monitoring room.
B. The system shall be standalone interfaced with to the access control

system for central monitoring and alarm
C. Provide magnetic switch pull cords for pool side area that is compatible
to use in wet area and high moisture area such as Sauna, Steam room
and Pool side.
D. Provide reset switch to acknowledge the alarm.
E. Provide light with sounder for audible alarm.
F. The controller shall support a minimum of atleast four zones with volt free
contacts for external alarm notification.
2.24 PANIC BUTTON

A. Duress buttons shall be furnished and installed at locations indicated in
drawings or instructed by the owner security operations to indicate a
potential emergency to the by depressing a button or switch.
B. Location of panic buttons shall be coordinated in field with the furniture

placement and with the Architect/Owner.

1. Panic buttons shall be fully supervised and shall be double-pole,

double-throw type. Further, the Contractor shall install duress buttons
with care avoiding areas where the button could be depressed
accidentally.
2. Panic buttons shall be a latching output and shall require a special

tool or key to bypass once activated, and shall be tamper resistant.
C. Approved Manufacturers
1. Honeywell
2. Lenel
2.25 BAGGAGE SCANNER

A. The Baggage scanner shall be IP based compact versatile x-ray scanning
system ideal for hotels with exceptional image qualities and detection
capabilities. The system shall automatically detect explosives and
narcotics.
B. The Baggage scanner shall have a minimum tunnel size 550 mm (W) x 360
mm (H).
C. Approved Manufacturers
1. Rapiscan 618XR
2. Smiths Detection
2.26 METAL DETECTOR

A. The Project will be provided with Walk through metal detector as well as
hand held metal detector to be used in case of emergency.
B. Walk Through Metal detector:
1. The walk through Metal detector shall be IP based with over 20

application programs ideal for Hotels. The system shall provide Dual-
sided detection. The system shall have over 100 sensitivity levels with
tamperproof settings.
2. 33 pinpoint zones to precisely identify multiple target locations from

head to toe on the left, center and right sides of the body
3. the world's highest test certifications, including the following

international airports including TSA, ECAC, STACAena, CJIAC and
DfT
4. Meets IP55 standards

C. Hand Held Metal Detector:
1. Ultimate sensitivity: detects medium sized pistol from 9" distance;

large knife from 6"; razor blades and box cutters from 3" distance;
foil-wrapped drugs and tiny jewelry from 1".
2. The detector shall be Self-calibrating with use of digital

microprocessor eliminating the need for periodic sensitivity
adjustments.
3. Rugged, high-impact ABS case with reinforced coil compartment.

Exceeds Mil-Std-810F (drop test) Method 516.5, procedures II and IV.
4. Large 8" scan surface for quick, thorough scanning.
5. No tools required to change standard 9V battery (included).

Optional rechargeable battery kit available.
6. Sharp audible alarm and bright red LED indicates the detection of
metal.
7. Momentary push button helps temporarily eliminate detection of

nearby ambient metal such as rebar, metal walls.
8. Three-color LED indication: Green LED indicates ON; Amber LED

indicates LOW BATTERY: Red LED indicates ALARM.
9. Operating temperatures: -35° F (-37° C) to 158° F (70° C)
D. Approved Manufacturers
1. Garrett
2. Smiths Detection
2.27 GATE BARRIER

A. Gate Barrier shall be provided at all entrances and exits as indicated in
the drawings. The gate barriers shall be provided automatic gate arms,
magnetic loops, electronic-eye and the associated electrical controls
including remote controls. The gate barrier shall have photovoltaic sensor
to detect any person or vehicle underneath the barrier arm. The barrier
shall have Crash Guard to protect against damage by vehicles and shall
be able to operate at the extreme cold and hot weather of Gulf region.
Provide gate barriers with long range card readers.
B. Gates shall be opened using the Proximity Access cards same room card
or Vehicle Tags as per the client requirements.
C. Gate Arm Shaft: Provide with permanently lubricated bearings.
D. Gate Arm Motor: Heavy duty sleeve bearings capacitor type motor with
Solenoid operated brake control

E. Control by heavy-duty relay with ample current carrying contacts to

operate the full starting load. Thermal overload circuit breaker protection
with automatic reset. Fused protection for motor, relay and solenoid
power.
F. Provide mechanical means to operate gate arm to raise/ lower in case of

power or system failure.
G. Gate Control Panels: The panels shall contain the 24 volt DC power
supply, with solid state components throughout, as well as manual control
switches and circuit breaker protection of the AC supply and low voltage
power source. Contain the control circuitry on a pluggable glass epoxy
board unit that determines the mode of the gate operation. Provide key
switch to raise, Lower and select automatic functioning of the gate.
Provide a control to activate or inactivate the safety device. Control
panel shall be constructed to IP54, have lockable Perspex front doors.
Control panel shall be provided with a power disconnect and is
concealed (flush) mounted. Earth fault protection shall be provided for 3
phase motors.
H. Car Detectors: Loop detector wrapped in vinyl plastic to connect to Loop

Detector unit. Detector shall be completely transistorized and mounted in
gate housing. It shall be self-tuning, digital design and shall operate with
circuitry that recognizes vehicle movement into the loop and an
unlimited duration of vehicle pressure or a pulse as required.
I. Approved Manufacturers are
4. Skidata
5. Gunnebo
2.28 RISING BOLLARDS

A. Rising Bollards shall be provided at the entrances as shown in the drawing
to restrict forceful vehicle entry to the project. Provide local control to the
security room and central control to the security monitoring room for
operating the bollards. The bollards shall have a suitable for the extreme
weather of Gulf countries and shall be IP67 rated.
B. Provide fixed visual light indicator at the sides of the rising bollard to
indicate the operation of rising bollards for the driver and to advise the
driver to stop or go. These light indicators shall be interfaced to the Rising
bollards
1. The signal shall be for applicable for outdoor locations that require a
small signal that is visible from less than 100ft (30m).
2. The signal shall have 4” Red and Green LED lights
3. Removable aluminum cut-away style visors.

4. Included L Brackets mount easily in either vertical or horizontal

applications.
5. Low Power all LED construction insures long life, low cost of
operation and no bulbs to change.
6. Screw terminal strip for easy wiring to your control switching.
7. Provide controller for controlling the lights and interfacing with rising
bollard operations.
C. The bollards shall be Crash test certified to PAS 68
D. The rising bollards shall have a minimum impact resistance of 20000 j and
shall have a minimum Break-in proof of 250000 j. The bollards shall have
opening and closing time of less than 5s
E. Bollard remains in the raised position during power failure and can be
lowered manually
F. Approved Manufacturers
1. Gunnebo
2.29 SECURITY MONITORING VIDEO WALL AND CONSOLES

A. The security system shall be provided with video wall system as shown in
the drawing. The contractor to provide complete seamlessly working
system required for the proper function of the security control room. The
components are not limited to the following:
1. 55” Commercial grade flat panel displays: This professional-grade

large-screen display is designed for the rigors of 24/7 operation,
direct LED backlighting, full high-definition resolution (1920 x 1080)
and a 5.5mm distance bezel width. Approved manufacturers
include
a. NEC
b. Samsung
c. or Approved Equivalent
2. Video wall controller: The video wall controller shall be provided as

required based on the configuration with a spare of at least 3Nos of
inputs and outputs. Approved Manufacturers include
a. Datapath
b. Dexon
c. Or Approved Equivalent
3. Security Furniture Consoles

d. The console bays shall have a dimension of 48”W x 30”H x

19”D. Console system shall feature welded steel bays of
construction and extensible design that provides optimal
structural integrity, and unrestricted cable management and
access.
e. Console system shall have exterior support foot placement

that provides support and unimpeded chair/operator
movement. Work surface/ Desktop shall have cantilevered
supports that provide unimpeded leg movement. Each 24”
width bay shall accept rackrail or a slide-out CPU tray.
f. The desktop shall be constructed of 1-1/8” thick triplere fined

MDF and finished in a fingerprint resistant black textured
powder coat.
g. Steel components shall be warrantied to be free from defects

in material or workmanship under normal use and conditions
for the lifetime of the product.
h. Thermolaminate components shall be warrantied to be free

from defects in material or workmanship under normal use and
conditions for a period of 7 years.
i. The console shall have monitor mounts to accommodate 2Nos

of 21” monitor.
j. The chairs provided shall be fully adjustable, ergonomically

designed professional use monitoring chair and shall have a
15 year warranty,
k. Approved Manufacturer:
1) Middle Atlantic
2) Or Approved Equal.
2.30 TIME AND ATTENDANCE SOFTWARE

A. Proposed Time & Attendance System must have an automated interface
with the payroll/HR software.
B. The Time & Attendance System should be a scalable "off-the-shelf" stand-

alone package, offering detailed, user defined report and information
filtering.
C. The system must have the capability of tracking and viewing employee
hours and overtime in real-time.
D. The system must have the capability for viewing employee information by
employee (i.e. leave balances, schedules, etc.) from both a computer
and from the clock terminals.
E. The system must support time off requests via a PC or the chosen clocking
terminals.

F. System must allow multiple approval levels. System must allow supervisor
to assign temporary timekeeping responsibility to another
employee/supervisor.
G. System must be configurable to: collect time clock data hourly (at a
minimum); perform nightly database backups; check/update terminal
time daily (if necessary) and discard/archive time clock data weekly.
H. System must provide an error checking system to evaluate time punches

against shift and pay policies.
I. The Time & Attendance System should have the capability to retain data
for inactive or terminated employees.
J. The system will allow or provide the ability to export reports and data to
Excel sheet.
K. The system must be able to restrict the employee/user from changing

hours and rates of pay. Describe your systems security to avoid changes
by the user/employee.
L. The time and attendance system shall be from the approved

manufacturers
1. Easy Clocking
2. Synel
3. Suprema
2.31 ATTIC STOCK

A. Provide following material as attic stock:
1. Fixed Dome IP Cameras :15Nos
2. Fixed Box Enclosed IP Cameras :5Nos
3. PTZ Dome IP Camera :2Nos
4. Guest Room Card readers & Lock :25Nos
5. Card Encoders :1Nos
6. Card readers :10Nos
7.
8. Staff Cards :1000Nos
9. Metal Detector :1No
10. Hand wand Metal detector :2Nos



PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FABRICATION
A. Complete all custom fabrication work off site.
B. Verify the depth of any rack, cabinet or enclosure prior to assembly to

ensure that mounted equipment will fit completely inside with the door or
cover closed (if applicable).
C. Install all rack-mounted equipment and test the systems before delivery of
equipment racks to the project site.

A. All products shall be from an ISO 9001 registered Manufacturer and shall
be UL listed.
B. Where applicable, all materials and equipment shall bear the label and
listing of Underwriters Laboratory and or CE. Application and installation
of all equipment and materials shall be in accordance with such labeling
and listing.
3.3 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas to receive the Work and the conditions under which
the Work would be performed. Identify conditions detrimental to the
proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.4 INSTALLATION

requirements of the applicable International Standards and
manufacturer's instructions.
C. The Contractor shall install all system components including Employer

Furnished Equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
and adjustments required to deliver a complete and operable system.
D. Adhere to manufacturer's published specifications for pulling tension,

minimum bend radius, and sidewall pressure when installing cables.
Where manufacturer does not provide bending radius information,
minimum-bending radius shall be 10 times cable diameter. Arrange and
mount equipment and materials in a manner acceptable to the
Consultant.

E. Effectively protect the Owner’s facilities, equipment, and materials from

dust, dirt, and damage during the installation. Remove all protection at
the completion of work daily.
F. Firmly and permanently, install electrical boxes, enclosures, and

permanent equipment to the building. Rigidly mounted equipment and
devices shall be plumb and square.
G. The contractor shall adhere to the installation schedule of the general

contractor and should attend all construction meetings scheduled by the
general contractor.
H. Mount all equipment to be installed over public areas in a manner

adequate to support the equipment loads with a minimum safety factor
of five. Do not use formed eyebolts or lag screws for support of
suspended equipment.
I. Choose colors and finishes of all exposed and custom fabricated items
and labels to blend in with the surroundings as approved by the
Consultant and the architect.
J. Final configuration shall be performed to the satisfaction of the

Employer’s IT Staff. This includes, but is not limited to; VLAN configuration,
IP addressing schemes, final port assignments and configurations.
Installation contractor shall ensure that the proper documentation is
provided to assist in the final system configuration.
K. Install cameras and infrared illuminators level and plumb.
L. Install cameras with 2300-mm minimum clear space below cameras and
their mountings. Change type of mounting to achieve required
clearance.
M. Set pan unit and pan-and-tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and
to obtain the field of view required for camera. Connect all controls and
alarms, and adjust.
N. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations,

unless otherwise indicated.
O. Install tamper switches on components indicated to receive tamper

switches, arranged to detect unauthorized entry into system component
enclosures, and mounted in self-protected, inconspicuous positions.
P. Avoid ground loops by making ground connections at only the control

station.
Q. For 12- and 24-V dc cameras, connect the coaxial cable shields only at
the monitor end.
R. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to

Division 26 Section "Identification of Electrical Systems."
S. Access control System

1. Drawing for installation of ACS shall be approved and shall be

coordinated with other services including fire alarm system.
2. Room clearance & proper access shall be provided as per

approved program.
3. Location/area shall be ready for site installation. Prior to the

installation, the area where the items to be installed shall be
inspected to ensure architectural works and finishing are complete
and area is free from dust.
4. Wall or ceiling mounting of the product should follow the instructions

for the mount used and use approved installation practice
appropriate for the structure and material the mount is being
attached to.
5. Prior to the installation, check all cabling as per wiring detail

drawings.
6. Mark the device panel location and leave enough length of cable
at both ends for termination.
7. During installation, drilling operation is required on the wall with

proper marking.
8. Check the power and control wiring at panel end.
9. At panel end make the proper Insulation to the wiring to protect

from cable damage.
10. Exact location of the card reader shall be as per approved Access
Control System Device Layout plan. The height of the card reader
shall be as per typical mounting height 1.2 m bottom line of card
reader from finish floor level. Remove mounting plate from the Card
reader and fix into concealed back box using screw proper
hardware. Pull out the field wiring from back box through card
reader mounting plate hole. For termination, stripe the cable with
wire stripper then twist the cable and screw it into the card reader
terminal strip as per typical wiring detail diagram. Push back all the
excess cables Into the concealed back box and fix the card reader
In the mounting plate.
11. The Request to exit button shall be installed on the secure side of the
door. The final Location at the RTE shall be as per the approved
Access control system Layout drawing. The Final mounting height of
the RTE shall be as per the approved Access control System Layout
drawing. Pullout the cable from the 3X3 back box Installed
embedded on the waiL Tennlnate the appropriate cable on the RTE
and mount the RTE on the 3X3 backbox.
12. Doors are monitored by door contacts used different types for
timber, metal and glass doors. The cabled part for door contact will
be Installed on the door frame and the moving part of the door
contact on the door shutter.

13. The final accessories i.e. electromagnetic lock, drop bolt, door
contacts and brackets Locations and mounting distance from the
door frame and door type will be as per the approved door
Installation drawings. All the Labelling at devices and cables shall be
accordance with the access control Layout drawing.
T. Labeling

corresponding to the Contract Drawings using wording, format,
style, color, and arrangement of text approved by the Consultant.
Refer to labelling section for additional details.
U. Engraving
1. Refer to drawings for plate engraving and construction details.
V. Grounding and Shielding
1. Earthing and Bonding shall be installed as necessary to preclude

operation.

isolation from the building structure and electrical raceways. Use
flexible conduits and PVC fittings to provide insulated connections
between equipment racks and the building electrical raceways.
3. Ground the chassis of all rack mounted components in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions and verify a D.C. resistance
between each chassis and the rack ground bus bar.
W. Wireless Systems:
1. Ensure that all wireless systems operate on different frequencies from

each other and from any other transmitters in the area.
2. Coordinate frequency selection for compatibility with local RF

environment.
X. Cutting and Patching

patching, required to complete the Work including, but not limited
to:
2. Work required making several parts fit together properly.
3. Removal and replacement of defective Work
4. Removal and replacement of Work not conforming to the

5. Removal of samples of installed Work as specified for testing.

6. Routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces to permit installation

of new construction elements
7. Cutting and patching associated with new construction, the

installation of ill-timed work and corrective work.

maintain structural integrity at all penetrations. Carefully perform all
cutting to the existing surfaces encountered during the course of
the Work of this project to the extent necessary and required to
permit the installation of new Work and to remove existing Work in
place.
9. Close all abandoned penetrations, new and old, whether visible or

concealed, in and adjacent to work being performed as a part of
the Work of this Contract when such penetrations are revealed by
demolition procedures specified herein.

approval before installing materials or finishes, which substantially
deviate from existing material, color or texture. Comply with the
other specified requirements.
11. Prior to cutting and patching in rated construction, consult with

relevant engineer.
12. Upon completion of cutting and patching in rated construction,

repair wall, ceiling, or floor assembly as necessary to maintain the
required fire rating.
13. Any penetration through fire rated walls (including those in sleeves)
will be resealed with an Underwriter Laboratories (UL) approved
sealant. Confirm with local Authorities Having Jurisdiction for
requirements.

A. Maintain a competent supervisor and supporting technical personnel,
acceptable to the Employer during the entire installation. Change of
supervisor during the project shall not be acceptable without prior written
approval from the Employer.
B. Before connecting any equipment to electrical power outlets, measure

and record the A.C. voltages between hot, neutral, and ground and
verify correct outlet polarity. Verify test and document correct and safe
function of isolated ground power systems.
C. Determine the best sequence of energizing systems to minimize the risk of

damage.
D. After successfully energizing the systems, make preliminary adjustments

and document the settings of all controls, parameters of corrective
networks, voltages at key interconnection points, gains and losses as
applicable. Replicate the gain structure tests performed at the shop and

document the absence of any waveform distortion,

interference signals, or oscillations.
E. The Contractor shall develop and execute an onsite acceptance-testing

program.
F. The plan shall address all requirements identified in this specification and
test all Contractor supplied cabling and hardware components. The plan
shall follow accepted industry testing practices and have a method of
independent verification.
specification shall be replaced, upgraded, or added by the Contractor
as necessary to correct the noted deficiencies. After correction of a
noted deficiency, re-testing shall be performed to verify the effectiveness
of the corrective action.
H. Field Inspection of Connections: Perform 100% visual inspection of the

Work. Examine the size, quality and placement of each connection to
verify installation in accordance with Contract Documents and executed
shop drawings.
I. Manufacturer’s Field Service: At the start of the installation, periodically as

the Work progresses, and after completion, furnish the services of the
manufacturer’s technical representative at the job site as necessary to
advise on every phase of the Work. As a minimum, furnish full-time
attendance during the first three work days, at least once every week
thereafter, and furnish technical assistance to the Installer as may be
required.
3.6 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Refer to Structured Cabling System for all fiber and copper testing
requirements.
B. The installer shall have handheld Camera test monitor that shall provide
PoE power to the camera.
C. All equipment shall be testing as per manufacturer’s testing methods as

well as related industry standards.
D. Furnish the following equipment. Equipment to be available for the entire

test period through final system testing.
1. Handheld Camera test monitor with built-in power output for PoE
cameras, Built-in PTZ Camera Tester, Built-in RJ-45 Ethernet Cable
Tester, Built-in POE Tester.
2. Electrician Tool Kit.
3. Multimeter
4. Line Tester
5. All software installed.

6. All Source Code related to the project on portable media.
7. Misc. cables, cords, adapters to verify the signal and cable

performances.
8. Ladders necessary to inspect ceiling devices.
9. Six portable radios for communication during testing and

commissioning.
3.7 TRAINING
A. The manufacturers authorized and factory trained personnel shall provide
5 Days of training sessions. Duration of each training session shall be at-
least four hours long. Contractor to video record each session and
provide six soft copies of the recording as part of the Close-Out
Submittals.
B. The training shall include at a minimum:
4. Methods and means of troubleshooting and replacement of all

distribution and drop wiring and devices.
C. Manuals, drawings and technical documentation shall be used in training

and shall be left with the Employer, or its designated representative at the
completion of training for Employer use in the future.

technical documentation, such as programming information, electronic
schematic drawings and technical description, as part of training and
documentation. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to ensure
this documentation can be obtained prior to acceptance, as listed in this
document.
3.8 INSPECTION
A. Provide a statement of completion certifying that the system is installed
and is ready for acceptance testing and equalization to the Consultant.
B. Schedule a time for the Consultant to perform system acceptance testing

and equalization with at least 14 days advance notice.
C. Furnish a technician who is familiar with the system to assist the Consultant
during the acceptance testing and equalization for the duration of time it
takes to complete the adjustments (regular time or overtime as required).
A minimum of 24 hours, as required to complete the adjustments.
D. Each connection shall be inspected for proper termination.

E. Record final settings on all equipment and submit with contract closeout
documents.
F. Upon completion of initial tests and adjustments, submit written report of

tests to the Employer along with all documents, diagrams, and record
drawings required herein.
G. If the system does not meet criteria or if additional trips to the job site for
testing or equalization are required, the Contractor shall reimburse the
employer for all expenses and professional time encountered by the
Consultant.
3.9 ADJUSTING
permanently stained, marked, or otherwise damaged. Replace Work
which is damaged or cannot be adequately cleaned as directed.
B. Satisfaction of the above requirements shall not relieve the Contractor of

responsibility for incorrect installations, defective equipment items, or
collateral damage as a result of Contractor’s deficient work/defective
equipment.
C. The Employer reserves the right to direct changes to the control system
software and programming for a period of three months after final
acceptance. Such changes shall be made without additional cost to the
Employer.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Remove all unnecessary tools and equipment, unused materials, packing
materials, and debris from each area where Work has been completed
unless designated for storage.
B. Clean all areas around system equipment and be sure that the inside of
each equipment rack is free of wire stripping and other debris.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work during the construction period so that it will be without
any indication of use or damage at the time of acceptance.
END OF SECTION


or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X
Handover 0 X
Procurement (RFQ) X
3
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Access Control X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X
Handover X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X
Handover X
ISA Server X
Procurement (RFQ) X
7
Training X
Handover X
Deployment Server X
Procurement (RFQ) X
8
Training X
Handover X

by FRHI X
9
Training X
Handover 0 X
1 PMK International
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
GPON by FRHI
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X
Handover 0 X
Procurement (RFQ) X
system equipment.
Training X
Handover X
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Security Network -
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
13
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Retail Network -
X
Procurement (RFQ) X
14
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Servers X
Procurement (RFQ) X
15
Training X
Handover X
Desktops X
Procurement (RFQ) X
16
Training X
Handover X
Laptops X
Procurement (RFQ) X
17
Training X
Handover X
Printer X
Procurement (RFQ) X
18
Training X
Handover X
2 PMK International
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
Procurement (RFQ) X
19
Training X
Handover X
Point of Sale X
Procurement (RFQ) X
20
Training X
Handover X
Procurement (RFQ) X
21
Training X
Handover X
Passport Scanning X
Procurement (RFQ) X
22
Training X
Handover X
Procurement (RFQ) X
23
Training X
Handover 0 X
Procurement (RFQ) X
24
Training X
Handover X
Procurement (RFQ) X
25
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Procurement (RFQ) X
26
Training X
Handover 0 X
Procurement (RFQ) X
27
Training X
Handover 0 X
Media Panel X
Procurement (RFQ) X
28
Training X
Handover 0 X
3 PMK International
or
ct
ed
tra
nt
on
oi
pp
C
V
rA
EL
Task Notes
o r to
/
ct ra
or
ct
tra pe
tr a
on O
on
C n t/
C
lie
n
C
ai
M
Digital Signage X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
CCTV System X
Procurement (RFQ) X
Training X 0
Handover X 0
GRMS X
Procurement (RFQ) X
documents.
Training X 0
Handover X 0
4 PMK International

12128-Elv-Specs-001

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

12128-Elv-Specs-001

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

12128

AQUA RAFFLES JEDDAH - JEDDAH, KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

PART 5 – ELV / AV / IT / SECURITY SPECIFICATIONS

Revision Date By Description Resp. Consult

E 17.11.2016 PMK 100% Final Design – Addendum No. PMK

PART 5 – ELV / AV / IT / SECURITY SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 01 – COMMUNICATION CABLING SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

Revision Date By Description Resp. Consult

PART 2 - PRODUCTS .............................................................................................................. 23

PART 3 - EXECUTION ............................................................................................................. 49

27 10 00 Communication Cabling System - REV. E Page 1 of 78

B. Contractor shall coordinate all installation activities and details with

C. Contractor shall provide all system documentation and submittals.

D. Contractor shall provide warranty and maintenance support as

E. Contractor shall provide all calculations and/or analysis to support

H. Contractor shall give required notices.

I. The Contractor shall perform pre-delivery testing, site testing, and

J. Contractor shall comply with all codes, ordinances, regulations,

K. Employer reserves the right to procure the required equipment

27 10 00 Communication Cabling System - REV. E Page 2 of 78

L. Contractor shall verify space, power and cooling requirements

1. “ITE” Series Drawings (Plans).

2. “ITS” Series Drawings (Block Diagrams and Schematic layouts).

3. Electronic Security System Drawings.

N. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Audiovisual Specification Section 27 40 00

2. IT Network Equipment Specification Section 27 20 00

3. Electronic Security System Specification Section 28 00 00

O. Coordination and interface with other trades including but not

1. Architectural Drawings and Specifications

2. Interiors Drawings and Specifications

3. MEP Drawings and Specifications

4. Structural Drawings and Specifications

5. Authorities having jurisdiction.

P. Contractor to refer to Appendix A “AV/IT/Security Responsibility

ASTM® American Society for Testing and Materials

BICSI Building Industry Consulting Service International

BSSC Building Seismic Safety Council

CENELEC Comité Européen de Normalisation Electrotechnique

CSA Canadian Standard Association.

27 10 00 Communication Cabling System - REV. E Page 3 of 78

EIA Electronics Industries Association

ELV Extra Low Voltage

FCC Federal Communications Commission

FTR Floor Telecom Room

Gbps Gigabit per Second

IDC Insulation Displacement Connector

IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

ISO International Organization for Standardization

ISP Internet Service Provider

ITU International Telecommunication Union

ITU-T ITU—Telecommunication Standardization Sector

LDV Link Design Value

LVJB Low Voltage Junction box

LSZH Low Smoke Zero Halogen

MDF Main Distribution Frame

Mbps Megabit per second

NEC National Electric Code

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NESC National Electric Safety Code

NEXT Near End Cross Talk